Home

Genius I/O Discrete and Analog Blocks User`s Manual

1. a41552 50 is 1 SERIAL 1 2 2 SERIAL 2 3 sue D IN 4 Q SHIELD OUT e 5 CJ DC o o 6 O e o 7 e 8 FIELD t 5 1 8 pevices 10 S gt 11 5 eo o 12 EN 13 FIELD 14 T INPUT 15 LOAD 4 DEVICES 16 1 e 17 3 LOAD e adi 18 O oc 19 LOAD 20 45 21 68 LOAD 22 ORP DC SOURCE DC Source Block Power Disconnects Since block power is the same as circuit power it is important to wire block power disconnects so that block power and input power will be removed at the same time Locate the power disconnect as shown at right above a44472 DC SOURCE BLOCK YES NO O C DC 4 ra LOAD DC Caution If circuit power is not removed at the same time as block power the block may power up when multiple inputs are activated even though one leg of power has been removed from the block Source Block Wiring for Tristate Inputs If any input is configured as a Tristate Input install a resistor across the dry contacts of the input device This added resistance is required to use the Open Wire diagnostic Hi d Fora24 48 VDC block the resistor should be 5 1K ohms 1 2 Watt or larger For a 24 VDC blo
2. nl Jd NO INOS ON H3HS oven TNE bDMp 6G v6523 8NDUDVHJ E NEN sniuob SEIN L6 3 6SmG vr6ecuvi c2 Has sn oe oewupso u e NOLO POR TONY OHL mnes ONIMIM T 3AIQN39NI NON an tion recs awe i it 3148090 SGH roe um M mra seta 6 21 80 SHOT 1 ABBOB TUL uonpuio1ny ONNV4 j9 AS 3SiMeBHIO SS3TNn wa AB NMVeO JO syu w nb s eui buneeuu seJ4nso oue uluyM pel p3eu eq GES RISAY 9 O J SALON JAS SUBYOLUDID Buuiw pjei4 SaipuBdulUBN ajqD de990 LIM snipubddy pBAo4ddy 2j eq jsnuu a d Ino BINPOW SNIUSd eui oj pejoeuuoo seoweQ pje D sejdnooouueu upuy 18470 Ss 901 oja fy CE jw 90 ola A Tino 0 4 S21 oja anco Ile o colt olg kJ Au DOVE XP S irx olg onos xown Slim o amp 938 9 4 s puiuuej amp je3euububd Arx OS Buum pJeu PN e ipueouiuoN E LATX o YOL ola UDI OBUOS ou APX Souu Hos volt oja g eo O RI uejpainba 40 NoZ6GQv seomeq Bo puy ml eoi Ola U uojbeueduuo e4njpuedue uonounp ST ir o PIOCD 404 apog eAl IsueG eanjpueduue 5 Ir Ae dAL QN3 SIHL 1Y Suus LUPUS a 3 Lie iO EC SIL dAL d1dn020NM3HL oe Noy 9 Lo1 4 IX Nx aod LAKE OE SIE Ipua YDS 0 pejoeuuo2 eq AoW e5Siep col O f i EM euo Ajuo amp yinoui p eAlpueouluou 404 4 LOCALE om x UE m as SLON ases o CANO
3. 2842242 1 Serial 1 rox 2 Serial 2 3 Shield In 4 Shield Out 5 GND p 6 DC or HOT B id 7 DC or NEUT 8 NC oye HES 9 sig 2 WIRE RTD m 10 RTN Ll l all per f Input pat i 3 WIRE RTD 4 4 12 SHLD j RED CN EN isa D quee RTN e 14 BLK Dg dg iw ner f Input2 SHLD e e 16 SHLD j 171 SIG 2 WIRE RTD dg FEN 2 j ner f Input3 3 WIRE RTD 20 SHLD 21 SIG e 22 RTN 33 Rer f Input4 24 SHLD j 25 SIG 5 26 RTN 37 REF gt Input 5 28 SHLD j 291 SIG 5 30 RTN 31 REF gt Input 6 32 SHLD j Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 BlockConfiguration The configurable features of an RTD Block are listed below For many the factory setting will not need to be changed Feature Circuit or Factory Selections Block Setting Device Number Block null 0 to 31 a number must be selected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type Baud Rate Block 153 6std 153 6 std 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kbd Channel Active Circuit yes yes no Report Faults Circuit yes yes no Linearization Circuit Platinum Platinum Nickel Copper Linear RTDResistance Circuit 100 0ohms 5 0 2000 0 ohms AlphaType Circuit 0 003850 0 001000 0 007000 Low Alarm Circuit 200C 32 767 to 432 767 or 0 to 65 535 High
4. o o ore l N U T m 1 p Ne M a 9 1 SHLD IN B 82 cirri r 4 O SHLD IN A or shu our Qj DCN J YSN Place the connector with the bus still attached in a protected location Insulate the connector s protruding pins Caution If the connector pins come in contact with conductive material data on the bus may be corrupted possibly causing the system to shut down If the signal wires have been joined by soldering instead of using a bus connector remove and tape each wire pair carefully Do not allow the signal wires to contact each other or any conductor 3 Remove the block s Electronics Assembly 4 Remove field wiring from the Terminal Assembly 5 Remove and replace the Terminal Assembly Reverse the procedure to install the new Terminal Assembly Ifremoval of the block is permanent no replacement is anticipated the bus should be rewired using unbroken cable at the earliest opportunity GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 2 Installation 2 13 Chapter 3 Configuration This chapter explains What block configuration includes How to get started configuring I O blocks How to set up a block for offline configuration The features of the configuration Main Menu How to assign a block s required features How to assign additional block features Configuration Overview GEK 90486D 2 C
5. CatalogNo Description Series 90 Series 6 Series 5 IC660BBA020 24 48VdAnalog4I 20 96AI to AIn 3 and In to In 23 and In to In 63 and IC660BBA100 115VacAnalog41I 2O 9oAQnto 0AQn 3 On to On 31 On to On 31 IC660BBA024 24 48Vd SAnalog41 20 use AQT IC660BBA104 115Vac 125Vd SAnalog41 20 Ry to Rn 5 Ry to Ra 5 IC660BBA021 24 48VdaTD 6 Input ATy to MAI y 5 In to In 23 In to In 95 IC660BBA101 115Vac 125VdaTD 6 Input IC660BBA023 24 48VdcT C6Input IC660BBA103 115Vac 125VdcT C Input Ry to Rn 5 Rn to Rn 5 IC660BBA026 24 48VDCCS Analog 6 Input IC660BBA106 115Vac 125Vd S Analog 6 Input IC660BBA025 24 48Vd S Analog 6 Output AQn to AQn 5 On to Ons 95 On to Ons 95 IC660BBA105 115Vac 125Vd S Analog 6 Output Ry to Rass Ry to Rass IC660BBR100 115 230Wc Relay N C 16 Output Qn to Qn 15 On to Ons 15 On to Ons 15 IC660BBR101 115 230Wc Relay N O 16 Output Rn Rn IC660BBD020 24 48VdcSourcel6I O 96QI4 to QIn 150r In to In j and or In to In 15 and IC660BBD021 24 48VdcSink16I O ln to ln 15 or On to On 15 On to Ons 15 IC660BBD022 24VdcSource16I O Qn to Qn 15 Ry or R or IC660BBD023 24VdcSink16I O Ry to Rn 1 combo Ry to Ra 1 combo IC660BBD024 12 24VdcSource32I O QIp to QIn 31 or In to In 3jand or In to In 31 and IC660BBD025 5 12 24Vd Ginl92I O oly to ln 31 or On to On 31 On to On 31 Qn to Qn 31 Ry to Ry 1 or Ry to Ry 1 or Rn to Rn 3 combo Ry to Rn
6. sane 12 bits plus a40659 41 O 4 20V Buffer Hold sign D A Amplifier Circuitry converter vto gb a Converter SH Processor VOUT COM NOTE ower Syg Case Supply Common ground and case ZZZ Ground Ground ground terminals are shared between out put channels Accuracy is within 0 5 maximum 2 typical over the entire span of the reading at 25C This means accuracy is within 50mV on the 10 volt range 5mV on the 5 volt range and 100LA on the 4 to 20 mA range The blocks automatically calibrate all internal A DandD Acircuitsperiodically duringnormal operation Chapter 10 Voltage Current 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks 10 3 Inputs and Outputs Each engineering units input and output is a 16 bit twos complement number Appendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Input Data Format A Voltage Curent 4 Input 2 Output Analog block broadcasts 8 bytes of input data each bus scan Byte Description 0 Input channel 1 bits 0 7 1 Input channel 1 bits 8 15 2 Input channel 2 bits 0 7 3 Input channel 2 bits 8 15 4 Input channel 3 bits 0 7 5 Input channel 3 bits 8 15 6 Input channel 4 bits 0 7 7 Input channel 4 bits 8 15 Output Data Format Each bus scan the bus controller sends an Analog I O block 4 bytes of output data Byte Description 0 Output channel 1 bits
7. through Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Redundancy Features Redundancy Mode None Standby Duplex Duplex Default on off BSM Present Y N BSM Controller Y N Outputs Default 2 5 10 sec Circuit Features Reference Address Hold Last State yes no Default State ON OFF co DOO fF CO DMD oo 4 o A n 4 wo a4 A A ol A o Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Hold Last State Each output can be independently configured to either hold its last state or default if the block loses CPU communications for at least 3 bus scans For a new block Hold Last State is disabled for each output With Hold Last State disabled the block sets the output to its powerup default if CPU communications are lost If Hold Last State is enabled the block continues to hold the output in its current state instead of setting it to the powerup default Outputs remain in their last state or default indefinitely or until one of the following occurs m Communications with the CPU are restored m The Hand held Monitor changes the output by forcing it m Power is removed from the block Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the current Hold Last State
8. INPUT CURRENT AMPS 15 ERE ip TYPICAL LOAD OVERLOAD SIZE 3 CONTACTOR SHUTDOWN LEVEL 5 i 2 8A 2A RMS amp OPTIONAL 0 T T T T T T f U 17 33 50 67 83 100 117 TURN TIME MSEC 1DIV 1 CYCLE 60HZ AC ON ACTIVE ELECTRONIC PROTECTION 5 8 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 DC Output Overload For a DC output overload occurs if the output exceeds 2 amps continuously for 10mS after the initial 10mS turn on period DC circuit protection is shown below SHORT CIRCUIT a41562 FAULT LEVEL jr MAXIMUM 30A SHORT CIRCUIT FAULT LEVEL MINIMUM OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN LEVEL MAXIMUM 25A 2A O 10mS 15mS OVERLOAD ON MINIMUM Individual outputs can be configured not to shut off at this level or send the OVERLOAD message These restrictions apply 1 Maximum load current 10 amps 2 RMS Maximum duty cycle limit duty cycle so that load current x 7o ON is less than 1 0 amp 3 Maximum ON time 1 minute 4 Maximum total current of all outputs ON at the same time is less than 15 amps For example a maximum 10 amp load can be pulsed at a 10 duty cycle or up to 1 minute ON and 9 minutes OFF Higher repetition rates can be used if the duty cycle is maintained Exceeding the 10 amp limit may cause a short circuit fault to be generated The duty cycle derating to an average of 1 amp output current and the ON time limit are necessary to avoid ove
9. 841560 BA100 BA020 o6 L 1u 6 NEUT 07 a7 1 Serial1 Power for each model 2 Serial 2 3 ShieldIn 4 Shield Out B 5 GND ne DC Power H7 DC CN Eug NC n m o 9 IN X Input V is H0 JMP gt 4 H 11 RIN Z a o12 GND Fd o 13 COM A D14 IN Input ut x 015 JMP gt 2 woe H16 RTN J i D17 IN Input V em 018 JMP gt 3 o19 RTN 2 ry 020 GND ia el H21 COM A Lg o22 IN kk nput 3 Pa 528 JMP gt 4 H24 RTN J o25 1 Y Output AN 0261 I gt x 027 VOUT Load le 0 28 GND oa Lt D29 COM 2000 Ohms max 030 l Output Load EST i a 0 300 Ohms ESSI VOS ExternalConnection External 100 Ohm 1 W Precision Resistor for 10mZ 50mA range 10 7 BlockConfiguration The configurable features of an Analog Input Output Block are listed below For many the factory setting may not need to be changed Feature Circuit Factory Setting Selections or Block Device Number Block null 0 to 31 a number must be selected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type Baud Rate Block 153 6std 153 6 std 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kbd Input Filter Time Circuit 128mS none or 8 1024mS Current Vltage Circuit 10VDC 0 10VDC 10VDC 0 5VDC 5VDC 4 20mA 1 5VDC Report Faults Circuit yes yes no Hold Last Value Circuit no yes no Output Default Value Circuit 0 82 767 Scaling Points Circuit 10 000eng units 32 767 engin
10. j For a Series 90 70 PLC the CPU must be rel 2 IC697CPU731 or 771 orlater The bus controller must be rel 2 IC697BEM731 or later The programming softwaremustbe Logicmaster 90 70 rel 2 02 or later For a Series Six PLC the CPU must be rev 105 or later ForaSeries Six Plus PLC rev 110 or later is required The programming software must be Logicmaster 6 rel 4 02 or later For a Series Five PLC the CPU must be rev 3 0 or later The Logicmaster 5 programming software must be rel 2 01 or later 15 1 Specifications Block Type Six thermocouple compatible inputs three isolated groups of two CatalogNumbers 115 VAC 125VDCThermocoupleBlock IC660BBA103 Terminal Assembly Only IC660TBA103 Electronics Assembly Only IC660EBA103 24 48 VDC ThermocoupleBlock IC660BBA023 Terminal Assembly Only IC660TBA023 Electronics Assembly Only IC660EBA023 Size Height x width x depth 8 83 22 44cm x3 50 8 89cm x3 94 10 00cm Weight 4 Ibs 1 8 kg LEDs I O Block UnitOK I OEnabled HeatDissipation 9Wmaximum Block to Block Isolation 1500 V for one minute Group to GrouplIsolation 300V 115VAC 125 VDC block power 115 VAC 125 VDC Powersupply voltage 93 132 VAC Q 9W 105 145 VDC 9 9W Powersupply dropouttime 47 63 Hz 10 max ripple 1cycle 10mS 24 48 VDC block power Powersupply voltage Power supply dropout time 18 56 VDC 9W 10 max ripple 10mSminimum InputCharacteristic
11. v jounos YAMOd U 9 SALON 33S Q3 TIVISNI ATilviddOHddV i e n ano ola fro o s r Dem LINSNVHL ri NI ols t 3OMhOS H3MOd 3HIM HNOJ oxa oja CATIVISN ATalviHdOHddv LE and O ar woo ORG 9 Ni ols az toa oS No Oa woo o m P NI OR toa OR ano ols SUYALLINSNVYL _ oo ole SYIM OML E NI QE 5c o3 o z y _ QNS Gie y NY om 5 ino Ox L SHJONAGSNVYL ano O97 l zl NIH Oo LAdLAO SALON O ino opm in nsa o dasn dl NSE OL rae obat Sod omino 249 ONS SIMA ty ON O 90 N Oj au 90 H ole sna ow Of Em E 5NIO91n0O 310N 339 2 dAL S390 Q3AOMdaVv 28 Q X O Q PEN S E n ci sna OY JOTE SNINCONI 3 ZHO9 0S OVA GIL 40 OLN ATINGOW 39unos LNAYYNS DAAs8r ve OYNA H3d ddlvadn NOLLO3JMOO 1X41 3nSS IVNISIMO 3AOHddv NOLLdldi253Q gio iN SNOISIA3H SNIMWHO SALWIS NOISH3A HJBNDN 3nd QNO 0 3NH 9Q Ln3N NOLLVOO ShOGdHVZVH d ANY o a V dhnoH5 NOISIAID 88V 19 HO SnOQHVZVH NON NOLILVOO SnOQHVZVH A ANY Oo a Y dnouH5 z NOISIAId SSY 19 c L A HS O9OZ4 e6cau i ON SMO B8 m C 3 iring eld Wi i Appendix C Non Incendive F GEK 90486D 2 GEK 90486D 2 B Baud Rate 3 11 Block description general 1 1 See also individual bloc
12. A n A wo a4 A A ol A o Tristate Input must have 5 1K Q resistor across dry contacts of input device GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 8 11 Pulse Test Pulse Testing verifies the ability of a block s outputs to change state A new block is configured to enable Pulse Testing Pulse Testing should remain enabled if the block has loads that hold one state for long periods of time unless any load s are sensitive to pulses or interruptions of up to 16mS It should be disabled if the block s loads will normally change state as the program executes These will report faults during normal operation and do not need to be pulsed Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl Press F3 enter PULSE TEST REF 2 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display ENABLED tgl entr nxt Pulse Testing Outputs Outputs can be pulse tested from a Hand held Monitor or by sending a command from the CPU Pulse Testing checks the continuity of each output circuit including the switch device power source wiring interposing devices fuses circuit breakers terminals and output device It works whether or not there is minimum current to check for a No Load condition Pulse testing will not activate mechanical devices such as motor starters relays or solenoid valves Pulse Testing should momentarily
13. GEK 90486D 2 Alarm Thresholds For each input these configured values determine the values at which low alarm and high alarm conditions will be reported The selectable range is 32767 to 32767 engineering units if the configuration for Units was Celsius Fahrenheit or millivolts If counts were configured as the units for the block the range is 0 to 65535 counts Because alarm thresholds are engineering units values if units are changed alarm thresholds should be reviewed and adjusted if necessary The block will automatically switch to the default alarm thresholds when the engineering units are changed The previous alarm limits will be saved and restored if the units selection is changed back to its previous value If power is removed from the block the thresholds for the currently selected engineering units will be saved and restored when power is restored to the block Alarm thresholds can also be changed by the application program in the CPU If an input reached its high alarm a new limit could be set This could generate a high high alarm or an alarm cleared threshold Two examples are described on page 10 18 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen first displays the low and high alarm thresholds for ALARM 97 the first input To select the next circuit press F1 gt to move the Il LOW I1 HI cursor from LOW to H I then press F1 gt again Ed 0 1 2 To change the Alarm threshold shown at the curs
14. 0 pct TYPICAL OUTPUT Sel rewas PN Device 32 G oc INPUT SIGNAL DC 10 41 Qe X 96 Soon TYPICAL INPUT oc DEVICE WIRING 9 6 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 For block power connect a DC source to the DC terminals 6 9 and the return to the DC terminals 42 46 Depending on layout and current loads positive and negative connections can be bussed and made by single wires to the block or power source Do not apply more than 5 25 volts to the 5V terminal Damage to the block might result For 5 volt Sink applications only jumper the 5V terminal to any DC terminal For 12 or 24 volt sink applications do not jumper the 5V terminal to DC It will damage the block Leave the 5V terminal open DC Sink Block Power Disconnects Since block power is the same as circuit power it is important to wire block power disconnects so that block power and input power will be removed at the same time If circuit power is not removed at the same time as block power the block may power up when multiple inputs are activated even though one leg of power has been removed from the block DC SINK BLOCK DC LOAD iu o DCT YES NO a44470 k GEK 90486D 2 9 Field Wiring Source Block For a Source block connect outputs to the Block Power Disconnects negative side of the power supply an
15. Appendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Input Data Format The block broadcasts 1 byte of input data each bus scan Byte Description 0 Inputs 1 8 input 1 in bit 0 Output Data Format The block receives 1 byte of output data from the bus controller each bus scan Byte Description 0 Outputs 1 8 output 1 in bit 0 Hand held Monitor I O Display The Hand held Monitor displays the I O types line 3 and current states line 4 of all circuits on the Monitor Block screen REF 1 80 1234567 8 O0000000 11010100 Individual circuits are displayed on the Monitor Control Reference screen which also shows a circuit s fault and force status GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks 5 5 Diagnostics 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I Oblocks perform the following diagnostic checks The block reports all faults to the Hand held Monitor and takes appropriate corrective action Individual circuits can be configured not to send diagnostic messages to the CPU if a fault occurs If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostic datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Loss of I O Power Diagnostic An Isolated I O block operates as
16. Configuration Protection After the block is configured its Configuration Protection should be enabled to prevent unwanted changes from a Hand held Monitor and from the CPU Configuration Protection can only be set and removed by a Hand held Monitor For a new block Configuration Protection is disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection DISABLED 3 Press F4 next to return to the first configuration display tgl entr nxt 4 20 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated Genius I O blocks have four isolated groups of two I O circuits each rated to operate at a nominal 115 volts AC or 125 volts DC m 115VAC 125VDC 8 Circuit Isolated I O Blocks IC660BBS102 and BBS100 These blocks report a Failed Switch diagnostic if any output s commanded state is not the same as the actual state of the block s own internal switch m 115 VAC 125VDC Isolated I O Blocks without Failed Switch Diagnostic IC660BBS108 and BBS101 For applications where field wiring such as manual switches will be wired in parallel with block outputs These blocks ignore differences between an output s commanded state and the actual state of the block s internal switch Isolation is rated to withstand 250 VAC VDCcontinuous between any group and g
17. Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl OUTPUT DEF TIME REF 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr TIME 2 5 SECS 9 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt CPU Redundancy The block can be configured for No Controller redundancy Hot Standby or Duplex redundancy or Genius Modular Redundancy GMR For new blocks No Controller Redundancy is selected In Hot Standby mode a block receives output data from two CPUs but uses the data from only one to drive its outputs The block prefers outputs sent by the bus interface module Bus Controller or PCIM with Device Number 31 If those outputs are not available the block will use outputs from the bus interface module with Device Number 30 If no outputs from either are available the block s outputs will either Hold Last State or go to their defaults In Duplex redundancy mode a block compares outputs received from two CPUs and sets any outputs for which there is disagreement to their Duplex Default state explained next Select GMR mode only for blocks that will be part of a Genius Modular Redundancy system as described in the GMR User s Manual Do not try to configure a block for GMR mode without referring to the detailed configuration instructions in that book Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CPU REDUND
18. Hand held Monitor I O Display The Hand held Monitor displays the I O types line 3 and current states line 4 of all circuits on the Monitor Block screen REF 1 80 12345678 I XCEIbSP IP 11010100 Individual circuits are displayed on the Monitor Control Reference screen which also shows a circuit s fault and force status Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Diagnostics 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks perform the diagnostics described below A block reports all faults to the Hand held Monitor and takes appropriate corrective action Individual circuits can be configured not to send diagnostic messages to the CPU if a fault occurs If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Overtemperature Diagnostic Each circuit has a built in thermal sensor If the block s internal temperature exceeds 100C the block sends an OVERTEMPERATURE message and turns off the circuit to protect its internal electronics This diagnostic is always performed for both inputs and outputs Short Circuit Diagnostic Automatic output diagnostic Output circuits are protected by a short circuit level sensor at the switching device If the instantaneous current on an output exceeds 30 amps during the first two line cycles or 20 amps thereaf
19. NO 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt 4 18 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Output Default Time When a Bus Switching Module is used the Output Default Time must be long enough to allow the BSM to switch without causing outputs to default Therefore when BSM Present is selected above the block automatically changes its Output Default Time from 3 bus scans to 2 5 seconds If the Hold Last State feature is set to YES outputs will remain in their last state while the BSM switches instead of defaulting so there is no need to change this selection If Hold Last State is set to NO for any output on a block and total bus scan time will exceed 100mS you should change this selection to 10 seconds Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl OUTPUT DEF TIME f REF 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr TIME 2 5 SECS 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt CPU Redundancy These blocks can be configured for No CPU Redundancy Hot Standby or Duplex redundancy For new blocks it is set to No Redundancy It must be changed only if the block should be able to receive output data from two CPUs In Hot Standby mode a block receives output data from both CPUs but uses the data from only one of them to drive its outputs The bl
20. OUTPUT O Ow Two DC Blocks and a Relay Block Tied to the Same Load To protect against both failed off open and failed on short conditions a Relay block is needed in addition to the two DC source or sink blocks The same Relay block could also be used to back up other points Operation of the relay would be controlled by the application program in response to diagnostics received from the other two blocks Two DC Source Blocks and a Relay Block Tied to the Same Load 3s 24V POWER SUPPLY O e OUTPUTO e O A BO L Oo A D O O OUTPUT O Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 A B 244479 FO COM O OUTPUT RELAY BLOCK GEK 90486D 2 Two DC Sink Blocks and a Relay Block Tied to the Same Load 244480 e ni q 24V a POWER M SUPPLY ru D ee A A O 0O COM OUTPUT O D output O O OUTPUT O O B B RELAY BLOCK Parallel Series Points Tied to the Same Load Either AC or DC blocks can be backed up with two or more parallel branches can be tied to the same load In each branch a relay controls operation of the redundant points The application program in turn controls relay operation based on diagnostics received from the redundant points H a4448
21. The follo wing screen appears when the selection for Units is either Celsius or Fahrenheit Offset adjustments should be made following the procedure explained below Hand h eld Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 1 indicates the input being configured Line 3 shows the Il OFFSET VALUE OFST MEAS gt chng 0 00 C 30 2 C nxt actual measured value from that input To enter an offset press F2 chng 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display 15 14 Afte 1 Field Offset Adjustment r the block is installed follow the steps below when making offset adjustments to temperature input values Repeat these steps for each channel being adjusted Operate the block at its normal ambient operating temperature for at least two hours to allow for thermal stabilization Using a Hand held Monitor configure the block for units of Fahrenheit to obtain more resolution Connect a thermocouple simulator set for 32 0F to the input being adjusted Subtract the average measured value from 32 0 to find the amount of offset On the Hand held Monitor display the Offset Value configuration screen Enter the number found in step 4 Repeat steps 3 4 and 5 until HHM displays an average measured value of 32 0F Reconfigure the block to the desired units Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993
22. 1 The screen displays the Output Default state configuration of all OUTPUT DEFAULT circuits On this screen REF 000000111XXXXXXX 0 default is off tgl entr nxt 1 default is on X the circuit has been configured as an input To select a circuit press F1 To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr Qu com nos IS Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Report No Load By default each output is configured to report No Load diagnostics Energizing the output activates a no load current level If the load does not continuously draw 50mA from the output circuit the block sends a NO LOAD message Disable this diagnostic for any output where a very small load small relay transformer or indicating lamp will draw less than 50 mA Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the Report No Load configuration of all REPORT NO LOAD outputs On this screen REF YYYYYYYNNXXXXXXX Y the output will report No Load conditions gt tgl entr nxt N the output will not report No Load conditions X the circuit has been configured as an input To select a circuit press F1 To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr Qv em c9 d Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Geni
23. At GE Fanuc automation we strive to produce quality technical documentation After you have used this manual please take a few moments to complete and return the Reader s Comment Card located on the next page Jeanne Grimsby Senior Technical Writer iv Discrete and Analog I O Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Contents Chapter 1 InfioduclOnu ssec ees RERERURSA AN RR VA OR IR UR RAO RA RA UR RE 1 1 Block Description sssssssssseesss Ie 1 1 Types of Genius I O Blocks 00000 1 3 Locations for Genius I O Blocks 0 0 0 000 e eee 1 4 Block Operation os sc ecu ce Reiser ker me Sa oe EEG RE 1 5 Features and Benefits of Genius I O sseee e 1 7 Chapter 2 Installation oie dee ur ar Sh ERE T EE USA 2 1 Mountingl OBlocks eis vue e Rex Pe yer e Er yn n 2 1 Making Bus Connections ccc cece eee eee 2 3 GroundingI OBlocks 0 eee eens 2 6 Installing Additional Suppression 0 6 66 2 7 Interfacing Small Loads to AC Blocks 1 0 66 ccc eee ee 2 10 Adding or Removing a Block s Electronics Assembly 2 11 Replacing a Block or Terminal Assembly sseessess 2 12 Chapter 3 Comite at gius envia tet eni a nep areae anita ead aval oats eaae 3 1 Configuration Overview 2 6 66 eee 3 1 Preliminary Steps cete eese Ce dit eee eds 3 2 Setting Up a Block for Off line Configuration 2000 3 3 Starting C
24. BlockConfiguration The configurable features of a Relay Output Block are listed below For many the factory setting will not need to be changed Feature Circuitor Factory Selections Block Setting Device Number Block null 0to 31 a number must be selected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type Baud Rate Block 153 6std 153 6 std 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kbd Hold LastState Circuit no yes no Output Default State Circuit coil off coil on off BSM Present Block no yes no BSM Controller Block no yes no Output Default Time Block 3busscans for bus redundancy 2 5 or 10 sec CPURedundancy Block none none hot standby duplex Duplex Default Block off on off ConfigurationProtection Block disabled enabled disabled Features marked with an asterisk in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Before configuration begins the block s features should be decided on and recorded on a copy of the Configuration Worksheet printed on the next page GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 7 Relay Output Blocks 7 7 7 8 16 Circuit Relay Output Blocks Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N Block Number 0 31 Reference Address
25. Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter Installation 2 This chapter includes installation instructions for MountingI Oblocks Making bus connections GroundingI Oblocks Installing additional suppression for certain types of output loads Interfacing small loads to some discrete AC blocks Adding or removing a block s Electronics Assembly Replacing a block or Terminal Assembly Mounting I O Blocks Genius I O blocks can be mounted in any position For adequate heat dissipation vertical mounting is recommended If alternate blocks are mounted upside down bundles of wiring can be run between blocks a42836 O Ol O Ol O Ol O O Ol O O O O O Ol O O O O O O O dloloofololololololclcholololelolallototolol mlolo ANN OJOJOIOJOlOJOlO Ol OI OI OlOIOOIO OL k Leave at least 1 1 2 inch 3 84 cm of space between blocks and 3 inches 7 62 cm above and below each block This allows room for future use of a Block Puller to remove the block s Electronics Assembly It also provides space for wiring more space is desirable especially if wiring will be bundled together If blocks will be located close together it may be easier to complete wiring before mounting the blocks This is particularly true for analog blocks and 32 Circuit DC blocks wiring for those blocks enters the terminal strip from the side GEK 90486D 2 2 1 If blocks are
26. If Linear is selected the block will convert input values to appropriate engineering units using a fixed scaling factor of 10C mV Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the type of thermocouple currently selected for T C TYPE 97 each input To change the thermocouple type for input III II indicated by the cursor press F2 tgl To save the new JKTEBR selection press F3 entr gt tgl entr nxt 2 To select another circuit press F1 gt 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display 15 12 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Compensation Method The source of cold junction compensation for each input is configured separately The block uses this compensation when converting input readings to temperature values I Internal sensor selects input from the sensor in the block s Terminal Assembly Xy External voltage compensation selects input from an XJV sensor X External current compensation selects input from an XJI sensor U Selects the User supplied Compensation Value see next page Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 shows the type of compensation currently selected for COMP METHOD 97 each thermocouple input To change the compensation method Ii d Id LAI for input indicated by the cursor press F2 tgl I X U XI I 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr To select another gt tgl entr nxt ci
27. e Sensor IOUT Current Controller Feedback Amp D A Feedback 12 Bit Opto Data Control DAC Processor Isol O RTN O GND Case js Ground 7777 VOUT Voltage Opto Channels 5 6 Follower Processor 4 isol M Current lon M Sensor M M IOUT Current Controller Feedback 250 Amp Ohms i D A Feedback Opto Data Contro 12 Bit O JMP Processor Isol DAG E e r e O RTN 24VDC Case mO GND PS Ground Chapter 12 Current source Analog 6 Output Blocks 12 3 Output Data Format A Current source Output Block receives 12 bytes of output data each bus scan Each analog output consists of 2 bytes of engineering units data Appendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Byte Description 0 Output channel 1 bits 0 7 1 Output channel 1 bits 8 15 2 Output channel 2 bits 0 7 3 Output channel 2 bits 8 15 4 Output channel 3 bits 0 7 5 Output channel 3 bits 8 15 6 Output channel 4 bits 0 7 7 Output channel 4 bits 8 15 8 Output channel 5 bits 0 7 9 Output channel 5 bits 8 15 10 Output channel 6 bits 0 7 11 Output channel 6 bits 8 15 The block automatically translates this engineering units value into the analog output signal used by the output device Hand held Monitor Output Display Outputs are whole integers For example if the current value of an output was 35 8
28. 20 1 5 q 60 20 0 73 3 180 206 7 VELOCITY T T gt 10 VDC 10 VDC _ _ NORMAL OPERATION 9 SCALED RANGE gt Because engineering units values are whole integers this would be rounded to 00073 For better resolution the circuit is reconfigured to units of hundredths of feet second New scaling values are configured which are 100 times the original values The low engineering units value of 20 is reconfigured as 2000 The high engineering units value 180 is changed to 418000 Now the 5 volt DC signal represents 07333 hundredths of feet second Chapter 10 Voltage Current 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks 10 5 Diagnostics 10 6 If a fault occurs the block reports it to the Hand held Monitor and takes appropriate corrective action Individual circuits can be configured not to send diagnostic messages to the CPU if a fault occurs If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Open Wire Diagnostic The OPEN WIRE diagnostic detects an open wire at an input terminal The diagnostic is only available for circuits set to operate from 4 to 20 mA If the circuit current drops below 2 mA the block sends an OPEN WIRE message Nothing is done to alter the actual input data Input Low Alarm and High Alarm Di
29. 24 output 17 in bit 0 3 Outputs 25 32 output 25 in bit 0 Hand held Monitor I O Display The Hand held Monitor displays the current states of 16 circuits at a time on line 4 of the Monitor Block screen Press a function key to see the next 16 circuits REF 17 3210 1234567890123456 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 1011010101101101 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Ls Diagnostics GEK 90486D 2 The block monitors outputs for overload conditions and checks the actual state of each output switch against its commanded state The block reports all faults to the Hand held Monitor Individual circuits can be configured not to report faults to the CPU Short Circuit diagnostic If the output is commanded to go on and current exceeds 5 amps for 1mS the block automatically turns the circuit off and sends a FAILED SWITCH message The circuit must be reset by cycling power to the block or by sending a Clear Faults command from the Hand held Monitor or the CPU Surge Current Protection These blocks handle steady state loads of 0 5 amps during normal operation They will safely switch loads between 0 5 amps and 4 amps as shown below To protect the block surge currents should not exceed these levels For example a surge current of 4 amps should not be more than 10mS in duration A surge current of 1 amp should not exceed 30m5 CURRENT AMPS a44135 5 0 4 40 1 4 3 0
30. Linearization Alpha Default Selection O OC Platinum 0 003850 Nickel 0 006180 Copper 0 004200 The Alpha value can be reconfigured within the range of 0 0010000 to 0 007000 Alpha information is available from the RTD manufacturer If the Alpha value is not available or if Linear was selected for Linearization calculate Alpha as shown below Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 shows the Alpha value for the first RTD The value ALPHA illustrated above would be equal to 3850u Q2 C from CPU IN1 97 120I ALPHA 0 003850 2 To change the value currently displayed press F2 chng From the Hand held Monitor Alpha is entered as Q QC gt chng nxt 0 004348 When configuring the block from the CPU Alpha entered in HQC for this example 4348uQ QC 3 To save the new selection press F3 entr To select another RID press F1 gt 4 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Calculating Alpha Use this equation to calculate Alpha If necessary turn back to RTD Resistance to calculate slope Slope 0 40 C Alpha 0 0043480 0C 4348002C RTD Resistance at 0C 92 00 14 14 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Alarm Thresholds Each RTD input is associated with a low alarm threshold and a high alarm threshold If an input reaches one of its thresholds the block sends the actual value and a LOW ALARM or H
31. SELECT BAUD RATE ACTIVE 153 6K ST PROG 153 6K ST tgl entr nxt Configuration Steps 1 If the baud rate should be changed press F2 toggle Press F3 enter 2 If the baud rate is changed on any block that is currently installed on an operating bus it must be changed on all devices on that bus After changing the baud rate you must cycle power at the same time to all devices on the bus to use the new baud rate GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 3 Configuration 3 11 Configuring Other I O Block Features AllGenius I O blocks have additional features which can be configured either from a Hand held Monitor or using Write Configuration datagrams from the CPU Descriptions of these features and instructions for configuration are included in the chapters that follow For each configurable feature there is a default selection which is suitable for many applications If the block is online to an operating bus a simple alternative to selecting individual features is to copy the configuration of one block to another as explained below CopyingBlock Configuration Features can be copied from one block to another block on the same bus This feature is very convenient when a number of blocks are to be configured similarly The block being copied TO the target block must have had its Device Number baud rate and reference number for a PLC previously entered Copy Configuration Steps 1 The block whose option selections are to be copied
32. To select a circuit press F1 gt To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl 3 To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display 5 18 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Output Default State An output goes to its powerup default state when the block is first powered up If Hold Last State is NOT enabled for an output the block will also default the output if CPU communications are lost On a non redundant system this occurs approximately 250mS after the third bus scan passes with no CPU communications If the block is on a redundant bus downstream of a Bus Switching Module more time is needed Additional default time for redundancy is explained on page 5 22 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 shows the Output Default State configuration of all OUTPUT DEFAULT circuits REF 0 theo t default state is off 00111xxx Se as gt tgl entr nxt 1 the output default state is on X the circuit has been configured as an input 2 Toselect a circuit press F1 gt To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl 3 To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Report No Load By default each output is configured to report No Load diagnostics Energizing the output activates a no loa
33. Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C GEK 90486D 2 Contents Thermocouple 6 Input Blocks Features Compatibility Specifications Block Operation Block Measurement Accuracy Diagnostics Field Wiring 000000 Block Configuration Sizing Enclosures Space Needed for Blocks Dimensions of Genius I O Blocks Heat Dissipation I O Point Redundancy I O Block Troubleshooting Block LEDs Problems and Corrective Actions OrderingInformation Genius Blocks I O Reference Usage Non Incendive Field Wiring xii Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 Chapter Introduction This chapter contains the following basic information about Genius I Oblocks m Block description m Types of blocks available m Locations for Genius I O blocks and environmental specifications m Description of basic block operation m Features and benefits Block Description Genius I O blocks are intelligent self contained configurable I O modules l g a44485 S Ee a H GENIUS be OL gloc 24 48 VDC y Ei Re Source In Out D ujp_ GE Fanuc 2E Ieg Q a u LOL TaJ 2 Ee oed e 2APIMax 15A Max Total GEK 90486D 2 A Genius I O block is made of cast aluminum and weighs
34. Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT f REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection DISABLED 3 Press F4 next to return to the first configuration display tgl entr nxt 6 16 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter Relay Output Blocks Relay Output blocks provide 16 output circuits i 244484 in four independent groups of four relay type os outputs each The block power may be either 115V or 230V AC E MEE GENIUS There are two types of Relay Output blocks TOT e Gaon Relay Output Block IC660BBR100 Relays Tork sae z g amp GE Fanuc Normally closed IG e 9 Relay Output Block IC660BBR101 Relays SIE Normally open E3 Serm Sale NE amp le Features SHIRE SESTE Je 7 Each group of four outputs on a Relay Block can SIAL us be powered by a separate AC or DC source S o s E Group to group isolation is 1500 volts s 2 d s s Relay blocks are compatible with a wide range 8 z 3 of low power control and indicating devices Gela E such as relays contactors and lamps Output SAE s devices may operate in the range of 5V to ol OET 250VAC or 5V to 220VDC and switch up to 60 SSS Semana Watts or 125 VA Configurable features of these blocks include C om p
35. I f a42464 CONS s 3 j GENIUS Eu a oc 115V 50 60 Hz wo e In Out 74 GE Fanuc o z5 EJE I OQ I ES I I zE m P lt 4 di 5s e a ES E 2 e A Olje z z E ES PEL S 2A Pt Max 15A Max Total AR I Thisblockisbackward compatible with blocks IC660CBD100 and IC660BBD100 and may be used to replacethem Electronics Assembly IC660EBD100 replaces Electronics Assembly IC660ELD100 Electronics Assembly IC660EBD101 replaces bothIC660ELD100and IC660EBD100 Terminal Assemblies IC660TSD100E and later are not compatible with earlier versions of the Electronics Assembly If the Terminal Assembly will be used to replace Terminal Assembly IC660TSD100D orearlier the Electronics Assembly must be either replaced with version IC660EBD101For later or upgraded with kit 344A286380 G02 4 1 Specifications Blocktype CatalogNumbers Block Terminal Assemblyonly Electronics Assemblyonly 8 circuit combination input and output IC660BBD101 IC660TSD100 IC660EBD101 Size height x width x depth Weight LED s I O block LED s each circuit Block to Block Isolation HeatDissipation 8 83 22 44cm x 3 50 8 89cm x3 94 10 00cm 4 bs 1 8 kg UnitOK I OEnabled On logic side of switch 1500 V 16W maximum with 8 inputs 43 5W maximum with 8 outputs on at 2 amps Standby power allinputs and outputs off Operat
36. IC660BBA021 115 VAC RTD Input Block IC660BBA101 24 48VDCThermocouple Input Block IC660BBA023 115VAC 125VDCThermocouple Input Block IC660BBA103 Theseolder block versions have been superceded and are no longer available GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 3 Configuration 3 13 Finishing Up If you have finished block configuration and the Hand held Monitor will not be used for more configuration changes you should disable the Block Configuration feature in the HHM Utilities menu and remove the key Turn off HHM power After a Block is Configured Offline When you finish configuring a block that is not installed turn off power to the block Remove the power wiring and resistor The configuration you have entered will be saved in the block s Terminal Assembly EEPROM Entering Information on the Block After configuring a block record circuit information such as a circuit s I O type and Reference Address on the block s label That is especially important if you are configuring many similar blocks off line prior to installation In addition be sure to indicate the block s configured baud rate on the label 3 14 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 4 A115 VAC8CircuitGroupedI O Block IC660BBD101 has one group of 8 discrete circuits rated to operate at a nominal 115volts AC Each circuit can be an input a tristate input or anoutput Features Control power f
37. MEO BUS i L REFERENCE O REF a RESISTORS d Ve 0 e Opto couplers isolate the control and clock signals a small transformer isolates the circuit power A synchronous voltage to frequency converter changes the measured signals to the proportional frequency sent via an opto coupler to the processor The processor s frequency counter converts this synchronous frequency to a 16 bit binary number The processor corrects each input measurement for lead resistance and for internal offset and gain drifts as it converts the input to an ohmic value This value is either reported as is or linearized according to the RTD type selected and converted to a value in degrees The per channel update rate input filter time is preset It may be 400 800 or 1600 milliseconds These selections provide 14 15 or 16 bit resolution of the measurement GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 14 RTD 6 Input Blocks 14 3 Input Data Format Each bus scan an RTD block broadcasts 12 bytes of input data Each input consists of 2 bytes of data in the configured units C E ohms or counts Appendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Byte Description 0 Input channel 1 bits 0 7 1 Input channel 1 bits 8 15 2 Input channel 2 bits 0 7 3 Input channel 2 bits 8 15 4 Input channel 3 bits 0 7 5 Input channel 3 bits 8 15 6 Input channel 4 bits 0 7 7 Input chann
38. N Do not daisy chain the power bus to other blocks through the extra H and N Caution terminals These terminals are for wiring convenience only using them as If the power disconnect does not remove power distribution points may resultin circuit power and block power at the damage to the block same time the block may power up when multiple inputs are activated even though one leg of power has been removed Make all power connection in the block to the same 120 VAC phase Other blocks can use different phases a41546 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 115 VAC 115 VAC PHASE 1 i PHASE 2 INPUT H INPUT DEVICE DEVICE OUTPUT OUTPUT N N DEVICE DEVICE GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 6 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block 6 9 L5 Wiring for I O Devices Run one signal wire for each device Returns can be made to one or more of the H terminals all H terminals are internally bussed as are the N terminals Extra power terminals are for convenience Depending on layout and current loads hot connections can be bussed together and made by one wire back to the block or power source Neutral connections can also be bussed and made with one wire a42305 C oN LO 1 SERIAL1 i 2 SERIAL2 Ols SHIELD IN O 4 SHIELD OUT o 5 H O 6
39. S 50 0C to 1770 0C N 0 0C to 1300 0C L 3276 7C to 3276 7C 2 If Overrange the cold junction sensor reading is above 150C It may be caused by an open wire if an XJV sensor is in use If Underrange the cold junction sensor reading is below 50C It may be caused by an open wire if an XJI sensor is in use Low Alarm High Alarm Individual low and high alarm thresholds can be configured for each input If an input reaches one of its alarm thresholds the block reports a Low Alarm or High Alarm diagnostic The diagnostic is triggered upon reaching the limit and will not be repeated until circuit faults are cleared Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Field Wiring Terminals 5 through 32 are used for input power BSM 243410 Bus Switching Module control and field wiring Dec devices These terminals accept AWG 22 to A AWG 14 wires For the smaller gauge El thermocouple wires connector type crimp pins and of the same alloy are recommended to make Ol installation easier 2 For block power connect an appropriate power Q5 source to terminals 5 and 6 For the 115 VAC 125 Fo e a VDC block version connection can be of either polarity For the 24 48 VDC version the polarity 5 Hor DC should be observed as marked although 6 Nor DC protecti
40. configuration worksheet CPU redundanc 10 22 diagnostics dimensions features heat generation 16 4 high lowalarm diagnostics 10 6 input filter time 10 16 inputs open wire diagnostic operation outputs outputs default time outputs default values outputs hold last state 10 19 PLC references required B 1 range selection report faults to CPU scaling circuits specifications under overange diagnostics 10 6 i67 wiring instructions Blocks 10 18 W Wiring non incendive GEK 90486D 2
41. p O DC DC OFF OPEN WIRE 70 70 zu 5096 5096 IN OFF 2 S ON 4V ON all DC ug DC Qe With the switch closed ON state the circuit senses the low source impedance With the switch open OFF state the circuit senses the added resistance If a wire is broken cut or removed impedance becomes very high The block will transmit 0 as the state of the input and send an OPEN WIRE message Since faulty input circuit monitoring requires specific current flows devices as photo sensors electronic high speed counters instrumentation fiber optic sensors and similar electronic devices cannot be monitored for Open Wire conditions Such devices should be set up as standard not tristate inputs GE offers compatible input devices including a 5 1K ohm monitoring resistor with its line of General Purpose Control sensor devices Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 No Load Diagnostic The optional No Load diagnostic can be enabled or disabled for individual outputs For a new block outputs are configured to report No Load conditions In this configuration energizing the output activates a no load current level If the load does not continuously draw 50mA from the output circuit the block sends a NO LOAD message Because this diagnostic monitors both current and voltage a No Load condition may cause an HHM monitoring the block to display 0 for the circuit although there
42. 1 circuitts9 16 1 CC KO line voltage ON OFF Threshold circuits 1 8 circuits 9 16 ____ of line voltage Circuit Features Reference Address Report Faults Enable Shorted Enable Open Wire yes no Wire Detect yes no Detect yes no Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 InputFilter Time s The block continuously samples an input for the length of the configured filter time period If the input remains either on or off for the length of theFilter Time the block recognizes its state For example a42504 OFF STATE 20mS a ON gt Sampled Inputs ON for 5mS not recognized IF FILTER TIME 20mS SIGNAL Sampled Inputs ON for 30mS recognized by block Sampled Inputs OFF for 3mS not recognized An input filter helps reject spurious noise spikes and multiple inputs generated by the bounce of mechanical devices An input filter time of 10mS to 100mS can be selected for the block The default filter time is 10mS no filter In controlled noise free environments signals generated by clean solid state electronics may be unnecessarily slowed by a filter delaying system response In such an environment no additional filter time is needed In noisy environments use a longer filter time to prevent noise from possibly causing erratic or unsafe system operations For a block w
43. 1170in2 20 in 16in 12in 1890in2 24in 20in 16in 4950ir2 48in 36in 20in 7548cn 51cm 41cm 31cm 12194cn 61cm 51cm 41cm 31935cn2 122cm 92cm 51cm 20in 24in 8in 51cm 61cm 20cm 200w 1560in2 36in 24in 6in 2520in2 36 in 30 in 12in 6600in2 72 in 24in 30 in 10065cn 92cm 61cm 15cm 16258cn 92cm 76cm 31cm 42581cm 183cm 61cm 76cm 30 in 24 in 8in 72 in 60 in 12in 76cm 61cm 20cm 183cm 152cm 31cm 250w 1950in2 30 in 24 in 12in 3150in2 36 in 30 in 16in 8250ir 72 in 60 in 20 in 12581cm 76cm 61cm 31cm 20323cm2 92cm 76cm 41cm 53226cn 183cm 152cm 51cm 300w 2340in2 30 in 30 in 12in 3780ir 42in 36in 16in 9900ir 72 in 72in 24in 15097cn 76cm 76cm 31cm 24387cen 107cm 92cm 41cm 63871cn 183cm 183cm 61cm 350w 2730in2 42in 36in 8in 4410in2 48 in 36 in 16in 11550ir 72in 60in 36in 17613cn 107cm 92cm 20cm 28452en 122cm 92cm 41cm 74516cn 183cm 152cm 92cm 400w 3120in2 36 in 30 in 16in 5040in2 48 in 36 in 20 in 13200ir 86in 112in 14in 20129cn 92cm 76cm 41cm 32516cn 122cm 92cm 51cm 85161cn 219cm 285cm 36cm 450w 3510in2 60 in 36 in 8in 5670ir 60 in 60in 12in 14850ir 90 in 72in 36in 22645cn 152cm 92cm 20cm 36581cn 152cm 152cm 31cm 95806cm2 229cm 183cm 92cm 500w 3900ir 42in 36in 16in 6300in2 72 in 60 in 10in 16500ir 84in 117in 24in 25161cn 107cm 92cm 41cm 40645cm 183cm 152cm 25cm 1
44. 12 Current sour ce Analog 6 Output Blocks Ls 12 1 Features a oe T udis cci dte tieos stie E e cud odi oigo M N estes 12 1 Compatibility oposa T ee ei khe MER ae EG eke ek we ee a Re 12 1 Specifications at erp dime HR att Pales e ers tns 12 2 Block Operaio etree teton a terae eee ps i a ed 12 3 Diagnostics L2 ose eee een Rh oe ER es 12 5 Field Wiring eL RH RR DENIED 12 6 Block Configuration cuocere RE SER UNS ee eae etd 12 7 Chapter 13 Current source Analog 6 Input Blocks 00 0 e enone 13 1 Features 152 ce Bed ce de a d egt eg de E us 13 1 Compatibility ed ie beet RUE A eee e aka tase 13 1 Specifications 1e e ELA es deste a e dee ac e A s de e deett 13 2 Block Operation si emren ae e E AEE e 13 3 Diagnostics e pia eei ea e Ee pae EA EA A E E E A i 13 4 Field Witing ee e se a ea EEE A Bee E EE EE Mer ESE 13 5 Block Configuration ssassn ay eee ea A E E ER ee 13 6 Chapter 14 RTD 6 Input Blocks 5 2o ote rr nth rh na nna 14 1 Features c 14 1 Compatibility cover tbe COO bb v eene best anna 14 1 Specifications voces e Genet a bet d CR de es Dd eb cate 14 2 Block Opetation eere OUI ERO cee n PEDIR 14 3 Diagnostics cese tates aono ba agence e Eo spare portet rite 14 5 Field Wiring ex eet uds 14 6 Block Configuration se scire nhi nrnna nagana Pine e 14 7 GEK 90486D 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 xi Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Chapter 18
45. 24 48VDCCurrent Source Analog block IC660BBA024 Terminal Assembly Only IC660TBA024 Electronics Assembly Only IC660EBA024 Size height x width x depth 8 83 22 44cm x3 50 8 89cm x3 94 10 00cm Weight 4 Ibs 1 8 kg LED s I O Block UnitOK I OEnabled HeatDissipation 12 Wattsmaximum BSM Control Switches one 24 48 VDC BSM IC660BSM021 Block to Block Isolation 1500 V for one minute Group to GroupIsolation 300 V rms 115VAC 125 VDC block power 115 VAC 125VDC Powersupply voltage 93 132 VAC 105 145 VDC Maximumcurrent 250mA 140mA Frequency ripple 47 63 Hz 10 max ripple Power supply dropout time 1 cycle 10 mS min 24 48 VDC block power Powersupply voltage 18 56 VDC Maximumcurrent 600mA Ripple 10 max Power supply dropout time 10 mS min InputSignal Characteristics Input accuracy at 25 C 0 1 of full scale reading Inputresolution 1luA Inputconversiontime 16 6mS to 400mS user selectable Range 4mA to20mA Overrangecapacity OmA to25mA Inputdiagnostics Underrange Overrange High Alarm Low Alarm Open Wire Channel to channel isolation Thermal drift from 25 C 300 volts RMS 70 PPM per degree C typical InputImpedance 100 ohms 5 Normal Mode Rejection 45 dB at 50 60 Hz Input ExcitationCharacteristics Open circuit voltage 24 VDC Short circuit current lt 75mA Loopimpedance 1000 ohms max 0mA to 20mA 800 ohms max 20mA to 25mA OutputSignal Characteristics Output accuracy at
46. 25 C 0 15 of full scale reading 11 2 Outputresolution 6uA Output update frequency 6mS to 8mS typical Range 4mA to20mA Overrangecapacity OmA to24mA Outputdiagnostics Underrange Overrange Feedbackerror Load 0 ohms to 850 ohms Thermaldrift from 25C 35 PPM per degreeC typical Environmental Operating Temperature OC to 60C 32F to 140F Storage Temperature 40C to 100C 40F to 212F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration 5 10 Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200 Hz at 1G Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Block Operation These blocks have four independent inputs and two independent outputs Input Circuits Input channels use voltage to frequency converters and counters to translate analog currents to a digital value This value is converted by the block to engineering units before it is sent to the CPU a43728 EXC O NINA 47 i Opto 16 Bit Le Processor IN UNES Filter isol Counter S 100 ae coM O il GND Case 24VDC 777 Gtound P S Each input has a 24 volt current loop power supply capable of providing 25mA of current Each input is isolated from all other circuits within the block Input accuracy is 0 1 Input conversion time can be selected to provide the appropriate combination of noise rejection and input resolution Conversion times are programmable from 16mS to 400mS Resolu
47. Active If a channel is not wired or if a channel is wired but should not report diagnostics it should be configured as an inactive channel The block processes input data from an inactive channel but it does not perform fault detection on it The Unit OK LED does not indicate faults for inactive channels Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 shows the current Channel Active configuration of each circuit Line 2 shows the I Otype of each circuit 1 To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press CH ACTIVE 97 F1 gt IIIIOO YYYYYY gt tgl entr nxt 2 Tochange a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display 11 10 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Circuit Scaling Allcircuits on the block can be scaled independently To scale a circuit two pairs of values are entered two engineering units values and their associated signal levels Based on these two pairs of values the block will be able to calculate engineering units for all other input or output levels The block uses the scaling values to convert the input and output signal levels 0 to 25000A for inputs 0 to 24000 uA for outputs into engineering units values Each engineering units value is an integer to 32767 The converted number is still a numerical value and will appear as
48. BLOCK ID COPY CONFIG I O 5 FROM n TO BLOCK NO ref blk chng entr exec Configure an VO Block From the configuration Main Menu you can m Go to the Program Block ID screen F1 to configure a block s required features For new blocks this must be done first m Select Block Configuration F2 to complete a sequence of Block Configuration screens Configurable features for each block type are described in later chapters of this book m Ifthe block is on an operating bus select Copy Configuration F3 to copy the configuration of a similar block on the same bus GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 3 Configuration 3 5 I O Block Configuration Messages If an error message appears on the Hand held Monitor during block configuration look it up in the list below PWRUP ERROR 4 or PWRUP ERROR 5 Be sure the baud rate of the Hand held Monitor matches the baud rate currently configured for the block If it is a new block it is operating at the default baud rate 153 6 kbaud standard Change the HHM s baud rate to match the block s E FNCTN DISABLED Press the Clear key Go to the HHM Utilities HHM configuration and enable this function E COMM ERROR The HHM has lost communication with the I O block Press the Clear key and try again Note If working with a stand alone block be sure a 75 terminating resistor is connected across the Serial 1 and Serial 2 terminals E DUP BLOCK N O
49. Block Then enter the block s Device Number 1 30 If you make a mistake press F2 again then enter the correct number 2 Press the F3 Enter key Allcurrently available blocks test the bus to ensure that their assigned Device Number is not already in use If it is the block will not transmit until the Device Number is changed If you are configuring the block on an operating bus an error message appears if the number has been used for another device If the block is not online be sure to assign a unique Device Number or there will be a Device Number conflict when the block is powered up on the bus 3 6 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Reference Address A block s Reference Address is the beginning CPU reference for its I O data For a Series 90 PLC this entry may be optional depending on the Logicmaster 90 software version and Hand held Monitor version With some Hand held Monitors a Reference Address cannot be entered with the HHM in Series 90 PCIM mode If the Hand held Monitor permits entry of a Reference Number in Series 90 host mode enter in the same reference assigned to the block with the Logicmaster 90 programming software The Series 90 PLC and Hand held Monitor will not check that the reference assignments match so be sure to enter the correct Reference Address For a Series Six PLC this is a required entry Note If you select register references for a Series Six
50. Compatibility 46e bod ete ad Feuer Gash eee E ehe Specifications os set v Coe bib bebo c echt bed eium deans es Block Operation oey e ee e E a e Optional Diagnostics ieii enih e eiia pa a a e a aaa Selecting Thresholds and Resistor Values nuanua nnana Field Witing eee E REIHE REDE T OPE SHE Y Block Configuration sssssesesseee les Chapter 7 Relay Output Blocks 4 correo rry yg mr RR ea go Features ore eU RH UIS Va e eta A eed e aperti Compatibility x ever tt HENCE IRR EE EI We faite Specifications e eter cer Aa eet eed oar ecd Block Operation eee scarab nach ane bb a cba a aR A M th Rte Di gnostiCS ice p ehem Denke e R e a ge b RR we hated ppt ed Field Wiring persi erem Ie ee e pt ed ald Reds ro eot e Ets Block Configuration s sero eirate a aih a aa eee ne Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks eee Heatutes te teror uet a eb ebd ded eed abge abba E d ea p ATE Compatibility eec Ee Ie A E EE IURE A e EE RE Specifications yepUPAMEPPeBR hae herd ESRR RHATQYS UEM ERES Block Operation xax ento rettet nest dredtehterie d ar cd Dtagnosties 15 4 t he hl IM RU UE e M d e Field Wiring iiu eee E ree e aee eR ele ratem es Block Configuration sssssssesse e e Chapter 9 32 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks eee GEK 90486D 2 Features ieni as dut dome eut a a ey Compatibility gcse ieee e ee wee tee EEEO E EE Pes aE E Specifications os esee aee e vd ee A
51. Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 is 1 OD SERIAL 1 2 SERIAL2 INE MENS 3 SHIELD IN 4 SHIELD OUT Se pc o o L 6 e o 7 2 e 8 3 o o IO 10 8 lt 11 9 o 2O e o o 13 E 14 9 UI 15 9 LOAD DEVICES NIKE l pm 17 62 LOAD gebe 18 63 y pc 19 LOAD 20 69 2 LOAD x 20 De ears DC SINK L DEVICES j Sink Block Wiring for Tristate Inputs If any input is configured as a Tristate Input install a resistor across the dry contacts of the input device This added resistance is required to use the Open Wire diagnostic 244473 For a24 48 VDC block the resistor should be 5 1K ohms 1 2 Watt or larger For a 24 VDC block the resistor should be 1 6K ohms GEK 90486D 2 GEK 90486D 2 Connectionsfor a DC Source Block Any circuit can be an input or output Connect one terminal of the device to the block terminals 6 21 Connect outputs to DC and inputs to DC For a DC source block connect outputs to the negative side of the power supply and inputs to the positive side No logic inversion is needed
52. Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Block Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N AC DC Circuit Voltage Block Number 0 31 Block Type Input Output Combination Reference Address through Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Pulse Test Enabled Disabled Input Filter Time 10 100 mS Redundancy Features Redundancy Mode None Standby Duplex Duplex Default on off BSM Present Y N BSM Controller Y N Outputs Default 2 5 10 sec Circuit Features output output output output Report Hold Last Default Report Overload Ckt Reference I O Type Faults State State No Load Shutdown Number I O l yes no yes no ON OFF yes no yes no Tristate Input must have 5 1K Q resistor across dry contacts of input device GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks 5 13 Pulse Test A new block is configured to enable Pulse Testing Pulse Testing should remain enabled if the block has loads that hold one state for long periods of time unless any load s are sensitive to pulses or interruptions of up to 8mS or ImS DC It should be disabled if the block s loads will normally change state as the program executes These outputs will report faults during nor
53. F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt 11 18 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Configuration Protection After the block is configured its Configuration Protection should be enabled to prevent unwanted changes from a Hand held Monitor and from the CPU Configuration Protection can only be set and removed by a Hand held Monitor For a new block Configuration Protection is disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT f REF 97 128A 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection DISABLED 3 Press F4 next to return to the first configuration display tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 11 Current source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Blocks 11 19 Chapter Current source Analog 6 Output Blocks 12 Current source Analog Output Blocks have 6 output circuits for devices that accept 4 to 20mA signals Outputs 5 1 344489 and 6 can also be used for voltage applications Two RSs Current source Analog Output Blocks are available 4 X NEN m 115VAC 125 VDCCurrent sour ce Analog 6 Output M z Block IC660BBA105 GENIUS m 24 48 VDC Current sour ce Analog 6 Output Block L2 E ui r a IC660BBA025 Se amp f nn n TOL 2 is GE Fanuc Features MEE z 6 These blocks provide power to all circuits no
54. GND Case 24VDC 777 Ground Each input circuit has a 24 volt current loop power supply capable of providing 25mA of current Each input is isolated from all other circuits on the block Input accuracy is 0 1 Input conversion time can be selected to provide the appropriate combination of noise rejection and input resolution Conversion times are programmable from 16mS to 400mS Resolution increases as the conversion time is lengthened Input resolution is 1uA for 200mS conversion time Upper and lower alarm limits can be programmed for each input circuit If either limit is exceeded the block indicates a fault and sends a message to the Hand held Monitor and CPU Input Excitation Current The following illustration shows the input excitation current derating versus temperature The maximum excitation current per channel is 25mA maximum excitation current per block in A milliAmps 150 120 90 60 30 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 temperature in degrees C GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 13 Current source Analog 6 Input Blocks 13 3 Input Data Format Each bus scan a Current source Input block broadcasts 12 bytes of input data Each input consists of 2 bytes of data in the configured units Appendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Byte Description 0 Input channel 1 bits 0 7 1 Input channel 1 bits 8 15 2 Input channel 2 bits 0 7 3 I
55. No Controller Redundancy It must be changed only if the block should be able to receive output data from two CPUs In Hot Standby mode a block receives output data from both CPUs but uses the data from only one of them to drive its outputs The block prefers outputs sent by the bus controller with Device Number 31 If those outputs are not available the block uses outputs from the bus controller with Device Number 30 If no outputs from a CPU are available outputs either Hold Last State or default as configured In Duplex redundancy mode a block compares outputs received from two CPUs and sets any outputs for which there is disagreement to their Duplex Default state Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CPU REDUNDANCY 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection NO CTRL REDUND 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Duplex Default State In Duplex Redundancy mode if the block receives different output states for given points the block breaks the tie by outputting the Duplex Default State to those points For new blocks OFF is selected for all outputs Change it if outputs should be ON Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the Duplex Default state press F2 tgl DUPLEX DEFAULT REF 2 Press F3 entr to save
56. PLC the PLC will not receive automatic fault reports from the block For a Series Five PLC this is a required entry Either an I O or register reference can be selected You may prefer to use register references for analog I O block to save space in I Omemory If you select register references all Genius I O features will be available PROG BLOCK ID I O BLOCK NO ref blk nxt Configuration Steps 1 The Reference Address is entered in the same PROG BLOCK ID display Press F1 Reference 2 Press the F2 Toggle key to toggle the memory type With the correct memory type displayed press F3 Enter 3 Key in the number of the block s beginning I O reference The Hand held Monitor will accept any number up to 65 535 the number you enter must be appropriate for the PLC If you make a mistake entering the number press F2 Change F1 Reference then enter the correct number Press the F3 Enter key The HHM will automatically supply the range of references correct for the block GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 3 Configuration 3 9 Block I O Type For a discrete block with configurable I O types select whether the block will be an inputs only outputs only or combination block The default is inputs only If all circuits will be regular inputs or tristate inputs the block can be configured as Inputs Only It will require 1 input reference per circuit and NO output references If all circuits will be outputs
57. Test for Outputs Block enabled enabled disabled Input Filter Time Block 20mSec 10 100mSec in 10mS steps CircuitI OType Circuit input input output tristateinput Report Faults Circuit yes yes no Hold Last State Circuit no yes no Output Default State Circuit off on off Report No Load Circuit yes yes no Overload Shutdown Circuit yes yes no BSM Present Block no yes no BSM Controller Block no yes no Output Default Time Block 3busscans for bus redundancy 2 5 or 10 sec CPURedundancy Block none none hot standby duplex Duplex Default Block off on off ConfigurationProtection Block disabled enabled disabled Features marked with an asterisk in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Before configuration begins the block s features should be decided on and recorded on a copy of the Configuration Worksheet printed on the next page Note If the block will be used on a bus controlled by a Series Five PLC or a host computer and the block will be configured as an all inputs block the GENI daughterboard on the Series Five bus controller or computer bus interface module must be version 1 5 or later If not the block cannot be used as a BSM Controller and its I O Enabled LED will not operate properly
58. Tomeasure Enterthefollowing Enterthe following Selected thisvoltage engineeringunits digital count value current value 0 to 10V Ovolts Low 0 Low 0 10 volts High 10 000 High 44 095 10V to 10V 10 volts Low 10 000 Low 4 095 default 10 volts High 10 000 High 4 095 5V to 45V 5 volts Low 5 000 Low 4 095 45 volts High 45 000 High 44 095 OV to 45V Ovolts Low 0 Low 0 5 volts High 5 000 High 4 095 0mA Low 0 Low 0 4to20mA 20mA High 20 000 High 4 095 4mA Low 4 000 Low 819 20mA High 20 000 High 4 095 Ovolts Low 0 Low 0 1V to 5V 5 volts High 5 000 High 4 095 1 volt Low 1 000 Low 819 5 volts High 5 000 High 4 095 Measuring Scaling Values If the circuit will not use mV A units the most accurate scaling values can be found by taking actual measurements of the process The process must be set to two distinctly different conditions so two engineering units measurements can be taken If the block is online to the process it will automatically provide the digital count value associated with each engineering units measurement If the block is not online to the process the input or output voltage or current associated with each engineering units value must also be measured external to the block Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Scaling Guidelines 1 Pick two differe
59. VAC power source Voltage selection is made by jumpers on the Terminal Assembly When shipped from the factory the power selection jumpers are set for 115 VAC operation For 230 volt AC power change the jumpers as shown below Care must be taken to ensure correct jumper placement Incorrect jumper placement may result in damage to the block Block Power Options a42511 E H mu H H J1 J1 Te jo OP S J2 S N H N 115 VAC 230 VAC Connect an appropriate power source to the H and N terminals 5 and 8 Note If Class 1 Division 2 conditions must be met for Factory Mutual install an external 250 volt 1 8 amp slow blow fuse in series with the Hot AC power connector as shown below 250V 1 8 AMP 844467 slow blow fuse On f 0 0 n H AC Power Source N ON With the external fuse indicated this block meets FM Class 1 Division 2 requirements Chapter 7 Relay Output Blocks Wiring for Output Devices Power for AC loads may come from the block AC power supply or other AC source s Power for DC loads may come from one or more DC sources Each group may use a separate AC or DC source External Fuses and Snubbers Relay blocks have no internal fuses Following normal practices external fuses of 2 amps or less can be installed in series to protect loads External snubbers are not necessary for correct operation of the block However the use of snubbers is recommended Snubbers will protec
60. VDCRTDBlock IC660BBA101 z c m 24 48 VDC RTD Block IC660BBA021 E They are identical except for the power supply g GENIUS 0 RTD Input Cio s BE doo vas Features LOL E RED sem EN CN e T GEFanuc ov x0 An RTD Input block has six input circuits in three groups of S TOY ERE two circuits each Group to group isolation is 300 volts E 5 es Each input can be used with platinum nickel or copper jell RTDs Input data for each circuit is linearized according to S A 2 the type of RTD selected Input data is reported to the CPU S o il in engineering units of tenths of degrees Celsius tenths of Dile ae degrees Fahrenheit tenths of ohms or counts Additional S E es configurablefeaturesinclude S A vm 4 m Alamthresholds S ARRE el m RTDresistance SII PE m Alphatype Bea m Linearization S alles 4 m Inputfiltertime z ANRE 2 RTD blocks are factory calibrated there is no need for BG lo zd subsequent re calibration s A a1 Ci SED Inaddition theblock s automatic diagnostics can pinpoint E 3 ae the cause of installation and run time errors Pu Z 2L m InputShortdetection m Internal Faultdetection m Wiring Errordetection m Open Wire detection m Overrangeand Underrangeinputindication For a Series 90 70 PLC the CPU may be rel 1 m HighandLowinputalarms IC697CPU731 or 771 or later The bus controller may Fault reporting can be enabled or disabled be rel 1 IC697BEM731 or later circuit by circuit For a S
61. XJI analog of temperature The XJV inputis scaled for 1 0mV per degree Celsius and the XJI input is scaled for 1 0uA per degree Kelvin After compensation the block linearizes each thermocouple input measurement according to the NBS monograph for the type in use Each input measurement can be adjusted up to 100 0C or 100 0F for greatest accuracy The blocks perform the following diagnostics Internal fault detection Open Wiredetection Overrange and Underrangeinputindication High and low input alarms An output is provided to drive a Bus Switching Module versionIC660BSM021 only Compatibility These blocks are compatible with PCIM and QBIM modules Hand held Monitor IC660HHM501D version 3 5 or later is required GEK 90486D 2 Thermocouple 6 Input Blocks a44491 e o Ao yuo GENIUS Thermocouple Input 24 48 VDC 4A Max GE Fanuc S z jeues 30 qun ol BS mo u plays pajqeug DC BSM BSM 4 XIF _ XJV XJI XJL TC1 TC Tc2 TC2 4 XN XN XJI XJI TC3 TC3 TC4 TO4 XN XJV XJI XJI TC5 TCS TC6 TC6 LIL v dnog zal fol g dno Pol 521 2 dno 321 MUI DIET ATID NTT ATT AT TAT LL 2T 71472 TAT 124717 17 GOGOOSOSOOSGOSOSOSOSOSSOSOSGG
62. _INdNI 3H V31 H3iddOO J e J 38M NOISN3DG O71 F Pee im Ie nsue1oD4bu5 5 x O il MK jpuonounj Buryoo4 40j 493204045 Dydy NT ole 8 AINO LMdNI NOLLONAP G1090 310W3H l l EE ete aasn 4i WS OL T n 2E J s3MOd TONLNOD Lnset OR Z 31ON 33S on ofe 2 b AE 3000 3ALISN3S 3HhivH3dW31 PU oue MOSN3S ANNIVYSdWAL NOILONRh 102 23 ob OIv8H80992 Jepou nuo4 35 OP G S 310N 335 s GS dAL SIAMA Q3AOHddV 5 snd IMNON a31dn1020lH3Hl DGASZL OVASIE o ate STAR B CZOV8g80992 pow 5nub4 35 ZH09 08 OVA GIL 4o OLN 317ndoW aidnoo2olHaHl 2dAST vZ HN 90 3NI 90 1N3N OMHW4 Hdd QOdlv dn Z NOILO3MMOO 1X3l L ANSSI IvNISIMO O BAOsddv NOLLdIu2S30 AB NOILV2O 1 SnOQHVZWVH a anv 9 a V dnou 5 NOIL V207 SnOoGQuVZVH a anv GIRTENITSTSTES NOISIAID L SSV IO HO S OGQHVZVH NON o 8 V dnOH5 z NOISIAId L SSV IO SNOISIA3H ONIMVHO W38NRN AYNI L L SGSLr ezart g A3 HS ON SMa ane U GEF 90486D 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 C 2 o sia NO INDO DN HS EDEA Td l OD TEE 9MQ 09 v628 QO97 Tr6ct8l RN SDnIN39 ZOvOv DM 3930DO S235 NOLVINHOHNI vO SAINS YSN oA eiissexopoup ONIMIM 13 JON OS IN38S3 9 ld JAIGON3ONI NON su Du Doawy YYON uonouojnv OANA 35 F ENOLDVH3 F STONY F SWNIO30 Td F SWIA dz NO S3ONVH3TIO IAN w Sev sosana 6 21
63. a cluster connected to dual busses via a Bus Switching Module Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM PRESENT REF 97 128A 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr STATUS YES 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt BSM Controller A BSM Controller is a block to which a Bus Switching Module is directly attached which controls the BSM s switching action For a new block the default is NO Change it only if the block will be used as a BSM Controller To change this configuration with a Hand held Monitor the block must first be configured for BSM PRESENT The BSM CONTROLLER menu will not appear if BSM PRESENT is set to NO Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM CONTROLLER REF 97 128A 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr STATUS NO 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 11 Current source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Blocks 11 17 Output Default Time When a Bus Switching Module is used the Output Default Time must be long enough to allow the BSM to switch without causing outputs to default Therefore when BSM Present is selected above the block automatically changes its Output Default Time from 3 bus scans to 2 5 seconds If Hold Last State was selected the block wil
64. about 4 pounds 1 8 Kg Block size is approximately 9 22 cm x 4 10 cm x 3 9 cm 1 1 Parts of an I O Block A block consists of a matching Terminal Assembly and Electronics Assembly The Terminal Assembly forms the base of the block It is electrically and mechanically keyed to accept only an Electronics Assembly of the same type voltage number of circuits wiring configuration All field wiring connections are made to the Terminal Assembly All active components I O and communications circuits are located in the Electronics Assembly The Electronics Assembly can be removed without disturbing field wiring The block s configuration is stored in the Terminal Assembly so there is no need to reconfigure the block if the Electronics Assembly is changed Electronics Assembly Retaining Screws Terminal Assembly 4 M 1 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Types of Genius I O Blocks Many types of Genius I O blocks are available to interface a wide range of field devices to a Genius communications bus Discrete Blocks I O Circuits 115 VACGroupedI OBlock 8 1 Oconfigurable chapter 4 115 VAC Grouped I O Block Low leakage 115VAC 125VDCIsolatedI OBlockwithoutput 8 I Oconfigurable chapter 5 FailedSwitch diagnostic 115VAC 125VDCIsolatedI OBlock nooutput FailedSwitch diagnostic 115VAC 230MVAC Relay Output Block Normal 16relay chapter 7 ly Clos
65. amps 10mS peak 7mA 2mA 13mA 2mA 65 volts 40 volts 95 volts 40 volts Zerocrossing Once per second Once per second 0 5 Hz 1mS 1mS 2 5volts 2 5volts 10volts 10volts 25mA 10mA 30mA 10mA 40mA 10mA 100mA 10mA 50mA 50mA 15 amps at 35 C 7 5 amps at 60C Internal electronic short circuit trip 100ms AC 10ms DC long time trip Short Circuit Overload No Load Overtemp Loss of I O Power Also for blocks BBS100 and BBS 102 only Failed Switch 5 2 DC inductive load rating is 2 amps with external flyback diode or other coil suppression Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Compatibility Hand held Monitor These blocks are fully compatible with a Hand held Monitor identified by catalog number IC660HHM501 They may also be used with HHM500 HHM501 is required to change baud rate configuration or to configure the block for redundancy Bus Controller The blocks may be used with any GE Fanuc Genius bus controller PCIM or OBIM I O Blocks These blocks are backward compatible with previous block versions IC660C BS100 IC660BBS100 and IC660BBS101 They may be used as replacements for earlier versions However their Terminal Assemblies are not backward compatible as explained below Electronics Assembly Electronics Assembly IC660EBS100H may be used to replace any Electronics Assembly IC660ELS100 or IC660EBS100 Electronics Assembly IC660EBS
66. at the cursor location press F2 tel To save the new selection press F3 entr net tgl P entr 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display 10 18 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Hold Last State Each output can be configured to either hold its last value or go to its powerup default value if the block loses CPU communications for at least 3 bus scans For a new block Hold Last State is disabled for both outputs With Hold Last State disabled the block sets the output to its powerup default if CPU communications are lost If Hold Last State is enabled the block continues to hold the output at its current value instead of setting it to the powerup default Outputs remain in their last value or default indefinitely or until one of the following OCCUIS Communications with the CPU are restored m The Hand held Monitor changes the output by forcing it m Power is removed from the block Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the current Hold Last State configuration of HOLD LAST ST 97 all outputs On this screen kde Edd X the circuit is an input YYYYNN E put gt tgl entr nxt Y the circuit is configured to hold last its value N the circuit is configured to go to its default value configured on the next HHM screen To select a circuit press F1 gt To change the selection for a circuit pr
67. ati bi ity m Output powerup defaults m Output Hold Last State or default These blocks can be used with any type of GE m CPU Redundancy type Fanuc Genius bus interface module They can m Bus Switching Module control also be used with any PCIM or QBIM module Block LEDs indicate proper block operation and They are compatible with a Hand held Monitor CPU communications Individual LEDS show identified by catalog number IC660HHM501 the commanded output state of each coil only GEK 90486D 2 7 1 Specifications Block Type CatalogNumbers Output Block Normally Closed Relays TerminalAssemblyonly ElectronicsAssemblyonly Output Block Normally Open Relays TerminalAssemblyonly ElectronicsAssemblyonly 16 circuit relay outputs in four isolated groups of four IC660BBR100 IC660TBR100 IC660EBR100 IC660BBR101 IC660TBR101 IC660EBR101 Size height x width x depth 8 83 22 44cm x3 50 8 89cm x3 94 10 00cm Weight 4 Ibs 1 8 kg LEDs I O Block UnitOK I OEnabled LEDs each circuit Individual relay coilstate EnvironmentalSpecifications Operatingtemperature OC to 60C 32F to 140F Storagetemperature 40C to 100C 40F to 212F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration 5 10Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200Hz at 1G Block PowerSupply Frequency 47 63 Hz Operating voltage 115VAC 93VAC to 132VAC 230VAC 185VAC to 265VAC Power requirement 87mA at 115 VAC Powersupply dropouttime 1cycle Isolation Al
68. block s Unit OK LED blinks and a fault report is sent to a Hand held Monitor The fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the block If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including those with CPU fault reporting disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the current Report Faults configuration of each REPORT FAULTS 97 circuit circuits are shown on line 2 for reference OoO00000 i d sel fi l YYYYYY 2 To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press gt tgl entr nxt Pls 3 To change a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Channel Active If a channel is not wired or if a channel is wired but should not report diagnostics that channel should be configured as inactive The block processes input data from an inactive channel but does not perform fault detection The block s Unit OK LED does not indicate faults for inactive channels Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 shows the current Channel Active configuration of each circuit circuits are shown on line 2 for reference 1 To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press CHANNEL ACTIVE F1 gt Sipe es e h lecti F2 tgl T h lecti YYYYY
69. bytes each bus scan PLCs ignore the echoed data However it can be displayed on a Hand held Monitor GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 7 Relay Output Blocks 7 3 Relay States A logical 1 received from the CPU causes a Relay block to energize the corresponding relay coil a 0 causes the coil to be deenergized When the coil of a Normally open relay is energized the relay contact closes When the coil of a Normally closed relay is energized the relay contact opens Coil Type Coil State Action of Relays Normally open relay ON 1 relay closes OFF 0 relay opens Normally closed relay ON 1 relay opens OFF 0 relay closes Hand held Monitor Output Display The Hand held Monitor displays the current states of all outputs on line 4 of the Monitor Block screen REF 1 16 O 1234567890123456 OOOO0O000000000000 OOCOCOOCOCCOOOCC Individual circuits are displayed on the Monitor Control Reference screen which also shows an output s fault and force status Diagnostics The Relay Output blocks support the EEPROM Failure diagnostic only There are no diagnostics associated with the individual circuits 7 4 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 GEK 90486D 2 Field Wiring Field devices are wired to terminals 5 32 which accept AWG 22 through AWG 12 wires Do not overtorque the terminal screws Block Power Relay Output blocks require a 115 VAC or 230
70. channels Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 shows the current Channel Active configuration of each CH ACTIVE 97 circuit circuits are shown on line 2 for reference IIIIII MN YYYYYY 2 i the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press gt tgl entr nxt 3 To change a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 14 RTD 6 Input Blocks 14 9 Units The block can be configured to report data as engineering units or as unconverted counts If units of Celsius Fahrenheit or ohms are selected the block will automatically calibrate and convert input data into engineering units of m tenths of a degree Celsius m tenths of a degree Fahrenheit m tenths of ohms Values are reported to the CPU as tenths of units For example 300 2 ohms is reported to the CPU as 3002 This provides greater resolution than simply reporting integer values The Hand held Monitor accurately displays the engineering units value to one decimal place The same 300 2 ohms appears on the HHM as 300 2 Q If counts are selected values are reported as they are received from the hardware with no auto calibration performed Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps UNITS 1 Line3 shows the currently selected units REFS 97 120A 2 To change the units press F2 tgl To save the n
71. do not need to be pulsed Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl Press F3 enter PULSE TEST f REF 2 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display ENABLED tgl entr nxt Pulse Testing Outputs If Pulse Testing is enabled the block will pulse its outputs on command from either a Hand held Monitor or the CPU Pulse Testing checks the continuity of an output circuit including the switch device power source wiring interposing devices fuses circuit breakers terminals and output device It can be commanded from the Hand held Monitor or the CPU It works whether or not there is minimum current to check for a No Load condition Pulse Testing will not activate mechanical devices such as motor starters relays or solenoid valves Pulse Testing will momentarily cause outputs that are OFF to turn ON for 1mS and outputs that are ON to go OFF for 1mS Failure of the Pulse Test causes the following message Failed Switch If the output does not change state when pulsed for up to 1mS or if current exceeds 5 amps for 1mS Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 5 Input Filter Time A filter time can be selected for inputs on the block The same filter will apply to all inputs The default filter time is 20mS The block continously samples an input for the length of the filter time period If the input
72. ducts and auxiliary power supplies associated with most remote I O systems are largely avoided Reduced installation cost comes from the simpler wiring and reduction in custom panels and ducting saving both materials and labor Before programming begins the entire I O system can be tested and possible malfunctions can be prevented Blocks can be removed and inserted without disturbing field wiring which is connected to the separate Terminal Assembly Advanced Diagnostics In addition to being able to detect internal faults a Genius I O system can detect open circuits short circuits overloads and a variety of other faults in the attached devices Many faults can be detected before they cause a malfunction in equipment The system can detect the integrity of a control circuit before the circuit must actually be energized This is made possible by periodic pulse testing under microprocessor control within a Genius I O block The system can specifically isolate and identify faults to the circuit level for prompt and accurate maintenance Circuit Protection Many Genius I O blocks provide electronic fusing and overload protection Blocks can shut circuits down within 5 microseconds of detecting circuit faults providing far more effective protection than thermal fuses Short circuits and overloads may be reset from the programmable controller or Hand held Monitor Productivity benefits include reduced maintenance time and better protection of equi
73. e etu baa oa dee S Block Operation sekar wee EC RII RM CRDI Diagnostics PEE Field Wiring eein earned teeepEER e eek edis EEE E d eed Block Configuration sssssseesseeee e e Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 X 6 1 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 6 6 9 6 11 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 7 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 5 8 8 8 10 Contents Chapter 10 Voltage Current Analog Input Output Blocks 10 1 Features tesi ton ttes Md ea tes ares tedutu tub xtd i dau enr ios e DAD 10 1 Compatibility c reed SORA UL e cu EL uM 10 1 Specificaliofis ico bdo ee ood ene huele eene siue nad 10 2 Block Op ration eod RE one eet ee EROR ede eater add 10 3 CircuitScaling uim seres beoe vue Wee hha tl areis dum ach ah 10 5 DiagnoSticS co SS e oed ed bud edes bre Hout ds 10 6 Fiela Witte iret Cete bue tus e Seo ete ietue ice t n d seges 10 7 Block Configuration cca RU RR CI NERO cg ta EEN 10 8 Chapter 11 Current source Analog Input Output Blocks 11 1 Pea tures elo eee o ve eee Baek deb vr orate buie 11 1 Compatibility lee eL ve an we en te t d eee uta 11 1 Specifications esos eta Ce vcr emos i d Adee e Ro ede 24 112 Block Operation 2 0 05 eee cid Bh ee hd hee DCN ORE Ed 11 3 Diagnostics areren eii eaa eu v ee Ion nad TIO A GL Genesee ad 11 6 Field Wiring occ eve d UE e ek bp reb deb pp ide a 11 7 Block Configuration s eea od aaa a Ee ia Bn Ea e ne 11 8 Chapter
74. fined as a X10 inrush with a PF of 0 65 when turned OFE they repre sent a PF of 0 35 7 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Block Operation Allof a Relay Output block s 16 relay type outputs are either normally open or normally closed depending on the block version Outputs are grouped into four groups of four relays Each group of four shares a common input terminal Common Relay Coil Coil 242648 5 EE gt e Voltage C N ANA VDD i R Coil l see ED Control 1 o i Q e P from DE e Micro n O A VDD processor T D je LED 2 o e i i e 4 b V VDD i z R LT LED 3 o e e Lo m VDD MOV T R Pl LED 4 P e amp e Field Terminal Electronics Connections Assembly Assembly NOTE Relay Normally Open version shown Normally closed is the same except for relay type Circuit LEDs Each circuit has its own LED indicator that shows the commanded state of the coil Output Data Format A Relay Output Block receives 2 bytes of output data from the CPU each bus scan Appendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Byte Description 0 Outputs 1 8 output 1 in bit 0 1 Outputs 9 16 output 9 in bit 0 The block echos the 2 data
75. is voltage at the output and the circuit LED is on This diagnostic should be not be used for circuits on which very small loads small relays transformers or indicating lamps will draw less than 50 mA Overload Diagnostic Like No Load detection this diagnostic is optional for individual outputs on the block In addition to the protection provided by the block s built in Short Circuit detection Overload Shutdown provides further protection for output loads field wiring and switching devices If a load exceeds 2 8 amps DC continuously for 10mS the block will turn the output off and send an OVERLOAD message if Overload Shutdown is enabled For a load that requires more than 2 amps DC the output can be configured not to shut off at this level or send the OVERLOAD message These restrictions apply 1 Maximum load current 5 amps DC 2 Maximum duty cycle limit duty cycle so that load current x ON is less than 1 0 amp 3 Maximum ON time 1 minute 4 Maximum total current of all outputs ON at the same time is less than 16 amps For example a maximum 5 amp load can be pulsed at a 20 duty cycle or up to 1 minute ON and 9 minutes OFF Higher repetition rates can be used if the duty cycle is maintained The duty cycle derating to an average of 1 amp output current and the ON time limit are needed to avoid overheating due to increased power dissipation in the block at these high currents Exceeding these limits may cause an
76. later The Logicmaster 5 programming software must be rel These blocks are compatible with all Genius bus controllers 2 01 or later PCIM and QBIM modules Hand held Monitor IC660HHM501E version 3 7 or later is required for A Bus Switching Module must be the 24 48 VDC configuration version IC660BSM021 only GEK 90486D 2 12 1 Specifications Block Type CatalogNumbers 115 VAC 125VDCCurrent source Analog Output block Terminal Assembly Only Electronics Assembly Only 24 48VDCCurrent source Analog Outputblock Terminal Assembly Only Electronics Assembly Only 6 Current source Outputs IC660BBA105 IC660TBA105 IC660EBA105 IC660BBA025 IC666TBA025 IC666EBA025 Size Height x Width x Depth 8 83 22 44cm x 3 50 8 89cm x 3 94 10 00cm Weight 4 Ibs 1 8 kg LED s I O Block UnitOK I OEnabled BSM Control Switches one 24 48 VDC BSM IC660BSM021 Block to Block Isolation 1500 V for one minute HeatDissipation 12 Wattsmaximum 115VAC block power Powersupply voltage 93 132 VAC Maximumcurrent 250mA Frequency ripple 47 63 Hz Power supply dropout time 1cycle 125VDCblockpower Powersupply voltage 105 145 VDC Maximumcurrent 140mA Frequency ripple 10 max ripple Powersupply dropouttime 10mS min 24 48 VDC block power Powersupply voltage 18 56 VDC Maximumcurrent 600mA Ripple 1096 max Powersupply dropouttime 10mS min OutputSignalCharacteristics Accuracy at 25 C Resolution Updat
77. linearly as lower resistance loads are applied For a 1000 ohm resistor load the typical output OFF state voltage is 14 volts Incandescent lamps rated at less than 5 watts may glow dimly To prevent this use parallel resistance Contactor Starter Coil Genius N he cca es Output PA External Load Resistor 115N l A metu Genius NU Output VA External Load gt Lamp Resistor i 115 N Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Adding or Removing a Block s Electronics Assembly Allfield wiring connections to a Genius I O block are made to the block s Terminal Assembly which is ordinarily permanently installed This means the block s Electronics Assembly can be removed and replaced without disturbing field wiring entering addressing or reconfiguring the block The Terminal Assembly is mechanically keyed to accept only an Electronics Assembly of the same type voltage number of circuits wiring configuration Removing an Electronics Assembly A Block Puller IC660BLM507 should always be used to remove or insert an Electronics Assembly Caution Use of a Block Puller prevents damage to the block connectors that can result from manual removal Such damage may result in unreliable operation under high vibration conditions To remove an Electronics Assembly 1 Unscrew the retaining screws at the top and bottom of the block 2 Engage the tabs on the Block Puller in
78. long as power is supplied to terminals 5 and 6 The Loss ofI O Power diagnostic which is unique to these blocks indicates that one pair of circuits is disconnected from field power If either circuit of the pair is an input the block sets it to 0 If either circuit is an output the block turns it off The block automatically sends a Loss of I O Power diagnostic message to the Hand held Monitor However the message is not sent to the CPU unless the block is Pulse Tested The Unit OK LED does not blink When I O power is restored the circuits begin operating as soon as power reaches the minimum level If I O power to the block itself is lost the block cannot send diagnostic messages to the CPU The bus controller responds as it would to any other loss of block condition Overtemperature Diagnostic Each circuit has a built in thermal sensor If the block s internal temperature exceeds 100C the block sends an OVERTEMPERATURE message and turns off the circuit to protect its internal electronics This diagnostic is always performed for both inputs and outputs Short Circuit Diagnostic Automatic output diagnostic Output circuits are always protected by a short circuit level sensor at the switching device An output will turn off within several microseconds after the instantaneous current exceeds 25 amps at turn on or 15 amps after 2 cycles AC or 10mS for DC The block will try to restart the load if several attempts are unsuccessful the o
79. must be an integer For greater resolution increase the configured values by a convenient multiple such as 10 or 100 That is to measure tenths of degrees you would configure low and high engineering units values of 10x the actual measured temperature Or to measure hundredths of feet per second you would configure engineering units values of 100x the measured velocity After each entry press F3 entr Enter the associated LA value s If you are measuring the process online enter the value read from the HHM s status screen If you are measuring the process with the block offline enter the signal level obtained with an external measuring device To save the new entries for a circuit press F3 entr again Press F4 next to return to the status screen If you are using measured values set the process to a different condition Repeat the necessary steps above Press F4 nxt to return to the status screen From the status screen select F1 gt to select another circuit for scaling When you are finished scaling circuits press F4 nxt to configure additional block features Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Input Conversion Time Input conversion time determines the length of time required to make one analog to digital conversion on each input channel The table below shows the available conversion times and their associated resolution and line rejection capabilities F
80. must be the active block if necessary go to the Block Bus Status screen to select and activate the block to be copied A Putthe Hand held Monitor into the Block Bus Status menu B Locate the target block C Press the F4 ACTV key The letters A C T appear on the second line of the display Return to the Home Menu Select F3 Configuration 2 From the Configuration menu press F3 Copy Configuration The HHM Shows COPY CONFIG FROM n TO chng entr 3 The Device Number of the active block appears next to the word FROM Enter the Device Number of the block you want to copy the configuration options TO Press F3 Enter 4 Pressthe F4 Execute key The configuration will be copied to the other block The Reference Address is not copied It can be entered as previously described via the Program Block ID screen 5 Ifthe target block is similar but not identical to the source block use the Configure Block screens to finish up configuration Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 BlockGroups for Copying Configuration The block being copied from the source block and the target block must be of the same type Within each group shown below any block may be used as the target block or the source block If the target block has more features than the source block these can be individually configured later If the target block has fewer features than the source block
81. not SHORT DETECTION enabled N for each input REF NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 2 To change the cursor location press F1 gt To change a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 gt tgl entr nxt enti 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 6 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block 6 15 L5 Open Wire Detection With Open Wire Detection enabled for an input the block reports an open wire condition if the input s voltage reaches its Open Off threshold level see page 6 14 For a new block this diagnostic is not enabled for any input Detection of open wire conditions requires a resistor across the terminals of the input device as shown on page 6 4 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen shows whether Open Wire Detection is enabled Y OPEN WIRE DETECT or not N for each input To change the cursor location press F1 REF gt NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 2 Tochange a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection gt tgl entr nxt press F3 entr 3 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Configuration Protection After the block is configured its Configuration Protection should be enabled to prevent unwanted changes from a Hand held Monitor and from the CPU Configuration Protection can only be set and removed by a Hand held Monitor For a new block Configuration Protection is disabled
82. oN 21 N NOTE 22 TERMINALS 5 9 AND 18 22 ARE CONNECTED IN THE TERMINAL ASSEMBLY Connect a 115 volt AC source to one of the H terminals on the terminal strip 4 6 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 Connect neutral to an N terminal All H terminals are internally bussed as are all N terminals Extra power terminals are for convenience Depending on the physical layout and current loads hot connections can be bussed together and made by one wire to the block or power source Neutral connections can also be bussed together and made by one wire Any circuit can be an input or output The power source is connected through an input device such as a switch to a discrete input circuit on the block For outputs power is routed through the block electronics to a discrete circuit and applied to a load The load return connects to the N terminal Wiring for Tristate Inputs If an input circuit should report open wire conditions install a 5 1K ohm 1 2 Watt or larger non inductive resistor across the dry contacts of the input device The same circuit must be configured as a Tristate Input s Added Resistance for Small Loads Block IC660BBD101 drives small loads without added resistance For block IC660BBD100 it may be necessary to add resistance for loads drawing less than 50mA See page 2 10 for more information 244465 Wiring for a Bus Switching Module If th
83. of open wire conditions requires a resistor across the terminals of the input device The default Open Off threshold for each group of 8 inputs is 2596 of the incoming line voltage If necessary it can be reconfigured in 596 increments from 2596 to 8596 Hand held M onitor Configuration Steps THRESHOLDS REF 1 81 OPEN 35 ON 65 gt tgl entr nxt 6 14 The screen displays the configured Open Threshold and On Threshold for the first 8 inputs If Open Wire detection is NOT enabled X X will appear beside the word OPEN Details of selecting appropriate Thresholds were given above The F1 gt key moves the cursor between OPEN and ON 2 Enter anew Open and or On Threshold from the keypad The Open Off threshold must be less than the On Off threshold for accurate input data and diagnostics 3 Press F3 enter to save the new Threshold s 4 Pressing F4 next displays the Threshold configuration screen for the second group of 8 inputs These may be changed in the same manner 5 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s M anual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 s Report Faults to CPU Fault reports to the host can be disabled or enabled for any circuit If fault reporting is enabled the block sends a message to the host if any fault occurs on that circuit If fault reporting is disabled the block does not send fault reports to the CPU f
84. of the block If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including those with CPU fault reporting disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the current Report Faults configuration of each REPORT FAULTS 97 circuit circuits are shown on line 2 for reference LII ILI ok YYYyYyYyY 2 To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press M F1 gt gt tgl entr nxt 3 To change a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection J press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Channel Active If a channel is not wired or if a channel is wired but should not report diagnostics that channel should be configured as inactive The block processes input data from an inactive channel but does not perform fault detection The block s Unit OK LED does not indicate faults for inactive channels Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 shows the current Channel Active configuration of each circuit circuits are shown on line 2 for reference 1 To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press J CHANNEL ACTIVE F1 gt L D bb L I l 3 ee YYYyYyYyY 2 To change a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection fj F gt tgl entr nxt press F3 entr 3 Press F4 next to advance t
85. open circuit or failed switch Similarly continued current flow when ON outputs are pulsed OFF indicates a shorted switch both malfunctions are reported to the CPU 4 12 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Input Filter Time The block continuously samples each input for the length of the configured input filter time period If the input remains either ON or OFF during that time the block recognizes its state For example 242504 OFF gt ON gt STATE bi 20mS gt L 34 SIGNAL Sampled Inputs Sampled Inputs Sampled Inputs ON for 5mS ON for 30mS OFF for 3mS not recognized recognized by block not recognized IF FILTER TIME 20mS The input filter helps reject spurious noise spikes and multiple inputs generated by the bounce of mechanical devices An input filter time of 10mS to 100mS can be selected for the block The default filter time is 10mS no filter In controlled noise free environments signals generated by clean solid state electronics may be unnecessarily slowed by a filter delaying system response In such an environment no additional filter time is needed In noisy environments use a longer filter time to prevent noise from possibly causing erratic or unsafe system operations For a block with tristate inputs the minimum recommended Input Filter Time is 50mS Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen disp
86. or later is required The programming softwaremustbe Logicmaster 6 rel 4 02 or later These blocks are compatible with bus controllers identified by catalog numbers IC660CCBB902 and 903 They arenot compatible with bus controllers IC660CBB900 and 901 For a Series Five PLC the CPU must be rev 3 0 or later The Logicmaster 5 programming software must be rel 2 01 or later A Bus Switching Module must be the 24 48 VDC version IC660BSM021 only 13 1 Specifications Block Type Sixanalog input circuits Catalog Numbers 115 VAC 125VDCCurrent Source Input block IC660BBA106 Terminal Assembly Only IC660TBA106 Electronics Assembly Only IC660EBA106 24 48 VDC Current Source Input block IC660BBA026 Terminal Assembly Only IC660TBA026 Electronics Assembly Only IC660EBA026 Size height x width x depth Weight LED s I O Block BSM Control Heat Dissipation 83 22 44cm x3 50 8 89cm x 3 94 10 00cm 4 Ibs 1 8 kg Unit OK I O Enabled 8Switches one 24 48 VDC BSM IC660BSM021 12 Watts maximum Block to Block Isolation 1500 V for one minute Group to Group Isolation 1500 V rms 115VAC 125 VDC block power 115 VAC 125 VDC Power supply voltage 93 132 VAC 105 145 VDC Maximumcurrent 250mA 140mA Frequency ripple 47 63 Hz 10 max ripple Power supply dropout time 1cycle 10 mS min 24 48 VDC block power Power supply voltage 18 56 VDC Maximumcurrent 700mA Ripple 10 max Power supply dropout time 10 m
87. pairs of circuits can be wired to different AC phases If separate AC power is used for any group of circuits on a block all power connections within the group must be wired to that same 120 VAC source Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE INPUT DEVICE OUTPUT DEVICE INPUT DEVICE INPUT DEVICE OUTPUT DEVICE a41521 GEK 90486D 2 Wiring for I O Devices For each input device connect one terminal to the Hot side of AC power or positive side of 125 VDC Connect the other to the I O block at terminal 8 9 12 13 16 17 20 or 21 For each output connect one terminal to block terminal 8 9 12 13 16 17 20 or 21 Connect the other to the neutral side of AC power or the negative side of 125 VDC The block must have both sides of power connected to it 0 b 1 2 3 ae 4 AC OR DC POWER 5 SOURCE 9 C 6 O 7 O AC OR DC mp POWER C o 8 IO SOURCE L 9 O 10 O o AC OR DC POWER 5 O SOURCE asl e i 14 O AC OR DC POWER C cse ED SOURCE L o 7e 17lO 18 O ll AC OR DC POWER 5 apo SOURCE L 2110 22 O ed GEK 9048
88. press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display 10 10 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Range Select For each circuit select the voltage or current range that corresponds to the signal level of the input or output device 0 to 10 volts DC 10 volts DC to 10 volts DC 5 volts DC to 5 volts DC 0 to 5 volts DC 4to20mA 1 to 5 volts DC This matches an input voltage range to the block s internal range of 4095 digital counts It also sets the limits at which outputs are clamped by the software For all current loop input or output devices select the 4mA to 20 mA range Current loop scaling can be changed by installing an external resistor across the voltage inputs For example a 100 ohm resistor would be connected across the inputs to measure 10mA to 50mA current loop signals The 4mA to 20 mA range can also be selected to improve noise immunity on long input leads However it is better to use longer communication cables and voltage sensing where practical than to use long input leads Note Range Selection is a setup parameter it is not ordinarily changed while the block is operational If the block sends an UNDERRANGE or OVERRANGE message adjust the circuit scaling not the selected range See page 10 12 for information about circuit scaling Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 sho
89. save the new selection press F3 entr YES 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt BSM Controller A BSM Controller is a block to which a Bus Switching Module is directly attached which controls the BSM s switching action Selecting a block to be a BSM Controller block has no effect on the block s I O type the block can still be configured as an inputs only block but circuit 1 cannot be physically used as an input The first circuit will not be under CPU control To change this configuration with a Hand held Monitor the block must first be configured for BSM PRESENT The BSM CONTROLLER menu will not appear if BSM PRESENT is set to NO Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM CONTROLLER REF STATUS 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr NO 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt 6 20 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Output Default Time When a Bus Switching Module is used the Output Default Time must be long enough to allow the BSM to switch without causing outputs to default Therefore when BSM Present is selected above the block automatically changes its Output Default Time from 3 bus scans to 2 5 seconds If Hold Last State was selected outputs will remain in their last state while the BSM Sw
90. selection If Hold Last State was set to NO for any of the outputs and total bus scan time will exceed 100mS change this selection to 10 seconds Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl OUTPUT DEF TIME REF 97 128A 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr TIME 2 5 SECS 9 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt CPU Redundancy The block can be configured for No Controller redundancy or Hot Standby redundancy For new blocks it is set for No Controller Redundancy It must be changed only if the block should be able to receive output data from two CPUs In Hot Standby mode a block receives output data from both CPUs but uses the data from only one of them to drive its outputs The block prefers outputs sent by the bus controller with Device Number 31 If those outputs are not available the block will use outputs from the bus controller with Device Number 30 If no outputs from a CPU are available the outputs either Hold Last State or go to their predefined Output Default state Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CPU REDUNDANCY REF 97 128A 2 F3 entr to save the new selection HOT STBY MODE 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 12 Current source Analog 6 Output Blocks 12 15 Configuratio
91. sensor manufacturer s specifications GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 6 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block 6 5 6 Selecting Thresholds and Resistor Values For most applications the default threshold levels and recommended resistor values are not changed However the ability to select thresholds extends the use of Open Detect and or Short Detect diagnostics to circuits with many types of input devices and sensors To obtain the diagnostic information resistors must be located in the circuit as previously described The bias levels these resistors provide to the block must be compatible with the thresholds selected for each bank of eight inputs Selecting Thresholds 6 6 If a solid state sensor is being used and Open Wire or Shorted Wire detection is required follow the procedure below 1 Wire the sensor to the input block and apply power 2 Measure VsouncE 3 Measure Vin with the sensor in the Off state 4 M easure V jy with the sensor in the On state a42507 L e H INPUT V SOURCE IN A VIN p 9 5 Configure the On Off and Open Off thresholds so that V jw in the On state and V y in the Off state are within the proper limits 9096 SHORT HI a42508 25 85 ON OFF THRESHOLD 25 85 OPEN OFF THRESHOLD o 4 2096 OPEN 10 SHORT LO Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s M anual September 1993 GEK 904
92. shorting the signal wires to one another or to ground Chapter 2 Installation 2 5 Groundingl O Blocks 2 6 The Shield Out termination of each block is connected directly to the block s chassis ground The Shield Out termination is capacitively coupled to Shield In This breaks up any differences in small ground voltages which may be present at different blocks on the bus up to 50V of continuous difference of ground potential Within each cabinet use hardware such as star washers to provide ground integrity A ground wire minimum size AWG 12 must be connected from the ground screw on each Genius I O block to the panel 4UoO f Grounding Pad f Screw a L o Lo Lo gl Alternate Ground Connection Point J JAS Jj If the mounting screws do not make good ground connection and the grounding screw is not connected to a reliable ground the block is not grounded Electrical shock hazard exists Death or personal injury may result Normally a ground green ground conductor is routed from the building power system to each control cabinet Metal wire conduits should NOT be used as the only earth ground connection Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Installing Additional Suppression Additional suppression may be needed in some applications Suppression may located in the following places depending on the source of the disturbanc
93. shows suppression on both power lines and the communications bus for blocks in an enclosure Enclosure Blocks x Short Length of Bus to All Blocks ec re a The axial leaded LA series of MOVs from Harris is often used for this application The 14mm size model V130LA10 rated at 38 joules is usually sufficient The MOVs used should be capable of handling the line transients expected Measurement of actual transients may be required in extreme cases to decide what MOVs to use Suppression at I O Points Suppression may be needed A At the inputs of some sensitive blocks such as RTD blocks Instructions for wiring MOVs to RTD inputs are included with the RTD wiring information in chapter 14 B Ata discrete output load if there is excessive stored load energy or if there is a mechanical contact in series with a driven output coil Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Suppression at the Output Load Most solid state controls include load suppression within the output drive AC solid state relays and proximity switches turn off at low currents with some internal suppression DC devices usually specify suppression if not included with the device Additional suppression is required if 1 The stored load energy to be dissipated exceeds the rating of the block s output suppressor during the turn off di
94. system one or more operating blocks seem to have incorrect inputs and or outputs Check for duplicate or overlapping I O addresses on another bus or with anotherI O module A block s UNIT OK blinks indicating a circuit fault Check the fault using a Hand held Monitor or at the CPU If there appears not to be an actual circuit fault see if an EEPROM has failed in the Terminal Assembly by a Poweringdown up b Changingconfiguration retry c Ifa block indicates a Terminal Assembly EEPROM fault issuing the Clear All Circuit Faults command from the HHM or CPU causes the block to attempt to rewrite the EEPROM If successful the fault caused by the failure of the EEPROM is removed otherwise a fault type 0 is reported to the CPU Chapter 18 I O Block Troubleshooting 18 3 m False I O point faults on a block occur at random times The faults do not recur immediately when cleared and cannot be explained by known load conditions Check the load and power supply conditions during machine operation and at rest If nothing is wrong replace the block s Electronics Assembly If this does not clear up the problem replace the block m SeveralI O points and or blocks report faults almost simultaneously usually during one part of a machine cycle or mode of operation Check for sources of electro magnetic interference Watch for problems that occur immediately after the operation of a particular inp
95. the accuracy completeness sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply Thefollowing are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Alarm Master CIMSTAR Helpmate PROMACRO Series Six CIMPLICITY GEnet Logicmaster Series One Series 90 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Genius Modelmaster Series Three VuMaster CIMPLICITYPowerTRAC GeniusPowerTRAC ProLoop Series Five Workmaster Copyright 1986 1993 GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc All Rights Reserved Preface This manual is a reference to the features installation and configuration of most Genius I Oblocks For some blocks such as the High speed Counter a separate book is available They are not included here Content of this Manual GEK 90486 D 2 Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 is an overview of the features and operation of GeniusI Oblocks Chapter 2 Installation Chapter 2 explains block mounting and wiring It also explains how to remove and replace a block or its Electronics Assembly after installation Chapter3 Configuration Chapter 3 explains how to start block configuration Chapters 4 through 15 describe the features installation and configuration of specific types of Genius I O blocks m Chapter 4 115VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks m Chapter 5 115VAC 125VDCIsolatedI OBlocks m Chapter 6 115VAC 16 Circuit Input Block m Chapter 7 115 VAC Relay Output Blocks m
96. the block and points are powered by 115 VAC connect one wire of BSM version IC660BSM120 to point 1 and connect the other BSM wire to N Jumpering terminal J1 to COM as shown below allows the points to operate on the same 115 VAC source that powers the block a42902 ZAA IO JUMPER BSM H H 115 J1 VAC J2 N N NO o Nc H Block Powered by 230 VAC Points Powered by 24 48 VDC If the block is powered by 230 VAC and the points are powered by a 24 48 VDC source connect one wire of BSM version IC660BSM021 to point 1 and the other to DC 24 48VDC ANNA 842901 e BSM 4 T2 H Qd mee N Q N DC NC COM 1 To Power DC Supply To Power Supply Block Powered by 230 VAC Points Powered by 115 VAC or 125 VDC If the block is powered by 230 VAC and the points are powered by either a 115 VAC source or a 125 VDC source use BSM version BSM120 Connect one wire of the BSM to point 1 For a 125 VDC source connect the other BSM wire to DC Fora 115 VAC source connect the other BSM wire to the neutral side of the power supply Ol a43035 BSM 3 Bn H VAC J2 N N DC NC COM FIO 1 for 125VDC source DC for 125VDC source or neutral for 115VAC source or H for 115VAC source 7 6 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2
97. the first vent slots Move the tool to the center of the block and squeeze the handle mm xi m c rw SS SS p p AS z TSS SS as 3 Pull the Electronics Assembly straight away from the Terminal Assembly GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 2 Installation 2 11 Anoperating block may be hot to the touch Test the surface of the block before grasping it If power is applied to the field terminals power is also exposed on the connector pins at the base of the Terminal Assembly and electrical shock hazard exists Do not touch the connector pins Death or injury may result Installing an Electronics Assembly To replace an Electronics Assembly 1 Align the Electronics Assembly within the guides and push it down quickly Do not exert excessive force Damage to the equipment might result If unusual resistance is met remove the Electronics Assembly If power is applied to the block DO NOT TOUCH THE CONNECTOR PINS Inspect the Terminal Assembly connector receptacle and connector edge board on the Electronics Assembly Be sure the keying matches Remove any obstacles and reinsert the Electronics Assembly Pay close attention to the alignment of the guide pins 2 Secure the Electronics Assembly with the screws on the top and bottom of the Terminal Assembly Caution If the retaining screws are loose the connector pins may not make contact co
98. the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 4 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks 4 17 BSM Present If the block is connected to a single bus or to just one trunk of a dual bus BSM Present should be set to NO the default Select YES if the block is located in a cluster connected to dual busses via a Bus Switching Module Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the BSM Present configuration press F2 tgl BSM PRESENT REF STATUS 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr YES 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt BSM Controller A BSM Controller is a block to which a Bus Switching Module is directly attached which controls the BSM s switching action Selecting a block to be a BSM Controller block has no effect on the block s I O type the block can still be configured as an inputs only block but circuit 1 cannot be physically used as an input The first circuit will not be under CPU control To change this configuration with a Hand held Monitor the block must first be configured for BSM PRESENT The BSM CONTROLLER menu will not appear if BSM PRESENT is set to NO Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM CONTROLLER REF STATUS 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr
99. the positive side DO L e oq DC Configured Input V asaninput 4 Device T 1 16 PA V e Smart 4 f VO Switch i 5 6K Processor Configured A as an Output Qutput STE 3 E LED jue e edq DC DC Field i Terminal Electronics Connections Assembly Assembly 16 Circuit DC Sink Blocks A DC sink block has all output devices externally connected to the positive side of the power supply Inputs control the negative side DC o gt gt DC zx dHF LED Z 12000 Configured Output NN asan Device A Output 2 VO Smart e i gt Switch E Configured muet 1 16 Ly Processor asan ek UN 75V Input evice BED gt e e DC Field Terminal Electronics Connections Assembly Assembly 5 6K ohms for 24 48 VDC blocks 1 8K ohms for 24 VDC blocks For24 48 Volt DC Blocks the internal resistor is 5 6K ohms For 24 Volt DC blocks the internal resistor is 1 8K ohms Circuit LEDs Each circuit has its own LED If the circuit is configured as an input the LED indicates the presence of threshold voltage at the input terminal If the circuit is configured as an output the LED indicates the actual state of the load GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 8 3 Inputs and Outputs 8 4 The block can be configured as an inputs only outputs on
100. the voltage or current level of the signal Convert the voltage or current to a count value by multiplying it by the number below that corresponds to the circuit s configured range or by looking up the count value in the table on the next page Range Selected for Circuit Multiply Measured Volts or mA by this Number 0 to 45V m 819 5V to 45V 0 to 10V 409 5 10V to 10V 4mAto20mA 204 75 To save the new entries for a circuit press F3 entr again If you are using measured values set the process to a distinctly different condition Repeat the necessary steps above Press F4 nxt to return to the status screen From the status screen select F1 gt to select another circuit for scaling When you are finished scaling circuits press F4 nxt to configure additional block features 10 14 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Equivalent Analog Voltages Currents and Digital Counts Note The following table shows the digital counts value associated with selected voltage curent levels If the measured voltage or current lies between these values use the multiplier on the previous page to find its associated counts value Range COUNTS Range COUNTS to 5V to 10V mA to 5V to 10V mA 0 000 0 00 0 00 0 2 625 5 25 10 50 2149 0 125 0 25
101. will normally change state as the program executes These outputs will report faults during normal operation and do not need to be pulsed Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 ofthe Pulse Test screen shows whether the feature is PULSE TEST currently enabled for the block If you want to change the REF selection press F2 tgl ENABLED tgl entr nxt 2 Press F3 enter 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Pulse Testing Outputs Outputs can be pulse tested from a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Pulse Test command from the application program Pulse Testing tests the continuity of each output circuit including the switch device power source wiring interposing devices fuses circuit breakers terminals and output device It works whether or not there is minimum current to check for a No Load condition Pulse testing does not activate mechanical devices such as motor starters relays or solenoid valves Pulse Testing should momentarily cause outputs that are OFF to turn ON and outputs that are ON to go OFE Pulse testing may generate the following diagnostics Failed Switch If the output does not change state when pulsed Short Circuit If the load on an output that was OFF exceeds 30 amps when pulsed ON No Load If the load on an output that was OFF draws less than 50 mA when pulsed ON If the output was OFE no current flow when the output is pulsed indicates an
102. 0 7 1 Output channel 1 bits 8 15 2 Output channel 2 bits 0 7 3 Output channel 2 bits 8 15 Hand held Monitor I O Display The Hand held Monitor displays each input or output asa whole integer value The Monitor Block screen shows the current value of two circuits at a time REF 97 1201 I1 10838 I2 11637 gt 10 4 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Circuit Scaling GEK 90486D 2 The block automatically scales each input or output to from a value in engineering units This whole integer number can represent any type or increment of units meaningful to the application For example if the current value of a temperature input was 116 37E it might be reported as 116 degrees or 1163 tenths of degrees or 11637 hundredths of degrees All circuits can be scaled independently as explained later in this chapter Example of Scaling an Analog Circuit A circuit is configured in the 0 to 10 volts DC range It measures a velocity input Electronic sensors and mechanical linkage external to the block have determined that an input level of 1 5 volts DC is equal to 20 feet second 6 meters second and that 9 volts DC is equal to 180 feet second 50 meters second Plotting these values on a graph shows that a signal of 5 volts DC corresponds to a speed of 73 3 feet second INPUT 240661 VOLTAGE 9 7180 73 3 5
103. 0 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 or 100mS Output Characteristics Maximum output current steady state Maximuminrush current 0 5 amps per circuit 4amps up to 10 mS once every 5 sec maximum Block output current total 16amps Output OFF leakage current maximum 10uA Output turn on delay maximum 0 5 mS Output voltage drop 2 0 volts maximum at 4 amps inrush Output Diagnostics Switch Fault Environmental Operating temperature 0 C to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage temperature 40 to 100 C 40 to 212 F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration 5 10Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200Hz at 1G Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 o E Block Operation The block has 32 identical I O circuits each of which can be configured as an input or an output If the block is configured as a combination block output feedback is provided in the corresponding input references 32 Circuit DC Source I O Block A 32 Circuit DC Source I O Block has all output devices connected to the negative side of the power supply Inputs control the positive side of the power supply For outputs an ON condition is logic 1 and an OFF condition is a logic 0 Field Terminal Electronics Connections DC Assembly Assembly lt e gt DC Configured as an lt Input Input Device Control ES O L Smart Logic i uo e
104. 0 20 ZE 0E 8g 92 be ee Oe Bt 9L bl el OL 8 9 b z 4304 00 AS mo M c 20 20 J0 IE 6g e Se EC IC BL ZL SE EL IL 6 2 S 430430 L7 EJ 7 2 3 D E31 7 3 07 7 3 E37 2 2 3 E27 31 1 2 1 25 ez een 5A Max Pt 16A Max Total uoeeseseesosoeosseseoeseoecess U O OU O O O O O O O O OU O OU O O O O AO AA GSSGSSOGGGOSSGSSGSGGSSGSGSGGS 4 Each circuit contains built in protection when used as an output protecting the driver while allowing short time surges It also protects against shorted loads caused by wiring errors Block LEDs indicate proper block operation and CPU communications Co m pati bi ity Fault reporting can be enabled or disabled circuit by circuit Additionalconfigurable features include These blocks are compatible with a phase B Hand held Monitor IC660HHM501 only For the Series Six PLC a phase B Bus Controller m Output Pulse Test capability IC660CBB902 or 903 or a phase A Bus Controller m Selectable Input Filter Time from 1mS to IC660CBB900 or 901 version 1 3 or later is required 100mS They are compatible with all other GE Fanuc Genius m Output powerup defaults bus controllers PCIM and OBIM modules Output Hold Last State or default fused to control operation of a Bus Switching Module m CPU Redundancy type BSM IC660BSM021 is required The block must operate m Bus Switching Module control at 18 volts or abov
105. 0 50 102 2 750 5 50 11 00 2252 0 250 0 50 1 00 204 2 875 5 75 11 50 2354 0 375 0 75 1 50 307 3 000 6 00 12 00 2457 0 500 1 00 2 00 409 3 125 6 25 12 50 2559 0 625 1 25 2 50 511 3 250 6 50 13 00 2661 0 750 1 50 3 00 614 3 375 6 75 13 50 2764 0 875 1 75 3 50 716 3 500 7 00 14 00 2866 1 000 2 00 4 00 819 3 625 7 25 14 50 2968 1 125 2 25 4 50 921 3 750 7 50 15 00 3071 1 250 2 50 5 00 1023 3 875 7 75 15 50 3173 1 375 2 75 5 50 1126 4 000 8 00 16 00 3276 1 500 3 00 6 00 1228 4 125 8 25 16 50 3378 1 625 3 25 6 50 1330 4 250 8 50 17 00 3480 1 750 3 50 7 00 1433 4 375 8 75 17 50 3583 1 875 3 75 7 50 1535 4 500 9 00 18 00 3685 2 000 4 00 8 00 1638 4 625 9 25 18 50 3787 2 125 4 25 8 50 1740 4 750 9 50 19 00 3890 2 250 4 50 9 00 1842 4 875 9 75 19 50 3992 2 375 4 75 9 50 1945 5 000 10 00 20 00 4095 2 500 5 00 10 00 2047 5 000 10 00 20 00 4095 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 10 Voltage Current 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks 10 15 Input Filter Time Each analog input can have its own filter time The filter integrates the value of the input signal over time to reject noise Operation of the filter is shown below a41561 1 C2 N i MORNEN 2 v UNT E ACA X N S pgay 1 Me V 2 N We YCN In controlled noise free environments signals generated by clean solid state electronics may be unnecessarily slowed by a filter delaying system response In such an environment a longer filter time is not needed Selections are non
106. 0 VDC CR4XS2P Varistor 24 VDC CRAXS3L 36 48 VDC CR4XS3M 110 150 VDC CR4XS3N 220 250 VDC CR4XS3P For NEMA size 0 6 contactors CR305X146C Consult other manufacturers for recommendations of equivalent suppressors for their devices Discrete components can also be used as discussed earlier Pheonix Contact Inc Weidmuller Inc and other manufacturers make DIN rail mount suppressors for both load snubbing and line surge protection If noise is generated by a protective contact that operates only in abnormal conditions not as part of the normal machine cycle the best way to handle possible control shutdown which may occur during machine faults depends on the application Normally re cycling block control power will enable resumption of operation GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 2 Installation 2 9 Interfacing Small Loads to AC Blocks The 115 VAC Low Leakage 8 Circuit Grouped I O block IC660BBD101 is designed to interface small loads to the bus without added resistance at the load For other types of discrete AC blocks if individual outputcircuits will drive inductive loads drawing less than 50mA it may be necessary to add resistance to the circuit at the load When closed electromechanical devices such as contactors starters or relays have very high inductance combined with a low value of holding current When the output is off the inductance of the coil can interact with the block s suppression capacitor to maintain a relat
107. 06451cn2 213cm 297cm 61cm 550w 4290ir 48in 36in 16in 6930ir 72in 30in 24in 18150ir 84 in 154in 18in 27677cm 122cm 92cm 41cm 44710cn 183cm 76cm 61cm 117097cm 2 213cm 391cm 46cm 600w 4680ir2 60 in 48 in 12in 7560in2 90 in 36in 20 in 19800ir2 84in 154in 24in 30193cn 152cm 122cm 21cm 48774cn 229cm 92cm 51cm 127742cm2 213cm 391cm 61cm 72 in 60 in 16in 183cm 152cm 41cm 650w 5070ir 48in 36in 20in 8190in2 72 in 60 in 20 in 21450ir 84in 194in 18in 32710cm2 122cm 92cm 51cm 52839cn 183cm 152cm 51cm 138387cn 213cm 493cm 46cm 700w 5460in2 60 in 48 in 16in 8820in2 72 in 72in 18in 23100ir2 84in 194in 24in 85226cn 152cm 122cm 41cm 56903cn 183cm 152cm 46cm 149032cn 213cm 493cm 61cm 72in 36in 36in 183cm 92cm 92cm 750 5850ir 60 in 36in 20in 9450ir 72 in 72 in 20 in 24750ir 84in 194in 24in 37742cn 152cm 92cm 51cm 60968cn 183cm 183cm 51cm 159677cn 213cm 493cm 61cm 800w 6240ir 72in 30in 20in 10080ir 72in 72in 24in 26400ir 84 in 231in 18in 40258cn 183cm 76cm 51cm 65032en 183cm 183cm 61cm 170322cn 213cm 587cm 46cm 850w 6630ir 72 in 60 in 12in 10710ir 90 in 36in 36in 28050ir 84in 231in 24in 42774cn 183cm 152cm 31cm 69097cn 229cm 92cm 92cm 180967cn 213cm 587cm 61cm 900w 7020ir 72in 30in 24in 11340ir2 90 in 72 in 20 in 29700ir 84 in 271in 18in 452
108. 1 3 4 E GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 17 I O Point Redundancy gt 5 AC GROUPED BLOCKS A DC SOURCE BLOCKS OR D RELAY BLOCKS B RELAY BLOCKS Chapter 16 GEK 90486D 2 I O Block Troubleshooting This chapter m Lists LED indications m Describes error indications and corrective actions Most problems can be found by observing block LEDs and by using a Hand held Monitor to identify faults BlockLEDs A block s 2 status LEDs indicate its current operating condition After startup both of these LEDs are normally on UNIT OK I O ENABLED Meaning ON ON Blockfunctioning CPU communicating ON OFF Block functioning No CPU communications for3 bus scans ON Blinking Block functioning Circuitforced Blinking ON Circuitfault CPU communicating Blinking OFF Circuit fault No CPU communications for 3 bus scans Altemateblinking Circuitfault Circuitforced DoubleAlternate blinking Block experiencingcommunicationsproblems This each LED blinks twice diagnosticis notavailable on some blocks Synchronous blinking No CPU Communications block number conflict OFF don t care or OFF No power to block or block faulty For RTD Thermo couple and Current source Analog blocks I O Enabled LED is off OFF blinking For RTD Thermocouple and Current source Analog blocksonly thisindicatesanElectronics Assembly Termi nalAssemblymismatch
109. 1 it could be reported as 35 engineering units or 358 tenths of units or 3581 hundredths of units Output values are displayed on the Monitor Block screen REF 97 192 O O1 962 O2 3581 gt Individual outputs are also displayed in the Monitor Control Reference screens 12 4 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Diagnostics Current source Analog Output Blocks perform the diagnostics described below If a fault occurs the block will report it to the Hand held Monitor and take appropriate corrective action Individual circuits can be configured not to send a diagnostic message to the CPU if a fault occurs If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using a Read Diagnostic datagram the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Output Underrange and Overrange Diagnostics The block sends an UNDERRANCGE message if conversion of the engineering units output it receives from the CPU results in a commanded output less than 0mA It sends an OVERRANGE message if conversion of the engineering units output it receives from the CPU results in an output signal level that exceeds 24mA The block clamps the output to the selected range limit to protect external hardware Output Feedback Error This diagnostic is used to detect wiring errors or other hardware faults on output circuits After waiting f
110. 101C may be used to replace any version IC660ELS100 EBS100 or EBS101 These Electronics Assemblies draw lower leakage current 7mA than earlier versions which drew 13mA Terminal Assembly The Terminal Assembly for these blocks IC660TSS100E is not compatible with some earlier versions of their Electronics Assemblies IC660EBS100A to G or IC660EBS101A or B If Terminal Assembly IC660TSS100E will be used to replace an earlier version of the Terminal Assembly it will also be necessary to upgrade the Electronics Assembly This can be done by replacing the entire Electronics Assembly with version IC660EBS100H or IC660EBS101C or later It can also be done by upgrading the Electronics Assembly firmware using one of these update kits 44A286357 G06 with Failed Switch Diagnostics 44A286390 G083 without Failed Switch Diagnostics GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks 5 3 Block Operation Configured lt Device as an Input MOV AC or DC vo ENS i Smart Opto Source NT Switch An Isolated block has four isolated groups of two I O circuits each rated to operate at a nominal 115VAC or 125VDC To second circuit Hor amp e d in group e TT Input N Internal 5V No a couplers Processor lt Preload Configured Output as an Output 4 Device Resistor 13K M N meee E e 7 e To second circuit Field DC Terminal Interna
111. 16 output 9 in bit 0 Hand held Monitor I O Display The Hand held Monitor displays the I O types line 3 and current states line 4 of all circuits on the Monitor Block screen REF 1 160 1234567890123456 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIO 1101010010010101 Individual circuits are displayed on the Monitor Control Reference screen which also shows a circuit s fault and force status Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Diagnostics GEK 90486D 2 The block always performs its standard diagnostic checks plus two optional output diagnostics The block reports all faults to the Hand held Monitor and takes appropriate corrective action Individual circuits can be configured not to send diagnostic messages to the CPU if a fault occurs If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Overtemperature Diagnostic Each circuit has a built in thermal sensor If the block s internal temperature exceeds 100C the block sends an OVERTEMPERATURE message and turns off the circuit to protect its internal electronics This diagnostic is always performed for both inputs and outputs Short Circuit Diagnostic Automatic output diagnostic Output circuits are protected by a short circuit level sensor at the switching device If the instantaneous curr
112. 18 1 Problems and Corrective Actions Most problems fall into one of the categories listed below m When you power up a block its UNIT OK and I O Enabled LEDs blink in unison Duplicate Device Number Use the Hand held Monitor to assign an unused Device Number m When power is first applied to an Isolated I O Block its LEDs flash This is normal for an Isolated I O Block m Power up was attempted but a block s UNIT OK LED remains OFE See if the Electronics Assembly is attached to the Terminal Assembly properly Check to see if block power wires are connected to proper terminals Check for an EEPROM failure If this problem also occurs with other blocks the bus may not be properly terminated If the above conditions are met replace Electronics Assembly m None of the circuits on one block are working Check Terminal Assembly wiring Ensure Terminal Assembly voltage is proper for your block The block may be offline due to a Device Number conflict The Unit OK and I O Enabled LEDs will blink together Reprogram the Device Number to one that is unassigned If the problem persists replace the block s Electronics Assembly m One circuit on a operating block is not working at all Try another circuit on the same block to verify operation of sensor or actuator Check wiring for that circuit Reseat the Electronics Assembly c
113. 3 combo IC660BBD100 115Vac 8 I O QIp to QIn 7 or Ij to In and or In to Iny 7 and IC660BBD101 115Vac8I OLow Leakage ln to YI p47 or On to On 7 On to On 7 IC660BBS100 115Vac 125Vdc8I Olsolated Qn to Qn 7 R or R or IC660BBS101 Ry to Rn 1 combo Ry to Ra 1 combo IC660BBD110 115Vac 16 Input ln to ln 15 h to In 15 In to In 15 Rn Rn IC660BBD120 115Vac 10 30Vdc Hi Speed Counter Iy to In 15 and Ty to In 255 and Ty to In 255 and Qn to Qn 15and On to On 15 On to On 15 6 ATs to ATn 14 Rn n 15 Rn n 15 IC660BPM100 115 230V ac 125VdPowerTRAC ln to ln 15 and In to In 23 and Ty to In 303 and Qn to Qn 15and On to On 15 On to On 15 ATn n 17 Rn to Ry 19 Rn to Rn 19 Use of Register assignments for most I O blocks is discouraged in Series Six applications since a DPREQ WINDOW command must be used to update the data which is not updated automatically as when assigned to the I O tables Furthermore all diagnostics from the block are lost when the block is assigned to Register space In Series Six and Series Five assignments to Register space result in inputs being located in lower order registers starting at the designated register followed by outputs in higher order registers Inputs and outputs are always placed in separate registers Discrete circuits are located in the low order bits first Circuit 1 in bit 1 of Register n etc Analog circuits are located in the low ord
114. 3 6std 153 6 std 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kbd Report Faults Circuit yes yes no Channel inactive Circuit active active inactive Units Block C C Emillivolts counts Thermocoupletype Circuit TypeJ Type J K T E B R S N or L inear Compensationmethod Circuit Internal Internal external voltage external current or user supplied compensa tionvalue Compensation value for Circuit 0 00mV rangeis 326 67mV user supplied method Offset value Circuit 0 00 100 0C or 100 0F LowAlarm Circuit 250C range is 32767 to 32767 HighAlarm Circuit 1400C range is 32767 to 32767 BSM Present Block no yes no BSM Controller Block no yes no Features marked with an asterisk in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Before configuration begins the block s features should be decided on and recorded on a copy of the Configuration Worksheet printed on the next page 15 6 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Thermocouple Input Blocks Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N Block Number 0 31 Reference Address through Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Units ten
115. 4 2 0 4 T 1 0 0 5 4 TIME mS Failure to operate a circuit within these limits may result in thermal overload and damage to the block The electronic protection will not turn the load off until the current reaches 5 amps Overcurrent Protection If an output is commanded to go on and the load exceeds 5 amps for 1mS the block automatically turns off the circuit and sends the FAILED SWITCH message The circuit must be reset by cycling power to the block or by sending a Clear Faults command to the block Chapter 9 32 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 9 5 L9 Field Wiring Field devices are wired to terminals 5 32 which accept two 14 solid wires or two 16 stranded wires Do not overtorque the terminal screws Sink Block Any circuit can be an input or output Connect one terminal of a field device to DC power and the other to the block terminals 10 41 AIL I O devices must return to the same power circuit Connect outputs to the positive side of the power supply and inputs to the negative side Cm 842374 o8 NI 1 sERIAL1 2 D sERAL2 SHIELD IN C Y RBS 4 SHIELD oUT Sloj i e DCt DC 4 N DEVICE 1 Go DoT Q 2 FOR TTL COMPATIBLE Gg APPLICATIONS ONLY D e CIO tw N G9 Ga poe eL A A DC DC E Ga SOURCE Qo O Go SINK Qe OUTPUT SIGNAL Ga 10 41 Gs A o
116. 4VDCSinkblock IC660BBD023 for use with E GENIUS 2 wire and 3 wire solid state sensors and I TOL ENS electromechanicalsensors amp 8 Source In Out 24 48 VDCSinkblock IC660BBD021 for use with ee 3 wire solid state sensors and electromechanical EL Jii sensors E 8 Feat zu r NEL eatures w i Genius 16 Circuit DC Input Output blocks have 16 s i discrete circuits each easily configured to be an input PO tristate input or output Output circuits can be TOL connected directly to input circuits without the use of LOL 7 other components or inversion of logic states LOL Control power is tapped off the input output device m Row voltages wired to the terminals No separate block Pers power supply is needed Perlis Configurablefeaturesinclude E Ie zm Output Pulse Testcapability gt E j 3 Selectable Input Filter Time from 10mS to 100mS BLE sms aoc ro Output powerup defaults Output Hold Last State or default CPU Redundancy type Bus Switching Module control The block s advanced diagnostics can pinpoint causes Com pati bi l ity of installation and run time errors Each circuit has electronic circuit protection that shuts down an output These blocks can be used with any Genius bus if inductive surge current exceeds 15 amps for more controller They can also be used with a PCIM or than 10mS The output is easily restored by command QBIM module
117. 6D 2 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks a41559 SERIAL 1 SERIAL 2 SHIELD IN SHIELD OUT ROR DC N OR DC H1 OR DC 1 2 N1 OR DC H2 OR DC 3 4 N2 OR DC H3 OR DC 5 6 N3 OR DC H4 OR DC 7 8 N4 OR DC Only one wire need be run to the field device Depending on physical layout and current loads hot connections can be bussed together and made by one wire to the block or power source Neutral connections can also be bussed together and made by one wire Wiring for Tristate Inputs If any input circuit is configured as a tristate input installa 5 1K ohm 1 2 Watt or larger non inductive resistor across the dry contacts of the input device This added resistance is required to use the Open Wire diagnostic O H S IN a44465 B 1 22 Interfacing Small Loads to an Isolated Block If any output will drive an inductive load drawing less than 50 mA it may be necessary to add resistance at the load See page 2 10 for instructions Wiring for a Bus Switching Module If the block will be a BSM Controller attach the BSM like a load to circuit 1 Connect either BSM pigtail wire to terminal 8 and the other to neutral or DC such as terminal 10 BlockConfiguration The configurable features of a 115VAC 125VDC 8 Circuit Isolated Block are listed below For many the factory setting may not need to be changed Feature Circuitor Factory Selections Block Setting Devi
118. 7I I I I 2 Tochangeacircuit s I O type press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr gt tgl entr nxt 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Report Faults to CPU Fault reports to the host can be disabled or enabled for any circuit If fault reporting is disabled the block does not send fault reports to the CPU for that circuit If fault reporting is enabled the block sends a message to the host if any fault occurs on that circuit Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the block detects faults on the circuit and takes appropriate action If a fault occurs the Unit OK LED blinks and a fault report is sent to a Hand held Monitor The fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the block If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the current Fault Reports configuration of REPORT FAULTS all circuits on the block REF PLAT f YYYYYYYY 2 To select a circuit for configuration press F1 gt tgl entr nxt 3 To change the Report Faults configuration of a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks
119. 8 CHiiDdds 3SMH3HID SS3TND fi e LS NOWOAPONd FIONV QMIHL Kaena 6 20 60 SMOIH 1 AB808 ava 148 I3AQHddv SMOIH 1 48809 awa us Nivea 8S VSI ISNV jo sjueujeuinbe ey buneeiu eunso oue UD uluyM pelpisui eg SNU 86 hpow SUdJSLUOIDd buulM pjei4 eapueauiuoN e qpiyde22D uj snypubddy perouddy AHNA eq snu jnpoj snieg ay oj peyoeuuco sediAeg Plel4 Iy HN SZ n 1do0vZ i yuog xew OPAOE XOA WOD puo NI sijpuiuuey AdPILUSUDI DIM 4n04 936 up indu oc HuG 2 dange o 02 ywgs os SPAZ SZ 20A NI puo OX Sipu 4JSBYILUSUDIZ SAIM OML 918 up yodu Hwg 07 jnoz 0 09 vlog osi 9pAZ GZ 20A z ymo yno jndino mjejeujDubd uum pjaly PNDJD SAIPUSDUIUON 936 ul 3nOo Pno yaba oi peioeuuoo eq ADW e mep jndjno 40 indui euo fuo BYINDIID pie ewpueouiuou 404 vO1V880992I S2181939D4DUu5 jpuonoun4 Bu pob4 404 123004040 bydy jepouu 2nuDj 35 3indoWN 3oH8nos LNAYYND OGASCL OVASLL vrc0v8H0992 japolu onub4 35
120. 850C or 1562F for platinum 250C or 482F for nickel 3276 7C or 3276 7F otherwise This only occurs when converting to units of temperature The block sends an Underrange message if the Celsius or Fahrenheit value exceeds expected maximum negative value limits are 200C or 328F for platinum 60C or 76F for nickel 3276 7C or 3276 7F otherwise Individual low and high alarm thresholds can be configured for each input If an input reaches one of its alarm thresholds the block reports a Low Alarm or High Alarm diagnostic The diagnostic is triggered upon reaching the limit and will not be repeated until circuit faults are cleared Chapter 14 RTD 6 Input Blocks 14 5 14 6 Field Wiring Terminals 5 through 32 are for wiring field devices They accept AWG 22 to AWG 14 wires Power Source Wiring For block power connect an appropriate power source to terminals 6 and 7 For an AC block connect the AC source to the HOT terminal and neutral to the NEUT terminal For a DC block connect the DC source to the DC terminal and the return to the DC terminal The ground GND terminal 5 is for block safety Itis connected to the block chassis Noise Suppression If noise spikes exceeding 4000 volts will be present in the system additional noise suppression is needed to protect the block This can be provided by physically separating and shielding the RTD input leads from any noise source Each circuit also has a SHLD term
121. 86D 2 s For example if Vij with the sensor on is 70 and V jy with the sensor OFF is 40 then the On Off threshold can be set for 5096 and the Open Off threshold can be set for 2596 SHORT HI 342303 V 70 WITH M ON SENSORON 50 ON OFF OFE THRESHOLD 0 WITH OPEN SENSOROFF SHORT LO If the resulting V is too close to a threshold then reconfigure the threshold to a appropriate operating margin for the circuit If the thresholds cannot be selected so that V with the sensor on and off falls within proper ranges then external resistors must be added to the circuit If external resistors are already wired into the circuit then their values must be changed GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 6 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block 6 7 Selecting R esistor Values Accurate values for Rs and Rp cannot typically be directly calculated because more information is required about the sensor than may be readily available An estimate and test method can be used to select proper resistance values for Rs and Rp After Rs and Rp values are estimated appropriate ON OFF and Open Off thresholds should be configured If the thresholds cannot be selected so that V with the sensor on and off fall within proper ranges then the external resistor values must be changed Bias voltage levels can be calculated when the external resistance between H and IN is known 11 6 x RT 545 2 58 6 x RT 4 545 2 V In this
122. 90cn 183cm 76cm 61cm 73161cn 229cm 183cm 51cm 191613cn 213cm 688cm 46cm 16 6 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter I O Point Redundancy 17 This chapter explains how Genius I O blocks can be used to back up critical I O points for failsafe operation The type of blocks needed will depend on installation requirements There may be 1 Two points tied together to the same load This requires two source or sink discrete DC blocks 2 Two points going through relay contacts to the same load Two discrete DC blocks and a Relay block are needed for this 3 Parallel series I O points tied to the same load This can be done using two AC or DC discrete blocks Two DC Blocks Tied to the Same Load With Genius I O blocks tying two points together directly will cause error messages With intervening diodes however two source or sink DC blocks can be used to protect against failed off open conditions This method does NOT protect against failed on short conditions Two DCSource Blocks Tied to the Same Load 244477 O O 24V OUTPUT OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY gt e L 0 A D A ee GEK 90486D 2 17 1 17 2 Two DC Sink Blocks Tied to the Same Load 24V POWER SUPPLY H OUTPUT l e OROT a44478 Q 4
123. 97 112A 2 To change the Feedback Time for the output press F2 chng then enter a new time xxx mS gt chng nxt 3 To save the new time press F3 entr Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display 12 12 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Hold Last State Each output can be independently configured to either hold its last value or go to its powerup default value if the block loses CPU communications for at least 3 bus scans For a new block Hold Last State is disabled for all outputs With Hold Last State disabled the block sets an the output to its powerup default if CPU communications are lost If Hold Last State is enabled the block continues to hold the output at its current value instead of setting it to the powerup default Outputs remain in their last value or default indefinitely or until one of the following occurs Communications with the CPU are restored m The Hand held Monitor changes the output by forcing it W Power is removed from the block Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the current Hold Last State configuration of HOLD LAST ST 97 all outputs On this screen OoO00000 NNNNNN gt tgl entr nxt N go to default state configured on the next HHM screen Y hold last state 2 Toselect a circuit press F1 gt 3 To change the selection for a circuit press F2 t
124. ANCY REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection NO CTRL REDUND 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 9 32 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 9 17 L9 Duplex Default State In Duplex Redundancy mode if the block receives different output states for given points the block breaks the tie by outputting the Duplex Default State to those points For new blocks OFF is selected for all outputs Change it if outputs should be ON Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl DUPLEX DEFAULT REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection OFF 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Note If the block loses communications with BOTH CPUS individual outputs go to their configured Hold Last State or Output Default State Configuration Protection This feature can be used to protect the block s configuration preventing changes from the CPU or Hand held Monitor It can only be selected from the Hand held Monitor To make subsequent changes protection must be removed again using the Hand held Monitor For a new block configuration is unprotected Before a block is used in the system its configuration should be protected Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the
125. Alarm Circuit 800C 32 767 to 32 767 or 0 to 65 535 Input Filter Time Block 1600mS 400 800 1600mS Units Block Celsius Celsius Fahrenheit ohms counts Features marked with an asterisk in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Before configuration begins the block s features should be decided on and recorded on a copy of the Configuration Worksheet printed on the next page GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 14 RTD 6 Input Blocks 14 7 14 6 RTD Input Blocks Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N Block Number 0 31 Reference Address through Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Input Filter Time 1600 800 400mS Units tenths of degrees Celsius tenths of degrees Fahrenheit tenths of Ohms counts Circuit Features References From To Report Faults Y N Channel Active Y N Linearization PT NI CU Linear RTD Resistance 5 0 2000 00 Alpha 0 001000 0 07000 Alarm Thresholds Low eng units High eng units Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Report Faults to CPU Fault
126. Assemblyonly IC660TBA025 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA025 115 VAC 125VDCCurrent Source Analog Input Block IC660BBA106 Terminal Assembly only IC660TBA106 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA106 24 48VDCCurrent Source Analog Input block IC660BBA026 TerminalAssemblyonly IC660TBA026 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA026 115 VAC 125VDCRTD Input Block IC660BBA101 TerminalAssemblyonly IC660TBA101 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA101 24 48VDCRTD Input Block IC660BBA021 Terminal Assembly only IC660TBA021 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA021 115 VAC 125VDCThermocouple Input Block IC660BBA103 Terminal Assembly only IC660TBA103 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA103 24 48VDCThermocouple Input Block IC660BBA023 Terminal Assembly only IC660TBA023 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA023 High speed Counter Block IC660BBD120 erminal Assembly only IC660TBD120 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBD120 PowerTRAC Block IC660BPM100 Hand held Monitor IC660HHM501 Battery Pack for Hand held Monitor IC660BPM500 Battery Charger IC660BCM501 HHM Cable IC660HHC005 Block Puller IC660BLM507 Terminating Resistor Plugs 150 IC660BLM506 Terminating Resistor Plugs 75Q IC660BLM508 3 Belden type 9182 cable with connectors IC660BLC003 15 Belden type 9182 cable with connectors IC660BLC001 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Appendix GEK 90486D 2 b Genius Blocks I O Reference Usage
127. Bus Switching Module is directly attached which controls the BSM s switching action Selecting a block to be a BSM Controller block has no effect on the block s I O type the block can still be configured as an inputs only block but circuit 1 cannot be physically used as an input The first circuit will not be under CPU control To change this configuration with a Hand held Monitor the block must first be configured for BSM PRESENT The BSM CONTROLLER menu will not appear if BSM PRESENT is set to NO Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM CONTROLLER REF STATUS 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr NO 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 9 Output Default Time When a Bus Switching Module is used the Output Default Time must be long enough to allow the BSM to switch without causing outputs to default Therefore when BSM Present is selected above the block automatically changes its Output Default Time from 3 bus scans to 2 5 seconds If Hold Last State was selected outputs will remain in their last state instead of defaulting so there is no need to change this selection If Hold Last State was set to NO for any output on a block and total bus scan time will exceed 100mS change this selection to 10 seconds
128. C 17 24 VDC 48 VDC supply 0 14 VDC 34 48 VDC Input processing time typical Inputimpedance typical Selectable input filter times Inputdiagnostics 5 6Kohms 24 48V 1 8K ohms 24V 1 7mS plus selectable filter delay 5 100mS Open wire Overtemperature Failed Switch Output Characteristics Output current steady state 2 amps per circuit Maximuminrush current 10 amps up to 10mS Block output current 15 amps at 35C Output OFF leakage current 1 0mA Maximumswitching frequency Once per second high inrush current Output turn on delay maximum 1m Output voltage drop 2 0 volts maximum at2 amps inrush Minimum Recommended Load 50 mA with No Load nabled Output Diagnostics Short Circuit Overload No Load Failed Switch Overtemperature Environmental Operating temperature 0 to 60C 32 to 140F Storage temperature 40 to 100C 40 to 212F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration 5 10Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200Hz at 1G for24 48VDCblocks Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Block Operation Each circuit can be configured as an input a tristate input or an output If the block is configured as a combination block output feedback is provided via the corresponding input references 16 Circuit DC Source I O Blocks A DC source block has all output devices connected to the negative side of the power supply Inputs control
129. Chapter 15 Thermocouple 6 Input Blocks 15 3 Block Measurement Accuracy 15 4 The overall accuracy of the block in a given application depends on both 1 Accurate measurement of the thermocouple millivolt signal 2 Accurate compensation of the cold junction connections The block can measure the input millivolt signal to an accuracy of 10uV typical or 20uV maximum Depending on the thermocouple type used and the temperatures being measured measurement accuracy in C or F can be determined The output from a thermocouple varies in a non linear manner as the temperature being measured changes Furthermore each thermocouple type has a unique characteristic The following table may be used as a guide to estimate accuracy in units of degrees It lists optimal accuracy for each thermocouple type without allowing for conditions that might be encountered in the application or for the accuracy of the specific thermocouple being used For a more accurate estimate consult the NBS monograph published for the thermocouple type used in the application referencing the temperature range to be measured Thermocouple Type Average Sensitivity u V C Optimal Accuracy in C J 52 6 0 19 K 38 8 0 26 T 40 5 0 25 E 67 9 0 15 B 7 6 1 32 R 12 0 0 84 S 10 6 0 95 N 38 5 0 26 Cold junction compensation can be performed internally by the block itself or remotely The block has a cold junction sensor which is set at the factory to
130. Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks m Chapter 9 32 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks m Chapter 10 Analog Input Output Blocks m Chapter 11 Current source Analog I O Blocks m Chapter 12 Current source Analog Output Blocks m Chapter 13 Current source Analog Input Blocks Chapter 14 RTD Input Blocks m Chapter 15 Thermocouple Input Blocks Chapter 16 Sizing Enclosures This chapter explains how to size enclosures for Genius I Oblocks Chapter 17 I O Point Redundancy Chapter 16 explains how some Genius I O blocks can be used to back up critical I O points for failsafe operation Chapter 18 I O Block Troubleshooting Chapter 17 describes LED indications and gives troubleshooting guidelines Appendix A Ordering Information This appendix lists catalog numbers for Genius I O blocks their component assemblies and related products iii Preface Related Publications For more information refer to these publications Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual GEK 90486 1 Series 90 70 Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 0398 Series Six Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 0171 Series Five Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 0248 PCIM User s Manual GFK 0074 Genius PowerTRAC Block User s Manual GFK 0450 Genius High speed Counter Block User s Manual GFK 0415 Logicmaster 90 70 User s Manual GFK 0263 Series 90 70 Remote I O Scanner User s Manual GFK 0579 We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions
131. Circuit Input blocks can be configured to perform Open Wire and Shorted Wire detection on any circuit These diagnostics are optional for a new block both are disabled Open Wire Detection If Open Wire Detection is enabled the block monitors three voltage levels to sense On Off Open Wire conditions To use this diagnostic the Open Wire detection feature must be enabled for the circuit during configuration and resistance must be added across the terminals of the input device during installation With the switch closed the circuit senses a low source impedance With the switch open it sees the resistor Rp in the illustration below If a wireis broken cut or removed the circuit sees a high impedance The block then transmits 0 as the state of the input and sends an OPEN WIRE message H a42532 ON 50 ON OFF Rp THRESHOLD T E OFF 25 Open OFF je THRESHOLD GER The resistor used for Rp must be compatible with the block s thresholds For dry contact sensors the default thresholds are not changed and a 22K ohm resistor can be used for Rp Shorted Wire Detection This option establishes four voltage levels for On Off Short Hi Short Low A series resistor Rs below near the input device allows the block to detect a shorted wire from a dry contact sensor to the input terminal high or neutral Result Block sets input state to 1 for short high or 0 for short low and issues a Short Circuit diagno
132. E NOA o a45140 40 qun FY t puas jo Ul Plays Hor DC Hor DC BSM GND EXC LNI ZNI E NI F hdl SNI gN 13 5 BlockConfiguration 13 6 The configurable features of a Current source Analog Input Block are listed below For many the factory setting may not need to be changed Feature Circuit or Factory Selections Block Setting Device Number Block null 0 to 31 a number must be selected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type Baud Rate Block 153 6Kbstd 153 6 st 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kb ConfigurationProtected Block disabled enabled disabled Report Faults Circuit yes yes no Channelactive Circuit active active inactive BSM Present Block no yes no BSM Controller Block no yes no RedundancyMode Block none none standby Inputconversiontime Block 400mS 16mS to 400mS Input Scaling Circuit 1uA eu 32767 eng units 0 to 25000uA LowAlarm Circuit 0 82767eng units HighAlarm Circuit 25000 32767 eng units Features marked with an asterisk in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Before configuration begins the features of each Current source Analog Input Block should be decided upon then recorded on a copy of the Conf
133. FANUC GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual GEK90486D 2 September 1993 GFL 002 Warnings Cautions and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility for
134. FF for 3mS not recognized recognized by block not recognized IF FILTER TIME 20mS An input filter helps reject spurious noise spikes and multiple inputs generated by the bounce of mechanical devices In controlled noise free environments signals generated by clean solid state electronics may be unnecessarily slowed by a filter delaying system response In such an environment no additional filter time is needed In noisy environments use a longer filter time to prevent noise from possibly causing erratic or unsafe system operations For a block with tristate inputs the minimum recommended Input Filter Time is 50mS Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the currently selected filter time If this INPUT FILTR TIME time should be changed press F2 tgl to display the other filter REF FILTER tgl entr nxt times To save a new selection press F3 entr 20mS 2 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 l O Circuit Type Anearlier configuration step selected the Block I O type on the Program Block ID screen That step determined whether the block would be assigned all input references all output references or both The default configuration for each circuit on the block is input On the screen shown below the I O type of each circuit can be changed If the BlockI O Type sele
135. For many the factory setting may not need to be changed Feature Circuit or Factory Selections Block Setting Device Number Block null 0 to 31 a number must be selected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type BlockI OType Block input input output combination Baud Rate Block 153 6std 153 6 std 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kbd Pulse Test for Outputs Block enabled enabled disabled Input Filter Time Block 20mSec 1 2 3 4 5 10 to 100mSec in 10mS steps BlockI OType Block input input output combination CircuitI OType Circuit input input output Report Faults Circuit yes yes no Hold LastState Circuit no yes no Output Default State Circuit off on off BSM Present Block no yes no BSM Controller Block no yes no Output Default Time Block 3 bus scans for bus redundancy 2 5 or 10 sec CPURedundancy Block none none hot standby duplex GMR Duplex Default Block off on off ConfigurationProtection Block disabled enabled disabled Features marked with an asterisk in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Before configuration begins the features of each 32 Circuit DC Input Output block should be decided upon then recorded on a copy of the Configuration Worksheet printed on the next page 9 8 Ge
136. GEK 90486D 2 The recommended method of connecting the bus to an I O block is to wire it directly to the block s Terminal Assembly as described above These bus connections are normally considered permanent Caution Bus connections should never be removed while the completed system is in operation the resulting unreliable data could cause hazardous control conditions If the possible removal or replacement of a block s Terminal Assembly would result in breaking the continuity of the bus the bus should first be turned off If the bus controls critical processes that cannot be shut down blocks can be wired to the bus via an intermediate connector as shown below we i o 9 l N U T ds C S1 EL S2 ERE l 9 S1 SHLD IN m s2 CTS r SHLD IN M md ERO subour Ql DCN ASAE YS This will allow the block s Terminal Assembly to be removed while maintaining data integrity on the bus The connector shown is A107204NL from Control Design 458 Crompton Street Charlotte NC 28134 If blocks are connected to the bus in this way field wiring to the blocks should also provide a means of disconnecting power to individualblocks Alternatively the wire ends can be soldered together before inserting them into the terminals When removing the Terminal Assembly cover the ends of the wires with tape to prevent
137. GMR mode without referring to the detailed configuration instructions in that book Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CPU REDUNDANCY REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection NO CTRL REDUND 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 8 21 Duplex Default State In Duplex Redundancy mode if the block receives different output states for given points the block breaks the tie by outputting the Duplex Default State to those points For new blocks OFF is selected for all outputs Change it if outputs should be ON Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the Duplex Default state press F2 tgl Press F3 DUPLEX DEFAULT entr to save the new selection EE 2 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Note If the block loses communications with BOTH CPUS individual outputs goto their configured Hold Last State or Output Default State Configuration Protection This feature can be used to protect the block s configuration preventing changes from the CPU or Hand held Monitor It can only be selected from the Hand held Monitor To make subsequent changes protection must be removed again using the Hand held Monitor For a new block configuration is unprotected Before a block is used in the system its config
138. H o 7 H e 8 H e 9 H O 10 H Lj O 11 H o 12 H o 13 H O 14 H O o O 15 IN1 977 6 16 N2 oo O 17 IN3 oO 18 IN4 H O o Oo 19 IN5 5 O o 20 IN6 C O o ol 21 IN7 N M oo 22 IN8 O o o 23 IN9 6 6 24 IN10 ao Oo O 25 IN11 o na e 26 IN12 O26 O e7 IN13 oO 23 N14 e O o O 29 IN15 Or 9 30 IN16 81 N oO 32 N m 6 10 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 Wiring for Shorted Wire Detection For any circuit which is configured to use the Shorted Wire detection option install an appropriate resistor in series with the input device Selection of a resistor depends on the configuration See page 6 4 H Rs T a44468 N e M Wiring for Open Wire Detection For any circuit which is configured to use the Wire detection option install an appropriate resistor across the terminals of the input device Selection of a resistor depends upon the configuration See page 6 4 a44469 H Rp IN C N e v Open Wire and Shorted Wire diagnostics can be selected for the same input The input circuit must then include both a series resistor and a parallel resistor to detect Open Short conditions from a dry contact sensor See page 6 5 GEK 90486D 2 BlockConfiguration The configurable features of a 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block are listed below For many the factory setting may not need to
139. High amplitude fast transients which give common mode voltages greater than twice the supply followed by a slow recovery back to zero indicate significant noise energy coupled back into the system Such systems are sometimes improved by adding bypass capacitors to ground or hard grounding one side of the supply The bypass or ground should be located close to the injection point of the noise If this is not known distribute bypasses over the entire system 18 4 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Appendix A GEK 90486D 2 Ordering Information The following tables lists catalog numbers of Genius I O blocks terminal assemblies electronics assemblies and related products Module Catalog Number 115 VAC Grouped Low leakage I O Block IC660BBD101 Terminal Assembly only IC660TSD100 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBD101 115VAC 125VDClsolatedI OBlock IC660BBS100 TerminalAssemblyonly IC660TSS100 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBS100 115VAC 125VDCIsolatedI OBlockw oFailed Switch IC660BBS101 TerminalAssemblyonly IC660TSS100 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBS101 115VAC 16 Circuit Input Block IC660BBD110 Terminal Assembly only IC660TBD100 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBD110 Relay Outputs Block Normally closed relays IC660BBR100 TerminalAssembl IC660TBR100 Electronics Resets IC660EBR100 Relay Outputs Block normally open relays IC660BBR101 Termin
140. IGH ALARM message The message identifies the circuit in alarm Only one message is sent upon reaching the limit Alarms do not stop the process or change the value of the input The default Alarm Thresholds depend on the type of Units selected UNITS LOW Alarm HIGH Alarm Threshold Threshold Counts 0 65 535 Ohms 0 165 535 Celsius 32 767 32 767 Fahrenheit 32 767 132 767 Alarm thresholds can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal If alarm reporting is not wanted the circuit s alarm thresholds can be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal so they will never be activated Because alarm thresholds are engineering units values if units are changed alarm thresholds should be reviewed and adjusted if necessary The block will automatically switch to the default alarm thresholds when the engineering units are changed The previous alarm limits will be saved and restored if the units selection is changed back to its previous value If power is removed from the block the thresholds for the currently selected engineering units will be saved and restored when power is restored to the block Alarm thresholds can also be changed by the application program in the CPU If an input reached its high alarm a new limit could be set This could generate a high alarm or an alarm cleared threshold Two examples are described on page 10 18 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps ALARM I1 LOW I1 HI 0 1 g
141. If the feedback is less than 1 5mA the block reports a Feedback Error for the circuit For a new block feedback testing is enabled for all outputs It can be disabled for any or all Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 shows the current Output Feedback configuration of the outputs circuit types are shown on line 2 for reference FEEDBACK 1 To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press F1 gt O00000 YYyYyyYyyyY gt tgl entr nxt N To change a selection press F2 tgl e To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Feedback Time Feedback Time is the interval between the time the block receives an output value from the CPU and the time the output channel is expected to attain the commanded value This interval is used in conjunction with Feedback Testing enabled or disabled above A suitable interval should be selected so that the output current will reach its commanded value before the comparison is made This prevents false Feedback Error diagnostics for the output A longer feedback interval should be specified for outputs that respond slowly to changes in output signal levels Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 shows the Feedback Time configured for the output circuit indicated on line 2 1 To select the other output press F1 gt FEEDBACK TIME 97 OUT1
142. Low Pt A D or D A units High Pt eng units High Pt A D or D A units Alarm Input Mode Y N Input Filter Time mS Alarm Thresholds Low eng units High eng units Outputs Hold Last State Y N Default Values eng units GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 10 Voltage Current 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks 10 9 Report Faults to CPU Fault reports to the host can be disabled or enabled for any circuit If fault reporting is enabled the block sends a message to the host if any fault occurs on that circuit If fault reporting is disabled the block does not send fault reports to the CPU for that circuit Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the block will detect faults on the circuit and take appropriate actions The Unit OK LED will blink when a fault occurs and a fault report is sent to a Hand held Monitor The fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the block If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 shows the current Report Faults configuration of each circuit circuits are shown on line 2 for reference 1 To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press REPORT FAULT 97 F1 gt IIIIOO YYYYYXYYX gt tgl entr nxt m To change a selection
143. S min Input Signal Characteristics Input accuracy at 25 C Inputresolution Input conversion time Range Overrangecapacity Inputdiagnostics Channel to channel isolation Thermal drift from 25 C 0 1 of full scale reading 1pA 16 6mS to 400mS user selectable 4mA to 20mA OmA to25mA Underrange Overrange High Alarm Low Alarm Open Wire 1500 volts RMS 70 PPM per C typical Input Impedance 100 ohms 5 Normal Mode Rejection 45 dB at 50 60 Hz Input Excitation Characteristics Open circuit voltage 24 VDC Short circuit current 75mA Loopimpedance 10000 maximum OmA to 20mA 8009 maximum 20mA to 25mA Environmental Operating Temperature 0 C to 60 C 32 F to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 C to 100 C 40 F to 212 F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration 5 10 Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200 Hz at 1G 13 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Block Operation These blocks have six independent inputs Input Circuits Input channels use voltage to frequency converters and counters to translate analog currents to a digital value This value is converted by the block to engineering units before it is sent to the CPU A diagram of an input circuit is shown below 2343728 EXC O NVA 47 i Opto 16Bit _pprocessor IN O M piter vip Isol Counter E 100 com e i
144. STS ENG A D configuration If you want to scale a different circuit press F1 32767 4095 gt gt scale nxt 2 If you are NOT measuring the process with the block online go to step 4 If you are measuring the process with the block online continue at step 3 3 Line 3 shows an engineering units value and count value for the circuit The block has calculated the engineering units value on the left based on the present scaling If the scaling is wrong the engineering units value is wrong too With the block online the digital count value on the right is the numerical equivalent of the actual circuit circuit voltage or current being measured Make a note of this value you will need it to complete the next screen GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 10 Voltage Current 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks 10 13 IN 1 ENG A D LOW 850 100 HI 30970 4000 gt chng entr sts 10 11 Press F2 scale to scale the circuit Line 2 of the HHM screen shows the circuit s low pair of engineering unit and digital count values Line 3 shows a higher pair All values on this screen are configured not measured values Pressing F1 gt moves the cursor Enter the engineering units value s After each entry press F3 entr Enter the associated count value s A If you are measuring the process online enter the digital count value from the HHM s status screen B Ifyou are measuring the process with the block offline find
145. State is enabled the block continues to hold the output in its current state instead of setting it to the powerup default Outputs remain in their last state or default indefinitely or until one of the following occurs Communications with the CPU are restored m The Hand held Monitor changes the output by forcing it W Power is removed from the block Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the current Hold Last State configuration of HOLD LAST STATE all circuits On this screen REF YYYYNNNNXXXXXXXX Y hold last state gt tgl entr nxt N go to default state configured on the next HHM screen X the circuit has been configured as an input To select a circuit press F1 gt To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr a e 5 m Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 8 17 Output Default State An output goes to its powerup default state when the block is first powered up If Hold Last State was NOT enabled the block will also default the output if CPU communications are lost On a non redundant system this occurs approximately 250m6 after the third bus scan passes with no CPU communications If the block is on a redundant bus downstream of a Bus Switching Module more time is needed Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps
146. The Device Number has already been assigned to a block on the bus This message only appears if the block is connected to an operating bus Another number must be assigned to one of the blocks in conflict E DUPL I 0 REF The Reference Address conflicts with or overlaps the Reference Number assigned to another block on the bus This message only appears if the block is connected to an operating bus Press the Clear key Assign a different reference to either of the blocks in conflict E INVALD BLK CFG The entry just made is not valid for the block being configured Press the Clear key E EEPROM FAILURE Clear the message and go to Block Status menu Press the Clear key If the block s UNIT OK LED continues to blink replace the block s Terminal Assembly configuring the replacement to match the original block Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Assigninga Block s Required Features With the HHM plugged directly into the block select Program Block ID F1 from the Configuration menu to begin configuring a block The HHM displays PROG BLOCK ID I O BLOCK NO ref blk nxt If the controller is a PCIM OBIM or GENI the Program Block ID screen looks like this instead PROG BLOCK ID AN He BLOCK NO cfg blk The features configured on Program Block ID screen must be selected using a Hand held Monitor they cannot be configured from the applicat
147. The daughterboard can be upgraded using kit 44A286366 G098 or later Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N Block Number 0 31 Block Type Input Output Combination Reference Address through Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Pulse Test Enabled Disabled Input Filter Time 10 100 mS Redundancy Features Redundancy Mode None Standby Duplex Duplex Default on off BSM Present Y N BSM Controller Y N _ Outputs Default 2 5 10 sec Circuit Features output output output output Report Hold Last Default Report Overload Ckt Reference 1 O Type Faults State State No Load Shutdown Number I O l yes no yes no ON OFF yes no yes no Tristate Input must have 5 1K Q resistor across dry contacts of input device GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 4 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks 4 11 Pulse Test A new block is configured to enable Pulse Testing see below Pulse Testing should remain enabled if the block has loads that hold one state for long periods of time unless any load s are sensitive to pulses or interruptions of up to 8mS It should be disabled if the block s loads
148. They are compatible with all from a Hand held Monitor or the CPU Genius Hand held Monitors GEK 90486D 2 Specifications Block Type CatalogNumbers 24 48VDC 16CircuitSourceI OBlock Terminal Assembly only Electronics Assembly only 24VDC Source 16 Circuit Source I O Block Terminal Assembly only Electronics Assembly only 24 48VDC16CircuitSinkI OBlock Terminal Assembly only Electronics Assembly only 24VDC 16 Circuit SinkI O Block Terminal Assembly only Electronics Assembly only 16 circuit discrete input and output IC660BBD020 IC660TSD020 IC660EBD020 sameas block IC660BBD022 IC660BBD022 IC660TBD022 IC660EBD020 same asblockIC660BBS020 IC660BBD021 IC660TSD021 IC660EBD021 sameasblockIC660BBD023 IC660BBD023 IC660TBD023 IC660EBD021 sameas block IC660BBD021 Size height x width x depth Weight LEDS block LEDs each circuit HeatDissipation Block to Block Isolation 8 83 22 44cm x3 50 8 89cm x3 94 10 00cm 4 lbs 1 8 kg UnitOK I OEnabled Individualload side indicators 68 8 Watts with 16 outputs on at 2 amps 1500 V Operating voltage 18 56 VDC 24 48 V 18 30 VDC 24 V Ripple maximum 10 Required DC power 150mAtypical 300mAmaximum Power supply dropout time 10mS Input Characteristics For standard input voltage relative to DC Source Blocks Sink Blocks Input ON 24 VDC supply 16 24 VDC 0 8 VDC 48 VDC supply 32 48 VDC 0 16 VDC Input OFF 24 VDC supply 0 7 VD
149. To use an enclosure size not listed in the table find the amount of available surface area in square inches needed for heat transfer by multiplying the total number of Watts by one of the numbers below for 25C ambient temperature Watts x 7 8 for 35C ambient temperature Watts x 12 6 for 45C ambient temperature Watts x 33 For example if the total amount of heat generated is 400 Watts the minimum enclosure surface area at 35C ambient necessary to prevent the enclosure interior temperature from exceeding 55C would be 400 x 12 6 5040 sq in To transfer heat this surface area must be exposed to free space For example in a wall mounted enclosure the back is not exposed so it is not available for heat transfer For a floor mounted enclosure the bottom is not generally available for heat transfer and the sides or back may also not be exposed Calculating Power Dissipation for an Enclosure To estimate heat dissipation for enclosures of different sizes you can use a factor of 6 Watts per square meter of exposed surface area 004 Watts per square inch per C of temperature difference between the inside and outside ambient temperatures of an enclosure This is relatively accurate for a 20C temperature difference However it is less accurate for other temperature differences As an example of calculating power dissipation an enclosure is 48 inches 121 92 cm high 30 inches 76 2 cm wide and 18 inches 45 72 cm deep It is floor mou
150. User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Hold Last State Each output can be configured to either hold its last state or to go to its powerup default state if the block loses CPU communications for at least 3 bus scans For a new block Hold Last State is disabled for each output With Hold Last State disabled the block sets the output to its powerup default if CPU communications are lost If Hold Last State is enabled the block continues to hold the output in its current state instead of setting it to the powerup default Outputs remain in their last state or default indefinitely or until one of the following occurs Communications with the CPU are restored The Hand held Monitor changes the output by forcing it W Power is removed from the block Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the current Hold Last State configuration of each HOLD LAST STATE circuit REF YvYYYYXXKX Y hold last state tgl entr nxt N go to default state configured on the next HHM screen X the circuit has been configured as an input 2 To select a circuit press F1 gt To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl 3 To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 4 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks 4 15 Output Default State An output goes to its powerup default state when th
151. Ve G2 EXC 7 _ Transmitter Pep e 30 IN s DC DC O9 31 COM Se 932 GND DC Power Source Wiring a Bus Switching Module to a CSA Block When a Bus Switching Module is installed connect the BSM control wires to terminals 9 and 10 The polarity from the block is as marked the BSM is insensitive to polarity Chapter 11 Current source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Blocks BlockConfiguration The configurable features of a Current source Analog 4 input 2 Output Block are listed below For many the factory setting may not need to be changed Feature Circuitor Factory Selections Block Setting Device Number Block null 0 to 31 a number must be selected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type Baud Rate Block 153 6Kbstd 153 6 st 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kb ConfigurationProtected Block disabled enabled disabled Report Faults Circuit yes yes no Channelactive Circuit active active inactive BSM Present Block no yes no BSM Controller Block no yes no RedundancyMode Block none none standby Outputstimeout Block 3busscans for bus redundancy 2 5 or 10 sec Inputconversiontime Block 400mS 16mS to 400mS InputScaling Circuit 1uA eu 82767 eng units 0 to 25000uA OutputScaling Circuit 1uA eu 82767 eng units 0 to 24000uA LowAlarm Circuit 0 82767eng units HighAlarm Circuit 325000 82767eng units Hold LastState Circuit no yes no Output Default Circuit 4000 82767eng units Outp
152. Y 2 To change a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection F gt tgl entr nxt press F3 entr 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 12 Current source Analog 6 Output Blocks 12 9 Circuit Scaling Allcircuits on the block can be scaled independently To scale a circuit two sets of values are entered two engineering units values and their associated signallevels Based on these two pairs of values the block will be able to calculate engineering units for all other input or output levels The block will use the configured scaling values to convert the output signal levels 0 to 24000 uA into engineering units values Each engineering units value is an integer to 82767 The converted number is still a numerical value and will appear as such on the Hand held Monitor or at the CPU with its programming device The applicable units of measure should be recorded separately on a meter or display Scaling can also be used to compensate for field device inaccuracies On a new block the scaling is set to 14A per engineering unit If this is appropriate it will not need to be changed The most accurate scaling comes from actual measurements The process must be set to two distinctly different conditions so two engineering units measurements can be taken If the block is online to the process it will automatically provide the signal level for each engineering units measureme
153. ad resistive No Load disabled 25mA Recommended min load inductive No Load dis 40mA abled 50mA No Load enabled threshold Internal electronic short circuit trip 100ms long time trip Fusing Short Circuit Overload No Load Failed Switch Overtemperature Outputdiagnostics Environmental Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 100 C 40 to 212 F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration 5 10 Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200 Hz at 1G 4 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Block Operation An8 Circuit Grouped I O Block has eight identical circuits rated to operate at a nominal 115VAC H C Ke e 115 VAC H 1 J ama Configured 4 Input Internal 5V as an Input Device MOV AS n Lo Smart gt T Sitch Processor Preload Configured lt Se dh z Resistor as an Output 13K N in O K e gt 115 VAC N Field Terminal Internal Connections Assembly Circuits 2uF for Block IC660BBD100 1uF for Block IC660BBD101 Circuit LEDs Each circuit has its own LED If the circuit is configured as an input the LED indicates the presence of threshold voltage at the input terminal If the circuit is configured as an output the LED indicates the state commanded by the CPU Inputs and Outputs GEK 90486D 2 The block can be configured as combi
154. age to frequency converter The output signal frequency of the VFC is applied to a frequency counter via an optical coupler The output frequency is counted for a 400 millisecond gate time which is a common multiple of all the common line frequency periods This provides considerable rejection of line frequency pickups 2 The multiplexer intersperses other inputs between the two main thermocouple input times The other inputs come from the cold junction sensors and from internal references The cold junction inputs are measured and stored for later compensation of the normal thermocouple input measurement errors 3 To detect and correct for any gain or offset drift in the amplifier or VFC the block takes new readings of factory calibrated internal reference levels during operation These new measurements are compared to reference values stored by the block 4 The processor converts the cold junction temperature value to a voltage as specified by the NBS monograph for the thermocouple type in use This voltage is then added to the thermocouple measurement before converting to thermal units Since there may be some small differences between the cold junction temperature measurement and the actual cold junction temperature an offset adjustment can be entered using a Hand held Monitor These offsets are due to variances in the terminal strip assembly and the correction factors are therefore stored in the Terminal Assembly EEPROM GEK 90486D 2
155. agnostics Individuallow alarm thresholds and high alarm thresholds can be configured for each input If an input is over its high alarm limit the block sends a HIGH ALARM message If an inputis under its low Alarm Threshold the block sends a LOW ALARM message The alarm message identifies the input circuit which is in alarm Only one message is sent upon reaching the limit Since the input value is supplied as part of the normal input status update the CPU can determine how much over the limit it is Input Underrange and Overrange Diagnostics The block sends an UNDERRANGE or OVERRANGE message if A Theinput voltage or current is outside the circuit s configured range Therefore when the block converts the signal level to digital counts the result is lower than 4095 or higher than 4095 To prevent this the input signal should be clamped appropriately B The channel scaling is incorrect When the block converts the digital counts value to engineering units the result is lower than 32 767 or higher than 432 767 This should be corrected by adjusting channel scaling Output Underrange and Overrange Diagnostics The block sends an UNDERRANGE or OVERRANGE message if conversion of the engineering units output it receives from the CPU results in a counts value that corresponds to a signal outside the circuit s configured range For example if the output is configured for 0 to 5V and the conversion from engineering units to counts resul
156. al block listings Overtemperature diagnostic Seeindividu al block listings P Program Block ID screen B7 Publications Related R Redundancy I O point Reference Address B 9 See also Genius I O System and Commu nications User s Manual configuring with HHM References used by blocks Relay Output Blocks BSM controller 7 10 BSM present 7 10 catalog numbers A 1 compatibility configurable features and defaults 7 7 configuration worksheet cR to Bus Switching Module 7 6 diagnostics dimensions duplex default state features fuses and snubbers heat generation LEDs 7 3 operation output default time 7 11 outputs 7 3 outputs default states outputs hold last state PLC references required B 1 power connections relay states specifications 2 wiring instructions RTD 6 Input Blocks alarm thresholds 14 15 alpha 14 14 catalog numbers A 1 channel active configurable features and defaults 14 7 configuration worksheet dimensions 16 2 features 14 1 heat generation high lowalarm diagnostics 14 5 input filter time 14 16 inputs 14 4 internal fault diag ostic 14 5 linearization 14 11 open wire diagnostic GEK 90486D 2 GEK 90486D 2 operation 14 3 over underange diagnostics PLC references required report faults to CPU RID resistance 14 12 specifications units 14 10 wiring error diagnostic wir
157. alAssembl IC660TBR101 Electronics Assembly IC660EBR101 24 48 VDC 16CircuitSourceI OBlock IC660BBD020 Terminal Assembly only IC660TSD020 24VDC 16CircuitSourceI O Block IC660BBD022 TerminalAssemblyonly IC660TBD022 Electronics Assembly for 24 VDC and 24 48 VDC Source I O blocks IC660EBD020 24 48VDC 16CircuitSinkI OBlock IC660BBD021 Terminal Assembly only IC660TSD021 24VDC 16CircuitSinkI O Block IC660BBD023 TerminalAssemblyonly IC660TBD023 Electronics Assembly for 24 VDC and 24 48 VDC Sink I O blocks IC660EBD021 32Circuit12 24VDC8SourceI OBlock IC660BBD024 TerminalAssembl IC660TBD024 Electronics puedo IC660EBD024 32Circuit5 12 24VDCSinkI OBlock IC660BBD025 TerminalAssembl IC660TBD025 Electronics Decoy IC660EBD025 115 VAC AnalogI OBlock IC660BBA100 Terminal Assembly only IC660TSA100 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA100 A 1 A 2 Module Catalog Number 24 48 DC AnalogI O Block IC660BBA020 Terminal Assembly only IC660TSA020 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA020 115 VAC 125VDCCurrentSource AnalogI Oblock IC660BBA104 Terminal Assembly only IC660TBA104 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA104 24 48VDCCurrentSource AnalogI Oblock IC660BBA024 TerminalAssemblyonly IC660TBA024 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA024 115 VAC 125VDCCurrent Source Analog Output Block IC660BBA105 TerminalAssemblyonly IC660TBA105 Electronics Assembly only IC660EBA105 24 48VDCCurrentSource Analog Output block IC660BBA025 Terminal
158. and no feedback analysis will be needed configure the block as Outputs Only The block will require 1 output reference per circuit and NO input references Configure the block as Combination if it will have both inputs and outputs or if output feedback analysis will be done on a block with all outputs The block will require 1 input reference AND 1 output reference per circuit For example a 16 circuit discrete block configured as a combination block uses 16 input references and 16 output references PROG BLOCK ID I O BLOCK NO ref blk nxt Configuration Steps 1 If the HHM is set up for Series Five Series Six or Series 90 70 PLC operation after you enter a reference the cursor moves to the right side of line 2 For some older Hand held Monitors when Series 90 70 PLC operation has been selected I O type configuration works as described in step 2 below instead 2 Ifthe HHM is setup for PCIM OBIM GENI operation press F1 CFG on the Program Block ID display to move the cursor to the right side of line 2 3 Press F2 Toggle to select I for Inputs only O for Outputs only Or for Combination 4 Press F3 Enter to save the entry 5 Press F4 to check the block s currently assigned baud rate and change it if it does not match the intended bus baud rate Using Output Feedback When a block is configured as a Combination I O block each circuit is assigned both an input reference and an ou
159. any active circuit Active circuits can be configured not to send diagnostic messages to the CPU if a fault occurs However such circuits still respond to faults and report them to the Hand held Monitor If a circuit is configured as inactive it will not detect faults or report diagnostics If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using a Read Diagnostic datagram the block returns current diagnostics for all active circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled It will not return diagnostics from inactive circuits Internal Fault An internal fault occurs if one or more of the internal references is faulty While this fault is present the block reports a value of zero for each channel using the faulty reference s The block s Electronics Assembly should be replaced Open Wire The block reports an Open Wire diagnostic if there is a missing or faulty connection to the thermocouple input XJV input or XJI input for the channel Overrange Underrange This diagnostic is reported only if engineering units of Celsius or Fahrenheit are selected It indicates either that 1 The input temperature exceeds the expected range for the thermocouple type in use The expected range for each thermocouple type derived from the corresponding NBS monograph is Thermocouple Type Range J 210 0C to 1200 0C K 270 0C to 1370 0C T 270 0C to 400 0C E 270 0C to 1000 0C B 20 0C to 1820 0C R 50 0C to 1770 0C
160. arefully See if the circuit will switch when forced with the HHM If the problem persists replace the block s Electronics Assembly m One circuit on an operating block is not being recognized by the CPU Ensure that the correct voltage level is being supplied to the Terminal Assembly Check for a faulty sensor If the circuit s LED is OFE check wiring connections Reseat the Electronics Assembly If the problem persists replace the block s Electronics Assembly 16 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 No input data from block at CPU Confirm block reference address and Block Number with HHM For Series Six Plus PLC confirm correct channel number selected on Bus Controller DIP switches Verify that the block is not an outputs only block No output data from the CPU at one or more blocks Verify bus connections at BSM Check block s Redundancy mode with HHM Determine whether outputs to the block s are currently disabled Information on disabled outputs is in your bus controller manual The CPU is not receiving all inputs or the blocks are not receiving all outputs CPU program execution time and bus scan time may not be compatible resulting in lost inputs or lost outputs The Genius I O System User s Manual explains program execution time and bus scan time In a Series Six Plus PLC
161. ate Y N Default Values eng units Output Feedback Enabled Y N Output Feedback Time 0 to 255mS GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 11 Current source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Blocks 11 9 Report Faults to CPU Fault reports to the host can be disabled or enabled for any circuit If fault reporting is enabled the block sends a message to the host if any fault occurs If Fault reporting is disabled the block does not send fault reports to the CPU for that circuit Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the block detects faults on the circuit and takes appropriate action If a fault occurs the block s Unit OK LED blinks and a fault report is sent to a Hand held Monitor The fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the block If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 shows the current Report Faults configuration of each circuit Line 2 shows the I Otype of each circuit 1 To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press REPO I RT FAULT 97 F1 gt I IIOO Y Y Y Y Y Y gt tgl entr nxt N To change a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 3 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Channel
162. ated on line 2 1 To select the other output press F1 gt FEEDBACK TIME OUT1 97 1120 2 To change the Feedback Time for the output press F2 chng 250 mS then enter a new time To save the new time press F3 entr gt chng nxt 3 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 11 Current source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Blocks 11 15 Hold Last State Each output can be independently configured to either hold its last value or go to its powerup default value if the block loses CPU communications for at least 3 bus scans For a new block Hold Last State is disabled for each output With Hold Last State disabled the block sets the output to its powerup default if CPU communications are lost If Hold Last State is enabled the block continues to hold the output at its current value instead of setting it to the powerup default Outputs remain in their last value or default indefinitely or until one of the following occurs Communications with the CPU are restored m The Hand held Monitor changes the output by forcing it Power is removed from the block Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the current Hold Last State configuration of HOLD LAST ST 97 all outputs On this screen IIIIOO YYYYNN gt tgl entr nxt X the circuit is an input Y hold last state N go to default state configured on the next HHM scree
163. ault Therefore when BSM Present is selected above the block automatically changes its Output Default Time from 3 bus scans to 2 5 seconds If Hold Last State was selected outputs will remain in their last state while the BSM switches instead of defaulting so there is no need to change this selection If Hold Last State was set to NO for any output on a block and total bus scan time will exceed 100mS change this selection to 10 seconds Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl OUTPUT DEF TIME REF 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr TIME 2 5 SECS 9 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt CPU Redundancy The block can be configured for No Controller Redundancy Hot Standby or Duplex redundancy For new blocks it is set for No Controller Redundancy It must be changed only if the block should be able to receive output data from two CPUs In Hot Standby mode a block receives output data from both CPUs but uses the data from only one of them to drive its outputs The block prefers outputs sent by the bus interface module Bus Controller or PCIM with Device Number 31 If those outputs are not available the block will use outputs from the bus interface module with Device Number 30 If no outputs from a CPU are available outputs will either Hold Last State or go to their defaults In Duplex redundancy mode a block
164. be changed Feature Circuit or Factory Selections Block Setting Device Number Block null 0 to 31 a number must be selected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type Baud Rate Block 153 6std 153 6 std 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kbd Input Filter Time t 10mSec 10 100mSec in 10mS steps Open OFFThreshold see 25 25 85 ON OFFThreshold 50 25 85 Shorted Wire Detect Circuit no yes no Open Wire Detect Circuit no yes no Report Faults Circuit yes yes no ConfigurationProtection Block disabled enabled disabled Set up separately for each bank of 8 circuits Features marked with one asterisk in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Before configuration begins the block s features should be decided on and recorded on copies of the Configuration Worksheet printed on the next page Chapter 6 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block 6 11 6 12 16 Circuit AC Input Block Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N Block Number 0 31 Reference Address through Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Input Filter Time 10 100 mS circuits 1 8 A circuits 9 16 Open OFF Threshold circuits 1 8
165. block is on a redundant bus downstream of a Bus Switching Module more time is needed Additional default time for redundancy is explained on page 9 17 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 OUTPUT DEFAULT REF X1X1X1X0X0X0X0X0 gt tgl entr nxt 2 3 4 5 6 Line 3 shows the Output Default state configuration of circuits 1 16 On this screen 0 the output default state is off 1 the output default state is on X the circuit has been configured as an input To select a circuit press F1 To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 to display the Output Default screen for circuits 17 32 From the second Output Default screen press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 9 32 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 9 15 L9 BSM Present If the block is connected to a single bus or to just one trunk of a dual bus BSM Present should be set to NO Select YES if the block is located in a cluster connected to dual busses via a Bus Switching Module Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM PRESENT REF STATUS 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr YES 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt BSM Controller A BSM Controller is a block to which a
166. block s Electronics Assembly the side opposite the Terminal Assembly Wiring conduits shelves and other components including projections on the cover or door should not inhibit cooling airflow around the blocks Dimensions of Genius I O Blocks 16 2 The table below shows the dimensions of different types of blocks Block Types Height Width Depth 32CircuitDCInput OutputBlocks 8 83 22 44cm 3 56 9 05cm 4 42 11 23cm AllotherI Oblocks 8 83 22 44cm 3 50 8 89cm 3 94 10 00cm PowerTRAC Module 11 00 27 94cm 5 21 713 23cm 8 06 20 47cm BusSwitching Module when installed 3 65 9 3cm 1 7 4 3cm 2 8 7 1cm ri a UO 244476 UU UU O O O LO O O O O O HEIGHT O O O O O O O O O O O O ANAONA E y ANO J DEPTH p gt WIDTH gt Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Heat Dissipation Particularly when using discrete blocks it is important to be sure that the size of an enclosure is adequate for amount of heat that will be generated within it You should calculate the heat generation as described below 1 Identify the types o
167. cated in a cluster connected to dual busses via a Bus Switching Module Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM PRESENT REF 97 128A 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr STATUS YES 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt BSM Controller A BSM Controller is a block to which a Bus Switching Module is directly attached which controls the BSM s switching action For a new block the default is NO Change it only if the block will be used as a BSM Controller To change this configuration with a Hand held Monitor the block must first be configured for BSM PRESENT The BSM CONTROLLER menu will not appear if BSM PRESENT is set to NO Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM CONTROLLER REF 97 128A 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr STATUS NO 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 13 Current source Analog 6 Input Blocks 13 13 CPU Redundancy The block can be configured for No Controller redundancy or Hot Standby redundancy For new blocks it is set for No Controller Redundancy It must be changed only if the block should be able to receive output data from two CPUs In Hot Standby mode a block receives communications from both CPUs The block prefers communications se
168. cause outputs that are OFF to turn ON and outputs that are ON to go OFE Progressively longer pulses are applied until the desired circuit function is sensed If the pulse width reaches the maximum of 16mS without detecting valid operation one of these fault conditions is reported Failed Switch If the output does not change state when pulsed Short Circuit If the load on an output that was OFF exceeds 10 amps when pulsed ON No Load If the load on an output that was OFF draws less than 50 mA when pulsed ON If the output was OFE no current flow when the output is pulsed indicates an open circuit or failed switch Similarly continued current flow when ON outputs are pulsed OFF indicates a shorted switch both malfunctions are reported to the CPU Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Pulse Test Description Pulse Testing switches a load to the opposite state then back again This should occur so quickly that there is no effect on the mechanics or contact outputs of the load device Specific Pulse Test operation depends on whether or not No Load detection is enabled A If No Load detection is enabled the block looks for presence or absence of load current using the normal No Load threshold This verifies load continuity B If No Load detection is NOT enabled Pulse Testing tests only that the block output is switching voltage Pulse Testing begins with narrow pulses If t
169. ce Number Block null 0 to 31 a number must be selected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type BlockI OType Block input input output combination Baud Rate Block 153 6std 153 6 std 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kbd AC DCCircuitVoltage Block AC DC AC Pulse Test for Outputs Block enabled enabled disabled Input Filter Time Block 20mSec 10 100mSec in 10mS steps CircuitI OType Circuit input input output tristateinput Report Faults Circuit yes yes no Hold LastState Circuit no yes no Output Default State Circuit off on off Report No Load Circuit yes yes no Overload Shutdown Circuit yes yes no BSM Present Block no yes no BSM Controller Block no yes no Output Default Time Block 3busscans forbus redundancy 2 5 sec or 10 sec RedundancyMode Block none none hot standby duplex Duplex DefaultState Block off on off ConfigurationProtection Block disabled enabled disabled Features with an asterisk in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Instructions for configuring these features using a Hand held Monitor are given on the following pages Before configuration begins the blocks features should be decided on and recorded on copies of the Configuration Worksheet printed on the next page 5 12 Genius I O
170. cepts 4 bytes of data each bus scan If the block is configured as an inputs only block all circuits must be inputs The block will use 32 input references and NO output references If the block is configured as an outputs only block all circuits must be regular outputs no feedback analysis can be performed The block will use 32 output references and NO input references If the block is configured as a combination block it can have any mix of input and or output circuits The block will use 32 input references and 32 output references The actual state of each output circuit will be returned to the CPU in the corresponding input reference location The CPU can monitor the feedback state to verify after an appropriate delay that the output switching device has operated properly and that the load has the proper voltage and current applied Appendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Input Data Format A32 Circuit DC I O Block broadcasts 4 bytes of input data each bus scan Byte Description 0 Inputs 1 8 input 1 in bit 0 1 Inputs 9 16 input 9 in bit 0 2 Inputs 17 24 input 17 in bit 0 3 Inputs 25 32 input 25 in bit 0 Output Data Format The block receives 4 bytes of output data from the bus controller each bus scan Byte Description 0 Outputs 1 8 output 1 in bit 0 1 Outputs 9 16 output 9 in bit 0 2 Outputs 17
171. ck the resistor should be 1 6K ohms Wiring for a Bus Switching Module If the block will be a BSM Controller attach the BSM like a load to circuit 1 Connect either BSM pigtail wire to terminal 6 For a DC Sink block connect the other BSM wire to DC For a DC Source block connect the other BSM wire to DC Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 8 9 BlockConfiguration 6 10 The configurable features of a 16 Circuit DC Input Output Block are listed below For many the factory setting may not need to be changed Feature Circuitor Selections Factory Setting Block Device Number Block null 0 to 31 a number must be selected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type BlockI OType Block input input output combination Baud Rate Block 153 6std 153 6 std 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kbd Pulse Test for Outputs Block enabled enabled disabled Input Filter Time Block 20mSec 10 100mSec in 10mS steps CircuitI OType Circuit input input output tristateinput Report Faults Circuit yes yes no Hold LastState Circuit no yes no Output DefaultState Circuit off on off Detect No Load Circuit yes yes no OverloadShutdown Circuit yes yes no BSM Present Block no yes no BSM Controller Block no yes no Output Default Time Block 3busscans for bus redundancy 2 5 or 10 sec RedundancyMode Block none none hot standby duplex GMR Duplex Default Block off on off Features marked with an asterisk
172. cm Weight 4 Ibs 1 8 Kg LEDs I O block UnitOK I OEnabled LEDs each circuit Reflect state of input logic side Input to ground orserial bus isolation 1500V Terminal board rating input or feedthrough current 5 0Amps HeatDissipation 28 Watts maximum with 16 inputs on at full current Operatingvoltage 93 132 VAC Frequency 47 63 Hz Required power block only 80mA maximumblockcurrent plus 200mA maximum input circuitcurrent Power Supply Dropout Time 1cycle 16 7mS at 60 Hz 20mS at 50 Hz InputCharacteristics Input off state input on state Inputimpedance typical Input open wire Input shorted wire Input processing time typ Selectable input filter times Programmable threshold 25 to 85 11 6Kohms Programmable threshold 25 to 85 Fixed 10 90 thresholds 1mS plus selectable filter time 10 to 100mS in 10mS increments Inputdiagnostics Open Wire Short Circuit Environmental Operatingtemperature OC to 60C 32F to 140F Storagetemperature 40C to 100C 40F to 212F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration 5 10 Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200 Hz at 1G 6 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 s Block Operation The input circuitry is resistive The resistive load is sufficient to activate most 2 wire proximity switch devices Input resistance is 11 6K ohms which provides a pre
173. compares outputs received from two CPUs and sets any outputs for which there is disagreement to their Duplex Default state Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CPU REDUNDANCY REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection NO CTRL REDUND 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 7 Relay Output Blocks 7 11 Duplex Default State In Duplex Redundancy mode if the block receives different output states for given points the block breaks the tie by outputting the Duplex Default State to those points For new blocks OFF is selected for all outputs Change it if outputs should be ON Coil Type Coil State Action of Relays Normally open relay ON 1 relay closes OFF 0 relay opens Normally closed relay ON 1 relay opens OFF 0 relay closes Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the Duplex Default state press F2 tgl Press F3 DUPLEX DEFAULT entr to save the new selection ra 2 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Note If the block loses communications with BOTH CPUS individual outputs go to their configured Hold Last State or Output Default State Configuration Protection This feature can be used to protect the block s configuration preventing changes from the CPU or Hand held Monitor It can only be selecte
174. compensate the cold junction to within 2C typically If a more accurate setting is required this compensation can be adjusted using a Hand held Monitor after the block is installed see page 15 14 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Input Data Format GEK 90486D 2 Each bus scan a Thermocouple block broadcasts 12 bytes of input data Each input consists of 2 bytes of data in the configured units C E mV or counts Appendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Byte Description 0 Input channel 1 bits 0 7 1 Input channel 1 bits 8 15 2 Input channel 2 bits 0 7 3 Input channel 2 bits 8 15 4 Input channel 3 bits 0 7 5 Input channel 3 bits 8 15 6 Input channel 4 bits 0 7 7 Input channel 4 bits 8 15 8 Input channel 5 bits 0 7 9 Input channel 5 bits 8 15 10 Input channel 6 bits 0 7 11 Input channel 6 bits 8 15 Hand held Monitor Input Display The Hand held Monitor displays the values in the configured units The following example shows the Monitor Block screen with configured units of tenths of degrees C REF 601 624 I I1 20 2C I2 50 0C gt Chapter 15 Thermocouple 6 Input Blocks 15 5 Diagnostics 15 6 Circuit diagnostics for Thermocouple Input Blocks are listed below These diagnostics are automatically performed by the block for
175. configuration of HOLD LAST STATE all circuits On this screen REF Y hold last stat YYYNYNYNYNYNYYYN CONDES QUEE gt tgl entr nxt N go to default state configured on the next HHM screen 2 Toselect a circuit press F1 gt 3 To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Output Default State An output goes to its powerup default state when the block is first powered up If Hold Last State was NOT enabled the block will also default the output if CPU communications are lost On a non redundant system this occurs approximately 250m6 after the third bus scan passes with no CPU communications If the block is on a redundant bus downstream of a Bus Switching Module more time is needed Additional default time for redundancy is explained on page 7 11 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the Output Default state configuration of all OUTPUT DEFAULT relays On this screen REF CCOCCOCOCOCCCCCC C Output Default is closed tgl entr nxt O Output Default is open 2 Toselect a circuit press F1 gt 3 To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 7 Relay Output Blocks 7 9 BSM Present If
176. configuration of REPORT FAULTS all circuits on the block REF EP YYYYYYYY 2 To select a circuit for configuration press F1 gt tgl entr nxt 3 To change the Report Faults configuration of a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks 5 17 Hold Last State Each output can be configured to either hold its last state or go to its powerup default state if the block loses CPU communications for at least 3 bus scans For a new block Hold Last State is disabled for each output With Hold Last State disabled the block sets the output to its powerup default if CPU communications are lost If Hold Last State is enabled the block continues to hold the output in its current state instead of setting it to the powerup default Outputs remain in their last state or default indefinitely or until one of the following occurs Communications with the CPU are restored m The Hand held Monitor changes the output by forcing it W Power is removed from the block Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the current Hold Last State configuration of each HOLD LAST STATE circuit REF YYYNNXXKX Y hold last state tgl entr nxt N go to default state configured on the next HHM screen X the circuit has been configured as an input 2
177. crete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 BlockConfiguration The configurable features of a Current source Analog Output Block are listed below For many the factory setting may not need to be changed Feature Circuit or Factory Selections Block Setting Device Number Block null 0 to 31 a number must be se lected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type Baud Rate Block 153 6Kbstd 153 6 st 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kb ConfigurationProtected Block disabled enabled disabled Report Faults Circuit yes yes no Channelactive Circuit active active inactive BSM Present Block no yes no BSM Controller Block no yes no RedundancyMode Block none none standby Outputstimeout Block 3busscans for bus redundancy 2 5 seconds or 10 seconds Output Scaling Circuit 1uA eu 32767 eng units 0 to 24000uA Hold LastState Circuit no yes no Output Default Circuit 4000 82767eng units Output FeedbackEnabled Circuit yes yes no Output Feedbacktime Circuit 0mS OmS to 255ms Features marked with an asterisk in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Before configuration begins the features of each Current source Analog Output Block should be decided upon then reco
178. cted to dual busses via a Bus Switching Module Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM PRESENT REF 97 128A 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr STATUS YES 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Output Default Time When a Bus Switching Module is used the Output Default Time must be long enough to allow the BSM to switch without causing outputs to default Therefore when BSM Present is selected above the block automatically changes its Output Default Time from 3 bus scans to 2 5 seconds If Hold Last State was selected outputs will remain in their last value while the BSM switches instead of defaulting so there is no need to change this selection If Hold Last State was set to NO for any output on a block and total bus scan time will exceed 100mS change this selection to 10 seconds Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl OUTPUT DEF TIME ues REF 97 128A 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr TIME 2 5 SECS 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 10 Voltage Current 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks 10 21 CPU Redundancy The block can be configured for No Controller redundancy or Hot Standby redundancy For new blocks it is set for No Controller Redundancy It mus
179. ction was Input each circuit can be either an regular input I or a tristate input Ir Select Tristate Input for any input circuit that should report the Open Wire diagnostic If the BlockI O Type is Output each circuit must be an output O If the Block I O Type is Combination each circuit can be configured as an input I an output O or a tristate input Ir Select Tristate Input for any input circuit that should report the Open Wire diagnostic Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the current I O type of each circuit on the I O CIRCUIT CFG block On this screen REF PCI IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII I the circuit is configured as an input gt tgl entr nxt O the circuit is configured as an output Iz the circuit is configured as a tristate input 2 To select a circuit press F1 gt To change a selection press F2 tgl 3 To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 8 15 Report Faults to CPU Fault reports to the host can be disabled or enabled for any circuit on a block If fault reporting is enabled for a circuit the block will send a message to the host if any fault occurs on that circuit If fault reporting is disabled the block will not send fault reports to the CPU for that circuit Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the bloc
180. cuit that should report the Open Wire diagnostic If the Block I O Type is Output each circuit must be an output O Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the I O type of each circuit To select a circuit I O CIRCUIT CFG press F1 gt REF IpIpIgIpI I I I gt tgl entr nxt 2 Tochange a circuit s I O type press F2 tgl To save the selection press F3 entr 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display 5 16 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Report Faults to CPU Fault reports to the host can be disabled or enabled for any circuit If fault reporting is enabled for a circuit the block sends a message to the host if any fault occurs on that circuit If Fault reporting is disabled the block does not send fault reports to the CPU for that circuit Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the block detects faults on the circuit and takes appropriate action The Unit OK LED blinks when a fault occurs and a fault report is sent to a Hand held Monitor The fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the block If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using a Read Diagnostics datagram the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the current Fault Reports
181. d current level Ifthe load does not continuously draw 50mA from the output circuit the block sends a NO LOAD message Disable this diagnostic for any output where a very small loads small relay transformer or indicating lamp will draw less than 50 mA Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the Report No Load configuration of all circuits REPORT NO LOAD REF Y the output will report No Load conditions YYYNNXXX N the output will not report No Load conditions gt tgl entr nxt X the circuit has been configured as an input 2 To select a circuit press F1 gt To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl 3 To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks 5 19 Overload Shutdown Overload Shutdown protects output loads field wiring and switching devices If a load exceeds 2 8amps 2 0 amps RMS continuously for 100mS and Overload Shutdown is enabled the block will turn the output off and send an OVERLOAD message Under certain conditions see page 5 8 Overload Shutdown detection and reporting can be disabled for output loads that require more than 2 amps RMS Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 shows the Overload Shutdown configuration of all YYYYNXXKX OVRLOAD SHUTDWN circuits REF Y output will shut dow
182. d from the Hand held Monitor To make subsequent changes protection must be removed again using the Hand held Monitor For a new block configuration is unprotected Before a block is used in the system its configuration should be protected Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection Press F4 next to DISABLED return to the first configuration display tgl entr nxt 7 12 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 8 Four different types of 16 Circuit DC I O Blocks are Additional diagnostics of these blocks are available There are two source blocks which provide current to field output devices m 24VDCSourceblock IC660BBD022 for use with 2 wire and 3 wire solid state sensors and m Overload Detection and Shutdown electromechanicalsensors m Nodload Detection m 24 48VDCSourceblock IC660BBD020 for use with 3 wire solid state sensors and electromechanical m Overtemperature Failed Switch Open Wire for Tristate Inputs sensors IG 244485 i WAY There are also two sink blocks which receive current D RA from field output devices E m 2
183. d inputs to the positive side Since block power is the same as circuit power it is important to wire block power disconnects so that block power and input power will be 243020 removed at the same time o DC SOURCE agarz j YES NO BLOCK Oct DC 1 sERIAL1 me 2 Q SERIAL 2 M CN 3 SHIELD IN i LOAD 4 SHIELD ouT DC j Sloj s DC DCt N DEVICE 1 40 pct Qe Slo l SOURCE Caution OUTPUT SIGNAL 10 41 amp o og D x TYPICAL OUTPUT If circuit power is not removed at the G5 lax t same time as block power the block Me s 65 p may power up when multiple inputs SOURCE INPUT SIGNAL dct are activated even though one leg of O0 0 0 0 pc power has been removed from the TYPICAL INPUT block eS a ad l Wiring for a Bus Switching Module If the block will be used as a BSM Controller YN pevice 32 ED connect the Bus Switching Module like a load to DG circuit 1 Connect either of the BSM s pigtail pos wires to terminal 10 For a DC Sink block 1 o connect the other BSM wire to DC For a DC Source block connect the other BSM wire to DC GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 9 32 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 9 7 L9 BlockConfiguration The configurable features of a 32 Circuit DC Input Output Block are listed below
184. ds 2 8 amps 2 0 amps RMS continuously for 100mS the block will turn the output off and send an OVERLOAD message if Overload Shutdown is enabled a40646 45 7 TYPICAL 3A 2 SHORT DESTRUCTIVE MAXIMUM 45 CIRCUIT FUSE MINIMUM FAULT LEVEL PEAK 30 INPUT CURRENT AMPS 20 i 15 J SEE RREA E ee E n TYPICAL LOAD OVERLOAD SIZE 3 CONTACTOR SHUTDOWN LEVEL 5 x 2 8A 2A RMS gs OPTIONAL 0 T T T T T T T U 17 33 50 67 eg 100 117 TURN TIME MSEC 1DIV 1 CYCLE 60HZ AC ON ACTIVE ELECTRONIC PROTECTION For loads that require more than 2 amps RMS individual outputs can be configured not to shut off at this level or send the OVERLOAD message These restrictions apply 1 Maximum load current 10 amps RMS 2 Maximum duty cycle limit duty cycle so that Load current x ON is less than 1 0 amp 3 Maximum ON time 1 minute 4 Maximum total current of all outputs ON at the same time is less than 15 amps For example a maximum 10 amp load can be pulsed at a 10 duty cycle or up to 1 minute ON and 9 minutes OFF Higher repetition rates can be used if the duty cycle is maintained Exceeding the 10 amp limit may cause a short circuit fault to be generated The duty cycle derating to an average of 1 amp output current and the ON time limit are necessary to avoid overheating due to the increased power dissipation in the block at these high currents Exceeding these limits may cause an ov
185. ds are scaled values between 32 767 engineering units For a new Current source Analog Input block the default Alarm Thresholds are 0 low and 25000 high Typically Alarm Thresholds are set at levels beyond which the input should not operate or levels beyond which alternate processing is required Because Alarm Thresholds are engineering units values if scaling is changed Alarm Thresholds should be reviewed and adjusted if necessary Alarm Thresholds can also be changed by the ladder logic program in the CPU If an input reached its high alarm a new limit could be set This could generate a high high alarm or an alarm cleared threshold Two examples are described on page 10 18 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the low and high Alarm Thresholds for the fj ALARM 97 block s first input Il LOW I1 HI 32767 32767 2 To select the next circuit press F1 gt to move the cursor from L O W to H I then press F1 gt again gt chng nxt 3 To change the threshold shown at the cursor location press F2 J chng 4 To save the new selection press F3 entr 5 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display 13 12 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 BSM Present If the block is connected to a single bus or to just one trunk of a dual bus BSM Present should be set to NO Select YES of the block is lo
186. e GEK 90486D 2 9 1 L9 Specifications Block Type DC 32 circuit discrete input and output CatalogNumbers 32 Circuit 12 24 VDC Source I OBlock IC660BBD024 TerminalAssembly IC660TBD024 ElectronicsAssembly IC660EBD024 32Circuit5 12 24VDCTTLSink I OBlock IC660BBD025 TerminalAssembly IC660TBD025 ElectronicsAssembly IC660EBD025 Size height x width x depth Weight LEDs I O Block LEDs each circuit Block to Block Isolation HeatDissipation 8 83 22 44cm x 3 56 9 05cm x 4 42 11 23cm 4 lbs 1 8 kg UnitOK I OEnabled Individual logicside indicators 850V 11W minimum with 8 inputs 18W maximum with 32 outputs at 5 amp Operating voltage singlesource Ripple maximum Required DC power Power supply dropouttimes 10to30 VDC 12 24V supply 4 9 to 5 3 VDC 5 V supply sink model only absoluteinstantaneous limit 10 12 24 volts 1 5 volts 150 mA typical 300 mA maximum 4 mS at 12 volts 20 ms at 24 volts Input Characteristics Input ON Input OFF Input voltage relative to DC 5 VDC supply 12 VDC supply 24 VDC supply 5 VDC supply 12 VDC supply 24 VDC supply Inputimpedance typical Input processing time typical Selectable input filter times Source Blocks SinkBlocks not applicable 0 0 8 VDC 8 12 VDC 0 4 VDC 18 24 VDC 0 6 VDC not applicable 2 5 VDC 0 6 VDC 6 12 VDC 0 12 VDC 12 24 VDC 3 3 K ohms 1 4mS plus selectable filter delay 1 2 3 4 5 10 2
187. e A Atthe communications line B Across the power line C AttheI O points Suppression at the Communications Line High transients on the communications bus may render some I O blocks inactive and turn their LEDs off If that happens cycling block power restores operation To guard blocks from the affects of high transients suppression can be added at the communications line For an individual block suppression can be supplied by connecting two small MOVs from Serial 1 and Serial 2 to the block s Shield Out terminal JENNA I o o bus cable not shown o QJ s Q s2 wove TG aem ah QI ZO YAA MWD Suitable MOVs include Harris part number V220MA2A Panasonic ERZ CO5FK221U and Siemens 505K140 If necessary higher energy rated devices can also be used It is important to be sure that the MOV leads do not cause any shorts between the serial data and shield connectors For blocks installed together in an enclosure suppression can be added at the point where the bus cable and power lines enter the enclosure as shown on the next page Chapter 2 of the Genius I O System and Communications Manual GEK 90486 1 describes the noise rejection and filtering capabilities of the Genius bus It explains bus wiring practices for all applications Chapter 2 also gives additional instructions for installing a bus outdoors or between buildings includin
188. e 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 or 1024mS For a new block this is set to 128mS To remove the filter specify the unfiltered value code 0 filter time none Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the selected filter time If this is not appropriate INPUT FILTR TIME press F2 tgl to change it IN1 97 FILTER 128mS 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr tgl entr nxt 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display 10 16 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Alarm Input Mode Ordinarily the block sends the current value of each input circuit in engineering units to the CPU This is referred to as the analog block s normal mode of operation For a new block all inputs are set to operate in Normal Mode For some applications it may be preferred to send an alarm status indication instead of the actual analog input value for one or more circuits This is referred to as Alarm Input mode In this mode the analog value normally sent to the CPU is replaced by the value 0 1 or 2 decimal 0 if the signal lies between the block s two alarm thresholds 1 if the signal lies at or below the low alarm threshold 2 if the signal lies at or above the high alarm threshold Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps ALARM INPUT 97 IIIIOO NNNWN XX gt tgl entr nxt 1 grs ues Go T The screen displays the present inp
189. e across input device IN to H 20 VRMS 35 VDC Maximumswitch current threshold 6mA RMS 5mA Tristate input OFE acceptable voltage across input device IN to H 16 VRMS 40 VRMS 16 VDC 35 VDC ON maximum voltage across input device IN toH 4VRMS 3 5 VDC Input load network Resistor to N 13K ohms 13K ohms Capacitor to H for blocks BBS100 and BBS101 22 uf 22 uf Capacitor to H for blocks BBS102 and BBS103 JA uf 1 uf Input processing time typical Selectable input filter times Inputdiagnostics 2mS filter 0 8mS filter 10 to 100mS in 10mS increments Open Wire Overtemperature Loss of I O Power Failed Switch Output Characteristics Output current steady state Maximuminrush current Output Leakage Current at 0 volt output for blocks BBS102 and 103 Current at 0 volt output for blocks BBS100 and 101 Voltage at open output for blocks BBS102 and 103 Voltage at open output for blocks BBS100 and 101 Output switch OFF to ON ON to OFF Rated switching frequency at maximum inrush Turn on delay maximum Voltage drop at 2 amps Voltage drop at 20 amps inrush Minimum load No Load disabled Resistive for blocks BBS102 and BBS103 Resistive for blocks BBS100 and BBS101 Inductive for blocks BBS102 and BBS103 Inductive for blocks BBS100 and BBS101 No Load enabled threshold Maximum block output current Fusing Outputdiagnostics For AC For DC 2amps 2 amps resistive 9 1 amp inductive 25 amps 2 cycles 25
190. e block chassis and to terminals 13 20 24 28 and 32 These terminals which are marked GND are for shield termination if desired Power Source Wiring For block power connect an appropriate power source to terminals 6 and 7 For AC block power connect the source to the H terminal and neutral to the N terminal For DC block power connect the source to the DC terminal and the return to the DC terminal Self powered or externally powered transmitters are wired differently from those powered by the block Wiring for I O Devices Typical wiring for various configurations is shown at right Connection of an optional Bus Switching Module is also shown Connecting a Bus Switching Module to a CSI Block When a Bus Switching Module is installed connect the BSM control wires to terminals 8 and 9 The polarity from the block is as marked the BSM is insensitive to polarity BSM V CSI CCS Chapter 13 Current source Analog 6 Input Blocks G POWER Do G Ale A778 G Q amp Q S G NS A amp 2 WIRE CIRCUIT A pu TRANSMITTER O ile 13 5 3 WIRE CIRCUIT S PWR O Q9 TRANSMITTER OUT Forum cm O 4 WIRE CIRCUIT cA A DC m Q9 G TRANSMITTER E Ber Fd p 4 WIRE CIRCUIT le 8 TRANSMITTER t r O DC DC 1 9 Ww S DC POWER SOURC
191. e block is first powered up If the Hold Last State feature is NOT enabled the block also defaults the output if CPU communications are lost On a non redundant system default occurs approximately 250mS after the third bus scan passes with no CPU communications If the block is on a redundant bus downstream of a Bus Switching Module more time is needed Additional default time for redundancy is explained on page 4 19 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 shows the Output Default State configuration of all OUTPUT DEFAULT circuits REF 00111xxx 0 the output default state is off gt tgl entr nxt 1 the output default state is on X the circuit has been configured as an input To select a circuit press F1 gt To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr o oe YS om Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Report No Load On a new block each output is configured to report No Load diagnostics This diagnostic activates a no load current level when the output is energized If the load does not continuously draw 50mA from the output circuit the block sends a NO LOAD message You should disable this diagnostic for any output where a very small load small relay transformer or indicating lamp will draw less than 50 mA Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 shows the Report No Load configuration of all circui
192. e block must be taken to remedy the problem The FAILED SWITCH message can alert personnel or cause program logic to be activated possibly shutting off power to the block I O section or process Several additional switch faults independent of the output state are detected and reported as Failed Switch faults on both input and output configured circuits Examples include loss of communications with the block s internal microprocessor and some internal power supply faults Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 8 5 6 6 Open Wire Diagnostic The block automatically performs this diagnostic on any circuit configured as a tristate input It will detect an electrical not mechanical malfunction in a circuit In addition to being configured as a tristate input the circuit must have a non inductive resistor placed as close as practical to the actual dry contacts such as across the field device terminals For the 24 48 VDC blocks IC660BBD020 and 021 a 5 1K ohm external resistor should be used For the 24 VDC blocks IC660BBD022 and 023 a 1 6K ohm external resistor should be used DC Source Block Tristate Input Thresholds Normal Thresholds Tri state Thresholds is p DC n DC A a DC 4V QN DC 7V OFF 50 50 IN 30 30 i OFF OPEN WIRE ems i DC DC d DC Sink Block Tristate Input Thresholds Normal Thresholds Tri state Thresholds a41567
193. e block must first be configured off line In general special care must be taken when adding new blocks to existing systems Always verify beforehand that the baud rate programmed for use by the new block corresponds to that of the system never mix baud rates on a single bus Preliminar y Steps Block configuration should be carefully planned and recorded on copies of the configuration worksheets provided in this manual Before block configuration starts you should already know m What each block s Device Number address on the bus should be m The beginning Reference Address for each block s I O if required for the type of CPU controlling the bus m The baud rate that will be used by the bus and all its devices m Which of the block s default features for example I O mixture Input Filter Time or Alarm Thresholds should be changed by configuration If you do not have the necessary information do not try to configure any blocks Configuration Protection AllGenius I O blocks can be configured for Configuration Protection which prevents unwanted or accidental changes On a new block Configuration Protection is disabled so the block is ready to configure for the application Removing Configuration Protection On a previously configured block it may be necessary to disable Configuration Protection to make changes Configuration Protection can only be set and removed with a Hand held Monitor it CANNOT be changed from
194. e block will be a BSM Controller attach the BSM like a load to circuit 1 Connect either BSM pigtail wire to terminal 10 and the other to an N terminal GEK 90486D 2 Block Power Make all power connections on the block to the same 120 VAC phase Different blocks can have different phases between them 2841546 BLOCK 115 VAC BLOCK 2 115 VAC PHASE 1 PHASE 2 INPUT i INPUT DEVICE DEVICE OUTPUT OUTPUT N N DEVICE DEVICE Block Power Disconnects Since block power is the same as circuit power it is important to wire block power disconnects so that block power and input power will be removed at the same time POWER DISCONNECT AC BLOCK 244466 YES NO If input power is not removed when block power is removed the block may power up when multiple inputs are activated even though one leg of power has been removed from the block GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 4 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks 4 9 BlockConfiguration 4 10 Configurable features are listed below For many the factory setting may not need to be changed Feature Circuit Factory Selections or Block Setting Device Number Block null 0 to 31 a number must be selected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type BlockI OType Block input input output combination Baud Rate Block 153 6std 153 6 std 153 6 ext 76 8 38 4 Kbd Pulse
195. e is not sent to the HHM or the CPU Instead the block will report values that indicate whether the input signal exceeds either of its alarm levels Additional configurable features include Selectable Input Filter Time up to 1024mS Output powerup defaults Output Hold Last State or default CPU Redundancy Block diagnostics are performed automatically Input Low Alarm and High Alarm detection Open Wire detection Input Underrange or Overrange Output Underrange or Overrange GEK 90486D 2 244487 3 Ao quo GENIUS Analog In Out 115V 50 60Hz reves 30 n GE Fanuc SEEE gaS no uw z I PIAS papgeug on NH l NLY M 1 pandu pandui dP WOO QNO dr ON andul z ndul MH OMI NH M gandul ndui 4WP AOD INS Jn indui QUA i NI M indu 1 WOO NE I oA 1 ino VBOLC OSV OGV POS YVP YOVGP A V OV OSOOSSGOSOSGS TET CITT COTE TET OA l zindino endo 50mS Pt Max Compatibility These blocks are compatible with all Genius bus controllers PCIM and QBIM modules Any Genius Hand held Monitor can be used For a Series Six PLC the CPU must be rev 105 or later For a Series Six Plus rev 110 or later is required The programming software must be Logicmaster Six rel 4 02 or later For a Series Five PLC the CPU
196. ecessary from the cable wires The maximum exposed length of bare wires should be two inches For added protection each shield drain wire should be insulated with spaghetti tubing to prevent the Shield In and Shield Out wires from touching each other GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 2 Installation 2 3 2 4 Prefabricated Cables For applications using Belden 9182 cable only prefabricated cables in 15 IC660BLC001 and 36 IC660BLC003 lengths are available These cables terminate in mating connectors that simplify wiring between I O blocks Ca ee LNO AHS NI GHS zaas uas Tp SHD SHD SER SER OUT N 2 1 Terminating the Bus at an I O Block For devices on either end of the bus install the appropriate terminating resistor across the Serial 1 and Serial 2 terminals Impedance will be 75 100 120 or 150 ohms 150 ohm IC660BLM506 and 75 ohm IC660BLM508 resistor plugs can be ordered If blocks are connected using the prefabricated cables described above attach the cable to the first or the last block to exit toward the top of the block A 150 ohm terminating plug should then be installed across Serial 1 and Serial 2 1 S2 SHLD IN SHLD OUT VN Na Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Bus Connections for Critical Processes
197. ed in a redundant bus cable system Additionalconfigurablefeaturesinclude Circuitscalingtoengineering units values m CPUredundancy m Inputconversiontime Faultreporting can be enabled or disabled circuit by circuit Theseblocksautomatically perform the following diagnosticchecks m Inputlow and high alarms Inputoverrangeand underrange Inputcurrentbelow2mA Compatibility Current source Analog Input blocks require a phase B Hand held Monitor IC660HHM501H version 4 5 or later forconfiguration For a Series 90 70 PLC the programming software must be version 3 0 or later Genius bus controller IC697BEM731Cor laterisrequired GEK 90486D 2 Current source Analog 6 Input Blocks 1 D a45139 qv LIO Ace Ape 2 GENIUS 2i R m Current Source _u Analog Input TOL 3 Rg 4 48 voc ao IP 2 v 7A Max IL u GE Fanuc TU SIE i A E 85 Inputs 24VDC Ql re GND mo H o N S BSM lt I Bm x EXC x112 IN Z Be com Io GND s 4 o EXC z Be IN EN allo COM 4 EXC Bie INE 3 Be com m Blle GND 4 o EXC Bio IN Z 3 Elle com MIO GND g EXC FE IN JE 3 IIo com a MIO GND Hio EXC Be n Z 3 Ho cod GND x dier For a Series Six PLC the CPU must be rev 105 or later For a Series Six Plus PLC rev 110
198. ed outputs 115VAC 230WVC Relay Output Block Normal ly Open 24VDC SourceI O Block 16 Circuit 16I Oconfigurable chapter 8 24 48 VDCSourceI OBlock 16Circuit 24VDC Sink I O Block 16 Circuit 24 48 VDCSinkI OBlock 16Circuit 12 24VDCSourcel OBlock 32 Circuit 32 1 Oconfigurable chapter9 5 12 24VDCSinkI OBlock32Circuit 115 VAC 125VDCAnalogI OBlock 4 inputs 2 outputs chapter 10 24 48VDCAnalogI OBlock 115 VAC 125VDCCurrent source AnalogI O 4inputs 2 outputs chapter 11 Block 24 48VDCCurrent source Analog I O Block 115VAC 125VDCurrent source Output Block 6 outputs chapter 12 24 48VDCurrent source Output Block 115VAC 125VDCCurrent source Input Block 6inputs chapter 13 24 48VDCurrent source Input Block 115 VAC 125VDCRTD Input Block 6 RTDinputs chapter 14 24 48VDCRTD Input Block 115 VAC 125VDCThermocouple Input Block 6t couple inputs chapter 15 24 48VDCThermocouple Input Block High speed Counter Configurablecount High speed Counter User s einputs modes Manual GFK 0415 PowerTRAC Block Inputs from 1 3 PTs PowerTRAC Block User s 1 3 CTs Manual GFK 0450 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 3 Locations for Genius I O Blocks Unlike conventional rack mounted I O modules Genius I O blocks can be installed virtually anywhere up to 7500 feet from the PLC or computer They can be mounted on equipment in junction boxes inside panels behind operator stations and in other locations where space is limited Blocks sh
199. eering units 4095 4095counts counts Low HighAlarms Circuit 10 000 82 767 Alam Input Mode Circuit no yes no BSM Present Block no yes no Output Default Time Block 3bus scans for bus redundancy 2 5 or 10 seconds RedundancyMode Block none none standby Features marked with an asterisk in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Before configuration begins the block s features should be decided on and recorded on a copy of the Configuration Worksheet printed on the next page 10 6 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Voltage Current 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N Block Number 0 31 Reference Address through Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Redundancy Features Redundancy Mode None Standby BSM Present Y N Outputs Default 2 5 10 sec Circuit Features Input Circuits Output Circuits 1 2 3 4 5 6 References From To Report Faults Y N Range Selection 10 to 10 volts 0 to 10 volts 0 to 5 volts 4mA to 20mA 5 to 5 volts Scaling Points Low Pt eng units
200. efrequency Range Overrangecapacity Diagnostics Load Thermal drift from 25 C 0 15 of full scale reading 61A 25mS lt 4mA to 20mA OmA to24mA Underrange Overrange Feedbackerror 0 ohms to 850 ohms currentapplication Oto 10mA 0 to 5 volt application Oto 10mA 0 to 20 volt maximum voltage application 35 PPM per C typical Environmental Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Vibration OC to 60C 32F to 140F 40C to 100C 40F to 212F 5 to 95 non condensing 5 10 Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200 Hz at 1G 12 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 GEK 90486D 2 Block Operation The block has six independent output circuits which are electrically common to each other and the Bus Switching Module outputs but isolated from all other circuits on the block Power for the outputs current loops is provided by the block Output Circuits Output channels use a dual 12 bit digital to analog converter and can independently control currents from 0mA to 24mA A diagram of the output circuits is shown below 244492 15VDC BSM BSM Switch 15VDC e i oo O BSM Opto Channels 1 4 Processor amp Isol Current Ra
201. el 4 bits 8 15 8 Input channel 5 bits 0 7 9 Input channel 5 bits 8 15 10 Input channel 6 bits 0 7 11 Input channel 6 bits 8 15 Except as noted on the next page temperature data from an RTD block is never overwritten due to the presence of a fault condition The data continues to change after a fault condition has been detected Hand held Monitor Input Display The Hand held Monitor displays the configured unit values The following example shows the Monitor Block screen with configured units of tenths of degrees C REF 97 120 I I1 150 0 C I2 25 5 C gt 14 4 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Diagnostics Input Shorted Internal Fault Wiring Error Open Wire Overrange Underrange Low Alarm High Alarm GEK 90486D 2 Circuit diagnostics for RID Input blocks are listed below Active circuits can be configured not to send diagnostic messages to the CPU if a fault occurs However such circuits still respond to faults and report them to the Hand held Monitor If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using a Read Diagnostic datagram the block returns current diagnostics for all active circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled It will not return diagnostics from inactive circuits Itis necesssary to clear any fault that occurs to re enable detection of that particular fault For example af
202. emperature ED PLC references required B 1 pulse test 4 12 report faults to CPU 4 14 short circuit diagnostic short circuit level specifications tristate inputs tristate inputs for 4 6 wiring instructions 4 8 115 VAC 125 VDC 8 Circuit IsolatedI O Blocks BSM controller catalog numbers compatibility configurable features and defaults 5 12 configuration worksheet CPU redundancy diagnostics 5 6 Index 3 Index Index 4 dimensions 16 2 duplex default state failed switch diagnostic 5 7 features heat generation input filter time 5 15 inputs LEDs LEDs flash at startup 18 2 loss of I O power diag ostic 5 6 no load diagnostic open wire diagnostic operation b4 output overload AC output overload DC outputs 5 4 outputs default states outputs default time outputs hold last state 5 18 54 5 PLC references required power connections pulse test report faults to CPU 5 17 report no load short circuit short circuit diag ostic 5 6 specifications tristate inputs voltage selection wiring instructions Open Wire diagnostic Seeindividual block listings Ordering information A 1 See also Genius I O System and Commu nications User s Manual Outputs See also individual block listings feedback not received from CPU 18 3 selecting BlockI O Type B 10 Overload diagnostic Seeindividu
203. en testing off on off operation certain devices may require the addition of a flyback diode directly across the load coil to increase the dropout time 2 The minimum pickup delay is greater than 16mS and the dropout delay is greater than 5mS Devices that have slow or delayed operation may be unsuitable because they will ride through the maximum width pulses 3 Therise time of current in the load at normal voltage allows the peak current to reach the threshold in less time than the device delay as well as less than the 16mS maximum pulse width The load current must reach 50mA before the contacts switch If necessary the load current can be increased by adding a resistor load across the coil and the device end of the wiring This will permit testing of wiring continuity but it may not detect an open coil B If No Load detection is NOT enabled the minimum pickup or dropout delay is greater than 5mS GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 8 13 Input Filter Time An input filter time of 5mS to 100mS can be selected for the block The default filter time is 20mS The block continuously samples an input for the length of the filter time period If the input remains either on or off for the length of the Filter Time the block recognizes its state For example 242504 OFF gt ON gt STATE bi 20mS gt SIGNAL Sampled Inputs Sampled Inputs Sampled Inputs ON for 5mS ON for 30mS O
204. ent on an output exceeds 10 amps at turn on the block turns the output off within microseconds The block will try to restart the load if two attempts are unsuccessful the output circuit is forced off and the block sends a SHORT CIRCUIT message To restore normal operation to output the cause of the current surge must be removed then the diagnostic must be cleared from the HHM or the CPU This diagnostic detects shorts across the load only Also systems with floating power supplies do not detect shorts of I O points to ground because there is no return current path Systems with power supplies grounded on the negative side detect grounded output points either as Failed Switch sink blocks of Short Circuit source blocks Partial high resistance shorts may not draw enough current during a Pulse Test to be detected by the Pulse Test Failed Switch Diagnostic The block automatically monitors all circuits for several types of faults which may be reported as Failed Switch diagnostics For an output Failed Switch is reported if the circuit s switch state is not the same as its commanded state The block sends a FAILED SWITCH message identifying the failed circuit The logic state of the circuit is set to OFE When an output fault occurs the actual condition of the output switch is not known If the output switch has failed shorted or closed current flow is not interrupted when the block forces the output state OFF Action external to th
205. equation V is the bias level Vin Vsource V with the sensor on and V with the sensor off must be calculated R is the total resistance in the external circuit in K ohms If the resistors are already in the circuit actual V can be found using a voltmeter Rp x Rinput RT Rs Rp Rinput R input iS the equivalent resistance of the sensor This value of R input will be different in the on state and off state of the sensor Rinput will not typically be readily available from the sensor manufacturer a42510 Vin V V source Calculating Resistor Values when V is Known 6 8 If V in the On state and V 96 in the Off state are known resistor values can be found with the following equation 545 2 V x 545 2 V96 x 58 6 11 6 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s M anual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Field Wiring Terminals 5 32 are for field devices They take Block Power Disconnects asingle wire up to AWG 14 Minimum recommended size is AWG 20 Since block power is the same as circuit power it is important to wire block power disconnects so that block power and input power will be removed at the same time Power Source Wiring Connect the hot side of a 115 VAC source to an AC 844466 H terminal and the neutral to an N terminal Block Yes No The power supply should not be fused higher O H than 5 amps Load Caution
206. er 14 RTD 6 Input Blocks 14 11 RTD Resistance This entry specifies the nominal resistance at 0C in tenths of ohms of the RTD connected to each input The default RTD Resistance depends on which type of Linearization is configured for that circuit Linearization Selection Default RTD Resistance Platinum 100 0 Nickel 100 0 Q Copper 10 0 Q RID Resistance can be reconfigured to a value between 5 09 and 2000 00 RTD Resistance specifications are available from the RTD manufacturer or may be determined by actual measurement RTD Resistance can also be calculated as explained on the next page RTD Resistance must be calculated if the selection for Linearization is Linear Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 shows the RTD Resistance for the first RTD RTD RESISTANCE IN1 97 120A 1 To change the RTD Resistance type for the RTD currently displayed press F2 chng From the Hand held Monitor RTD Resistance is entered as ohms and tenths of ohms OHMS 100 0 92 00 gt chng nxt When configuring the block from the CPU RTD Resistance is entered in tenths of ohms for this example 920 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr 3 To select another RTD press F1 gt 4 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Adjusting RTD Resistance For greater measurement accuracy you can adjust the RTD Resistance value to produce a temperature
207. er line that supplies the inputs No separate Ex 2 block power supply is needed o 3H HIIo fe Features IHRE SIT ER The block provides s 2 fe m Separate On Off thresholds for each group of Gre 2 8inputs On Off thresholds are configurable S 2 from 25 to 85 of the incoming line voltage E c Pa E allowing the use of a wide variety of input Da zd sensors So lee Glo ela m Optional Open Wire detection is selectable Eee for individualinputs The Open Off NES PR am a threshold is configurable from 25 to 85 of NSS the incoming line voltage m Separate Open Off thresholds can be selected Compati bi Ity for each group of 8 inputs Optional Short Circuit detection at 10 and 90 of the A 115VAC 16 Circuit Input block is designed for incoming line voltage can be selected for use with Hand held Monitor version individualinputs IC660HHM501 only It is not compatible with version IC660HHM500 Fault reporting can be enabled or disabled circuit by circuit Block LEDs verify proper block The block can be used with any GE Fanuc Genius operation and CPU communications bus controller It may also be used with any PCIM or OBIM module GEK 90486 2 6 1 L5 Specifications Block Type 16circuits inputs only CatalogNumbers 115VAC 16 Circuit Input Block IC660BBD110 Terminal Assembly Only IC660TBD110 Electronics Assembly Only IC660EBD110 Size height x width x depth 8 83 22 44cm x3 50 8 89cm x3 94 10 00
208. er registers first Circuit 1 in Register n etc Analog Inputs are multiplexed into the Series Six Input Table updated at the rate of one channel per PLC sweep The channel reading is located in I n n 15 and the channel number in the next byte up I n 16 n 18 The Read Analog Inputs DPREQ WINDOW command may be used to move all input data simultaneously into registers designated by the command AQ data located in AQn and AQn 1 References AQn 2 and AQn 3 are not used B 1 Appendix Non Incendive Field Wiring C This appendix consists of two drawings illustrating non incendive field wiring for the following Genius blocks m 24 48VDCThermocouple Inputs Block IC660BBA023 m 115 VAC 125 VDC VDC Thermocouple Inputs Block IC660BBA103 m 24 48VDCCurrent source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Block IC660BBA024 m 115 VAC 125VDCCurrent source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Block IC660BBA104 This wiring meets Factory Mutual requirements for use in Class 1 Division 2 Group A B C and D hazardous locations GEK 90486D 2 C 1
209. eries Six PLC the CPU must be rev 105 or later hoe For a Series Six Plus PLC rev 110 or later is required Co m p ati b l ity The programming software mustbe Logicmaster 6 rel 4 02 or later These blocks are compatible with PCIM and QBIM For a Series Five PLC the CPU must be rev 3 0 or later modules Hand held Monitor IC660HHM501D version s The Logicmaster 5 programming software must be rel 3 5 or later is required 2 01or later GEK 90486D 2 14 1 14 2 Specifications Block Type 6 RTD compatible inputs 3 isolated groups of 2 CatalogNumbers 115 VAC 125VDCRTD Block IC660BBA101 Terminal Assembly Only IC660TBA101 Electronics Assembly Only IC660EBA101 24 48VDCRTD Block IC660BBA021 Terminal Assembly Only IC660TBA021 Electronics AssemblyOnly IC660EBA021 LEDs I O Block UnitOK I OEnabled Size height x width x depth 8 83 22 44cm x 3 50 8 89cm x3 94 10 00cm Weight 4 Ibs 1 8 kg HeatDissipation 7Wmaximum Block to Block Isolation 1500 V Group to GroupIsolation 300 V 115VAC 125 VDC block power 115 VAC 125 VDC Power supply voltage 93 132 VAC 7W 105 145 VDC 7W 47 63 Hz 10 max ripple Power supply dropout time 1cycle 10mS 24 48 VDC block power Powersupply voltage 18 56 VDC 7W 10 max ripple Power supply dropout time 10mS InputCharacteristics Inputresolution 01 C Absolute accuracy at 25C Platinum or Nickel 10Q Copper Input update frequency Input filter range
210. ertemperature fault GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 4 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks 4 7 Field Wiring Field wiring connections are standard screw clamp type terminals which can be operated with a flat or phillips head screwdriver Each terminal accepts one AWG 12 or two AWG 14 wires The minimum recommended wire size is AWG 22 The terminals can accommodate spade or ring terminals up to 0 27 inch 6 85 mm in width with a minimum opening for a 6 screw and up to 0 20 inch 5 1 mm depth from the screw center to the back barrier Be sure unshielded wire ends are not longer than 2 inches 5 cm OUTPUT SIGNAL 840642 HOT NOT USED 10 17 NEUTRAL o ON TYPICAL OUTPUT 5 DEVICE WIRING EL Ee EE SERIAL 1 INPUT SIGNAL 1 o 10 17 2 SERIAL 2 O O O OH NEUTRAL NOT USED 3 SHIELD IN TYPICAL INPUT DEVICE WIRING 4 SHIELD OUT 5 e B 3 7 B 8 9 B N pj DEVICE 1 10 6 N e pj DEVICE 2 1109 en n pj DEVICE 3 12 9 AC H N pevice 4 13 POWER Li o SOURCE JN pj DEVICE 5 14 6 en DEVICE 6 15 8 N H DEVICE 7 16 D en H DEVICE 8 17 BN oN
211. es between 32 767 engineering units For a new Current source Analog block the default Alarm Thresholds are 0 low and 425000 high Typically Alarm Thresholds are set at levels beyond which the input should not operate or levels beyond which alternate processing is required Because Alarm Thresholds are engineering units values if scaling is changed Alarm Thresholds should be reviewed and adjusted if necessary Alarm Thresholds can also be changed by the ladder logic program in the CPU If an input reached its high alarm a new limit could be set This could generate a high high alarm or an alarm cleared threshold Two examples are described on page 10 18 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the low and high Alarm Thresholds for the ALARM 97 block s first input Il LOW I1 HI 32767 32767 gt chng nxt 2 To select the next circuit press F1 gt to move the cursor from L O W to H I then press F1 gt again 3 To change the threshold shown at the cursor location press F2 chng 4 To save the new selection press F3 entr 5 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display 11 14 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Output Feedback Testing After the Feedback Time see below period has elapsed the block compares feedback from each output to its output value received from the CPU If these va
212. es the electronics Mean Time Between Failures by a factor of two Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Block Operation A Genius I O block is an intelligent module that sends and receives messages on a communications bus The devices on the bus pass an implicit token which rotates among the devices in sequence from device 0 to device 31 This sequence is called a bus scan Bus i ecececece eee ee ee 2 7 Controller Token Path x e o o o o o o o o o o ooo Device 31 NEN 1 2 3 30 A block can send m Input data if the block has inputs m Diagnostic fault reports A block can receive m Output data from the CPU m Commands from the CPU and Hand held Monitor Inputs A block with inputs continuously monitors data from its input devices and updates the corresponding data When the block receives the bus token it broadcasts ALL its current input data The bus controller stores this data making it available to the CPU Even blocks with no inputs put out a message when they get the token to notify the bus controller that they are present and on line Bus Inputs from Block 4 Controller e token GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 5 Outputs Diagnostics 1 6 Asthe application program executes the CPU sends outputs and any commands to the bu
213. ess F2 tgl BSM PRESENT REF 97 STATUS 128A 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr YES 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt BSM Controller A BSM Controller is a block to which a Bus Switching Module is directly attached which controls the BSM s switching action For a new block the default is NO Change it only if the block will be used as a BSM Controller To change this configuration with a Hand held Monitor the block must first be configured for BSM PRESENT The BSM CONTROLLER menu will not appear if BSM PRESENT is set to NO Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM CONTROLLER REF 97 STATUS 128A 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr NO 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt 12 14 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Output Default Time When a Bus Switching Module is used the Output Default Time must be long enough to allow the BSM to switch without causing outputs to default Therefore when BSM Present is selected above the block automatically changes its Output Default Time from 3 bus scans to 2 5 seconds If Hold Last State was selected the block will hold outputs at their last value while the BSM switches instead of defaulting so there is no need to change this
214. ess F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr QW ue 99 I Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 10 Voltage Current 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks 10 19 Output Default Value An output goes to its powerup default value when the block is first powered up For a new block the output default value for each output is 0 If Hold Last State is NOT enabled the block will also default the output if CPU communications are lost On a non redundant system this occurs approximately 250m6 after the third bus scan passes with no CPU communications If the block is on a redundant bus downstream of a Bus Switching Module more time is needed Additional default time for redundancy is explained on page 10 21 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 shows the default value of the block s first output 1 To select the other output press F1 gt OUTPUT DEFAULT OUT1 97 112 0 2 To change a default press F2 chng then enter the new value DEFAULT 0 3 To save the new value press F3 entr gt chng nxt 4 When you are ready to advance to the next configuration screen press F4 next 10 20 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 BSM Present If the block is connected to a single bus or to just one trunk of a dual bus BSM Present should be set to NO Select YES if the block is located in a cluster conne
215. ew selection CELSIUS press F3 entr tgl entr nxt 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display 14 10 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Linearization The block converts the resistance from an RTD into degrees according to the type of Linearization selected for the circuit The default Linearization type is platinum Copper nickel or linear configured for RTDs that do not conform to the DIN 43760 standard may also be selected If platinum or nickel is configured the block linearizes the input according to the DIN 43760 standard If copper or linear is configured the block linearizes the input using a straight line approximation based on the RTD resistance and Alpha type If copper or linear is selected the block converts resistance to temperature based on the entries made for RTD Resistance and Alpha using this equation RTD Resistance at TC R TD Resistance at OC Measured Temp TC RTD Resistance at OC x Alpha Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the current selection for the first RTD To change LINEARIZATION the Linearization type for the RTD currently displayed press F2 IN1 97 1201 tgl PLATINUM To save the new selection press F3 entr gt tgl entr nxt 3 To select another circuit press F1 gt 4 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapt
216. f I O blocks within the enclosure 2 Estimate the I O mix and duty cycle of each block unused circuits should be considered inputs with 0 duty cycle As an example if there were two outputs driving a solenoid valve open and closed one of which must be energized at all times both might be on for one or two AC cycles while the system switched from one state to another An insignificant amount of heat would be generated while both were on For temperature estimating they should be thought of as one output on for 10076 of the time however for AC power loads and circuit breaker selection they could be thought of as two loads that would draw a larger than normal current during switchover 3 Use the table on the next page to estimate heat dissipation for each block Begin with the Watts per block Multiply the number of outputs by the additional number of Watts for each output circuit Multiply the number of inputs by the additional number of Watts per input circuit Add the total number of Watts for the block for outputs and for inputs This number represents the number of Watts of dissipated heat when outputs conduct full current at 100 duty cycle 4 Add the estimated heat from each block to that generated by other electronics in the enclosure Remember that most of the heat will be generated by field devices connected to the I O blocks not by the I O blocks themselves GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 16 Sizing Enclosures 16 3 16 4 Watts
217. f Switch lt Configured To From Asian Output ZN Other Output Device 3 3K Circuits z O l lt e p DC DC 39V Zener Diode 32 Circuit DC Sink I O Block A32 Circuit DC Sink I O Block has all output devices externally connected to the positive side of the power supply Inputs control the negative side of the power supply For outputs an ON condition is logic 0 and an OFF condition is a logic 1 When outputs in a sink type block are connected to inputs in a sink type block a logic 1 command to the output will turn the output ON and produce a logic 1 to the PLC 242315 DC yi O gt e pc Configured ALF To From n Output H i Other Device 3 3K estt Output i Circuits vO Smart gt Q switch A T Control Configured Input Logic as an Device Input M Deeg gt e gt oc Field Terminal Electronics Connections Assembly Assembly 89V Zener Diode Circuit LEDs Each circuit has its own LED If the circuit is configured as an input the LED indicates the presence of threshold voltage at the input terminal If the circuit is configured as an output the LED indicates the actual state of the load GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 9 32 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 9 3 L9 Inputs and Outputs The block can be configured as an inputs only outputs only or combination block Regardless the block always sends 4 bytes of data each bus scan and ac
218. f the signal ensuring that they will never be activated A circuit is expected to report engineering unit values of 20 ft sec 6 m sec to 180 ft sec 50 m sec The high alarm is set at 150 ft sec 40 m sec and the low alarm at 25 ft sec 7 5m sec If an input reached its high alarm a new threshold could be set This could generate a high high alarm or an alarm cleared threshold AnAlarm Threshold is set at 150 ft sec Upon receiving an alarm message the CPU changes the Alarm Threshold to 165 ft sec by using a Write Configuration command and sends the appropriate Clear Circuit Fault command No alarm message is sent upon changing the threshold unless the speed is greater than 165 ft sec If the speed is only 157 ft sec but increasing a second message would be sent at 165 ft sec Since these two diagnostic messages are the same it would be necessary for the program to keep track of the level of the Alarm Thresholds and recognize this as a higher alarm than that received initially At the same time it could move the low alarm to 140 ft sec and use this level to detect the end of the high alarm conditions Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 first displays the low and high Alarm Thresholds for the block s first input 1 To select the next circuit press F1 gt to move the cursor from ALARM INPUT 97 LOW to HI then press F1 gt again Il LOW I1 HI 10000 10000 gt chg 2 Tochange the threshold shown
219. ference pee eee 2 T th d select a circuit f fi ti YYYYYY To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press F1 gt gt tgl entr nxt 3 To change a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Channel Active Used to disable fault detection for a channel that is not wired or from which no diagnostics should be reported If enabled the block will continue to report input data but will perform no fault detection on the input channels The Unit OK LED will not indicate faults for inactive channels Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 shows the current Channel Active configuration of each CH I I Y Y gt tgl entr nxt ACTIVE 97 circuit circuits are shown on line 2 for reference I I II YYYY 2 To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press F1 gt 3 To change a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection 15 10 press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Units The block can be configured to report data as engineering units or as unconverted counts If units of Celsius Fahrenheit or millivolts are selected the block will automatically calibrate and convert input data into engineering units
220. for tristate inputs m Detection of loss of I O power on pairs of circuits Overload Detection and Shutdown m No Load Detection 5 1 Specifications Block Type 115VAC 125VDCIsolatedI OBlock Terminal Assembly Only Electronics Assembly Only 115VAC 125VDCIsolatedI OBlock NoFailed Switch Terminal Assembly Only Electronics Assembly Only 8cktisolated input outputin 4 isolated pairs IC660BBS102 replaces IC660BBS100 IC660TSS100 IC660EBS100 IC660BBS103 replaces IC660BBS101 IC660TSS100 IC660EBS101 Size height x width x depth 8 83 22 44cm x 3 50 8 89cm x 3 94 x 10 00cm Weight 4 lbs 1 8 kg LED s I O Block UnitOK I OEnabled LED s each circuit On logic side of switch Block to Block Isolation 1500V HeatDissipation 16 8W max with 8 inputs on 45 6W max with 8 outputs at 2 amps Operating Temperature 0 to 60C 32 to 140F Storage Temperature 40 C 40 to 212F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration 5 10 Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200 Hz at 1G Required control power block only 8 Wattsmaximum Operating voltage four sources 93 132 VAC 105 132 VDC Frequency ripple 47 63 Hz 10 max ripple Power supply dropout time 1cycle 10mS Input Characteristics For AC For DC Non tristate input OFF state Minimum voltage across input device IN to H 60 VRMS 70 VDC Maximum leakage through input device 1mA 2mA Non tristate input ON state Maximum voltag
221. g recommendations for adding suppression at the point where the bus enters a building Note MOVs do a good job of absorbing transients on communications control and power lines provided the total energy of those transients does not exceed the rating of the device If the energy of the transient exceeds the rating of the device the MOV may be either damaged or destroyed This failure may not be visibly or electrically evident MOVS should be regularly inspected for signs of damage to assure continued protection against transients For some applications periodic replacement of critical MOVs even if they do not show signs of damage is recommended GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 2 Installation 2 7 Suppression at the Power Line Power line transients can affect any Genius block that has separate power inputs such as AC Isolated blocks and low level analog blocks Protection can be provided by connecting MOVs across the power lines for instance between Hot and Neutral and from line to frame ground safety ground This triangular configuration requires three MOVs for each long power feed If the total power feed length is about 100 feet or less one set of MOVs should be sufficient for any number of blocks For a group of blocks installed in an enclosure the MOVs can be installed at the point where the power lines enter the enclosure Ideally MOVs should be used at each cabinet in the system for maximum protection The following illustration
222. gl To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Output Default Value Outputs always go to their default values when the block is first powered up For a new block the output default value is 4000 If Hold Last State was NOT enabled the block will also default the output if CPU communications are lost On a non redundant system this occurs approximately 250m6 after the third bus scan passes with no CPU communications If the block is on a redundant bus downstream of a Bus Switching Module additional time is needed to accommodate switching of the BSM see Output Default Time on page 12 15 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen first displays the default value of the block s first OUTPUT DEFAULT output To select an output press F1 gt OUT1 97 1200 DEFAULT 0 2 ME a default value press F2 chng then enter the new gt chng nxt 3 To save the new default press F3 entr Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 12 Current source Analog 6 Output Blocks 12 13 BSM Present If the block is connected to a single bus or to just one trunk of a dual bus BSM Present should be set to NO Select YES of the block is located in a cluster connected to dual busses via a Bus Switching Module Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration pr
223. h a configuration 115VAC 125VDC Isolated I O Block version IC660BBS101 no Failed Switch diagnostic should be used instead Several additional switch faults independent of the output state are detected and reported as Failed Switch faults on both input and output configured circuits Examples include loss of communications with the block s internal microprocessor and some internal power supply faults GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 4 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks 4 5 4 6 Open Wire Diagnostic The block automatically performs this diagnostic on any circuit configured as a tristate input It will detect an electrical not mechanical malfunction In addition to being configured as a tristate input the circuit must have a 5 1K ohm 1 2 Watt or larger non inductive resistor placed as close as possible to the actual dry contacts such as across the field device terminals Normal Thresholds Tri state Thresholds 841547 H H 95 N e E Hav z H 8V OFF S 60 60 IN 40 40 OFF OPEN WIRE e N N oN With the switch closed ON state the circuit senses the low source impedance With the switch open OFF state the circuit senses the added resistance If a wire is broken cut or removed impedance becomes very high The block will transmit 0 as the state of the input and send an OPEN WIRE message Since faulty input circuit option monitoring requires specific current flows devices as photo se
224. he appropriate condition described above is found on the first try the test is complete If the condition is not found the test is repeated with successively longer pulses 2 5mS increments until successful The maximum Pulse Test time is 16 mS If this time is reached and the result is still not successful a fault message is generated The normal pulse width seen by the load is typically shorter than the maximum 16mS A With No Load detection enabled the pulses requlred may be longer due to the rise time of the load current and the load inductance Power devices such as contactors and actuators will typically encounter maximum width pulses Such devices draw moderate currents and are not affected by pulsing Low power signal relays may have low current draw high inductance coils and fast operation Such devices may have to be examined closely B With No Load detection NOT enabled a successful Pulse Test normally occurs in 4mS to 6mS The time may be slightly longer if there are capacitive loads Suitable Loads for Pulse Testing Aresistive and or inductive load is suitable for Pulse Testing if any of the following is true A If No Load detection is enabled 1 Theminimum pickup current of the load is less than the No Load threshold of the block The maximum threshold of the block is 50mA but typlcal values are 20mA to 35mA When testing on off on operation typical devices with rated currents of 75mA and up are suitable Wh
225. iguration Worksheet printed on the next page Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Current source Analog Input Blocks Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N Block Number 0 31 Reference Address through Input Conversion Time mS Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Redundancy Features BSM Present Y N BSM Controller Y N Redundancy Mode none standby Circuit Features Inputs References From To Report Faults Y N Channel Active Y N Scaling Points Low Pt eng units Low Pt uA High Pt eng units High Pt uA Low Alarm High Alarm GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 13 Current source Analog 6 Input Blocks 13 7 Report Faults to CPU Fault reports to the host can be disabled or enabled for any circuit If fault reporting is enabled the block sends a message to the host if any fault occurs on that circuit If Fault reporting is disabled the block does not send fault reports to the CPU Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the block detects faults on the circuit and takes appropriate action If a fault occurs the block s Unit OK LED blinks and a fault report is sent to a Hand held Monitor The fault condition must be corrected for proper operation
226. in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Before configuration begins the feature of each 16 Circuit DC Input Output Block should be decided upon then recorded on copies of the Configuration Worksheet printed on the next page Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 16 Circuit DC I O Blocks Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N Block Number 0 31 Block Type Input Output Combination Reference Address through Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Pulse Test Enabled Disabled Input Filter Time 5 100 mS Redundancy Features Redundancy Mode None Standby Duplex GMR Duplex Default on off BSM Present Y N J BSM Controller Y N __ Outputs Default 2 5 10 sec Circuit Features output output output output Report Hold Last Default Report Overload Ckt Reference I O Type Faults State State No Load Shutdown Number I O l yes no yes no ON OFF yes no yes no ON OAR WD o A o
227. inal for shield termination if desired This terminal is internally connected to the block chassis and to the input power safety ground terminal Additional suppression can be provided by connecting three MOVs to the block one for each pair of input points inputs 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 and 5 amp 6 are pairs For one point of each input pair connect the MOV between the RTN and SHLD terminals For example connect terminals 10 and 12 for input 1 terminals 18 and 20 for input 3 terminals 26 and 28 for input 5 shown below 25 SIG L 26 RTN 27 REF Input 5 C IA 28 SHLD 29 SG 7 30 RTN 31 REF Input 6 32 SHLD LT 7 Be sure the MOV leads do not cause shorts between any other wires Wiring for Input Devices There are 4 terminals available for each input device a SIG RTN REF and SHLD input Connect RTDs between the SIG and RTN terminals The REF input is used for lead wire compensation of a 3 wire RTD For a 3 wire RTD connect the third wire to the REF terminal For 2 wire RTDs short the REF terminal to the RTN terminal
228. ing F1 gt moves the cursor between lines Enter the engineering units value s This must be an integer For greater resolution increase the configured values by a convenient multiple such as 10 or 100 That is to measure tenths of degrees you would configure low and high engineering units values of 10x the actual measured temperature Or to measure hundredths of feet per second you would configure engineering units values of 100x the measured velocity After each entry press F3 entr Enter the associated uA value s If you are measuring the process online enter the value read from the HHM s status screen If you are measuring the process with the block offline enter the signal level obtained with an external measuring device To save the new entries for a circuit press F3 entr again Press F4 next to return to the status screen If you are using measured values set the process to a different condition Repeat the necessary steps above Press F4 nxt to return to the status screen From the status screen select F gt to select another circuit for scaling When you are finished scaling circuits press F4 nxt to configure additional block features GEK 90486D 2 Input Conversion Time Input conversion time determines the length of time required to make one analog to digital conversion on each input channel The table below shows the available conversion times and their associated resolution a
229. ing instructions S Serial Bus See Bus Serial Bus Address See Device Number Short Circuit diagnostic Seeindividual blocklistings 16 Circuit DCSink SourceI O Blocks BSM controller BSM present catalog numbers A 1 circuit I O type B 15 compatibility configurable features and defaults 8 10 configuration worksheet CPU redundancy diagnostics 8 5 dimensions duplex default state failed switch diagnostic 8 5 features 8 heat generation input filter time inputs LEDs no load diagnostic 8 7 open wire diagnostic 8 6 operation 8 3 outputs outputs default states outputs default time outputs hold last state 8 17 overload diagnostic overload shutdown overtemperature 8 PLC references required B 1 pulse test report faults to CPU B 16 report no load short circuit diag ostic 8 5 specifications 5A 8 6 Ed thresholds Index tristate inputs 8 6 wiring instructions Specifications See also individual block listings environmental noise temperature vibration Suppression 2 7 at I O points 2 8 at the communications line b 7 at the power line 2 8 on discrete output load T Terminal Assembly installing replacement 2 13 removing D 12 removing without powering down sys tem 3 Terminating resistors for bus 2 4 Thermocouple 6 Input Blocks alarm thresholds BSM controller 15 16 catalog numbers channel active co
230. ing voltage single source Frequency Powersupply dropouttime 8 5 Watts 93 132 VAC 47 63 Hz 1 cycle 16 7mS at 60Hz 20mS at 50Hz InputCharacteristics Non tristate input OFF state Minimum voltage across input device IN to H Maximum leakage through input device Non tristate input ON state Maximum voltage across input device IN to H Maximum switch current threshold istate input OFF state Acceptable voltage across input device IN to H Tristate input ON state Maximum voltage across input device IN to H Input load network Resistor to N Capacitor to H Input processing time typical Selectable input filter times Inputdiagnostics Ti H 60 VRMS 1 5mA 20 VRMS 6mA RMS 16 VRMS 40 VRMS 4VRMS 13K ohms 10 uf 2mS filter 10 to 100mS in 10mS increments Open Wire Overtemperature Failed Switch OutputCharacteristics Circuit output current steady state 2amps RMS Maximum inrush current up to 2 cycles 25 amps peak Maximum inrush current 2 6 cycles 14amps peak Maximum block output current 15 amps at 35C 7 5 amps at 60C Output Leakage 115 VAC Current at 0 volt output OUT to N 7mA Voltage at open output OUT to N 65 volts Output switch OFF to ON ON to OFF Zerocrossing Maximumswitching frequency Once per second high inrush currents Turn on delay maximum 0 5 Hz 1mS Voltage drop at 2 amps 2 5 volts Voltage drop at 30 amps inrush 10 volts Recommended min lo
231. ion program Use this screen to configure 1 Theblock s Device Number serial bus address 2 The beginning CPU Reference Address for the block s I O data This is not entered if the controller is a PCIM OBIM or GENI 3 For discrete blocks with configurable I O the Block I O Type After completing this screen select the next screen to configure the block s baud rate Continue with the instructions on the following pages GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 3 Configuration 3 7 Device Number The first step in configuring a new block is to assign its Device Number This is a number from 0 to 31 representing the serial bus address of the device There are 32 available addresses on a serial bus One is needed for the Hand held Monitor typically this is device number 0 Another is needed for the bus interface module Typically this is device number 31 I O blocks are usually assigned device numbers 1 30 When shipped from the factory an illegal Device Number is assigned This means that a legal number must be assigned before doing anything else Duplicate Device Numbers disrupt communications and are not permitted Bus Controller Device 31 1 i 1 1 1 30 29 28 27 26 T i T T 1 1 1 1 1 5 21 22 23 24 25 i J T J i Hand held Monitor T 20 19 2 1 Configuration Steps 1 Press F2
232. is INPUT FILTR TIME time should be changed press F2 tgl to display other times REF FILTER 10ms 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr tgl entr nxt 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks 5 15 Isolated Voltage Selection Select whether the block s I O circuits will use 115 VAC or 125 VDC All I O circuits on the block must use the same type of power it does not have to be the same as block power Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps l Line 3 shows the currently selected voltage ISOL VOLTAGE SEL REF 2 To change the current selection press F2 tgl Press F3 enter 115 VOLTS AC 9 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt l O Circuit Type Anearlier configuration step selected the Block I O type on the Program Block ID screen That step determined whether the block would be assigned all input references all output references or both On the screen shown below the I O type of each circuit can be specified If the Block I O Type is Combination each circuit can be configured as an input I an output O or a tristate input Ij Select Tristate Input for any input circuit that should report the Open Wire diagnostic If the Block I O Type is Input each circuit can be either a regular input I or a tristate input Ir Select Tristate Input for any input cir
233. itches instead of defaulting so there is no need to change this selection If Hold Last State was set to NO for any output on a block and total bus scan time will exceed 100mS change this selection to 10 seconds Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl OUTPUT DEF TIME REF 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr TIME 2 5 SECS 9 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt CPU Redundancy The block can be configured for No Controller redundancy Hot Standby or Duplex redundancy or Genius Modular Redundancy GMR For new blocks No Controller Redundancy is selected In Hot Standby mode a block receives output data from both CPUs but uses the data from only one of them to drive its outputs The block prefers outputs sent by the bus interface module Bus Controller or PCIM with Device Number 31 If those outputs are not available the block will use outputs from the bus interface module with Device Number 30 If no outputs from a CPU are available outputs will either Hold Last State or go to their defaults In Duplex redundancy mode the block compares outputs received from two CPUs and sets any outputs for which there is disagreement to their Duplex Default state Select GMR mode only for blocks that will be part of a Genius Modular Redundancy system as described in the GMR User s Manual Do not try to configure a block for
234. ith tristate inputs the minimum recommended Input Filter Time is 50mS Hand held M onitor Configuration Steps INPUT FILTR TI ME REF FILTER 10mS tgl entr nxt The screen displays the selected filter time for circuits 1 8 If this is not appropriate press F2 tgl to change it To save the new selection press F3 entr 2 Press F4 next to configure the filter time for circuits 9 16 If the GEK 90486D 2 time shown is not appropriate press F2 to change it 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Chapter 6 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block Thresholds a44607 ON ON OFF pe 25 85 THRESHOLD y OFF a42506 ON OFF ON THRESHOLD od OFF OPEN OFF 4 THRESHOLD gt 2596 8596 OPEN On this block each group of eight circuits has two voltage thresholds an On Off threshold and an optional Open Off threshold On Off Threshold The On Off threshold determines when inputs are considered to be On or Off The default On Off threshold is 5096 of the incoming line voltage This threshold is suitable for most applications If necessary a different On Off threshold can be configured for each group of eight circuits The selectable range is 2596 to 8596 of incoming line voltage in 596 increments Open O ff Threshold The optional Open Off threshold is used if the Open Wire diagnostic is enabled for any input in a group Detection
235. ively high current level 15mA to 25mA over the entire voltage range That can make dropout operation opening the contacts marginal or cause the device to remain in the ON position When the device releases the increased air gap reduces the coil inductance to a low value That causes the current leakage to decrease to the nominal 10mA to 13mA range and the load voltage drops to a very low value Since the current required to pick up energize the device is usually higher than the holding current the leakage seldom causes a related device to pick up This interaction between leakage currents and load characteristics may falsely suggest that a relay is stuck for mechanical rather than electrical reasons If this happens test the device If necessary add additional load resistance across the load External Load Resistance for Coils and Lamps If added resistance is needed locate it at the load not at the I O block The added resistance should bring the total current up to 100mA For example for the General Electric CR4CA contactor the holding current is specified as 9 1VA This equates to about 79mA of load current To increase the load current to 100 mA a 4K ohm resistor would be added in parallel across the relay coil In case of doubt use a lower resistance higher wattage value Resistive loads are less critical than inductive loads The OFF state open circuit voltage of the output circuit is approximately 80 volts The voltage decreases
236. ize 0 or 1 The tie down screws can be removed to accommodate ring type connectors Note On new block the tie down screws are tightened If a block is to be moved after the tie down screws have been loosened they should be re tightened to prevent loose screws from falling into the packaging material or equipment The bus cable connects to the Serial 1 Serial 2 Shield In and Shield Out terminals terminals 1 4 Connect the Serial 1 terminal of each block to the Serial 1 terminals of the previous device and the next device Connect the Serial 2 terminal of each block to the Serial 2 terminals of the previous device and the next device Shield In of each block must be connected to Shield Out of the preceding device For the first device on the bus Shield In can be left unconnected For the last device on the bus Shield Out can be left unconnected Start End of Bus of Bus gt Terminating Terminating Resistor Resistor AAA NVS Serial 1 D H E Serial 1 Serial 2 B p D j Serial 2 Shield In i i D I D l Shield In Shield Out I I i I i i Shield Out N N N N N A Do not strip more insulation than n
237. k listings BlockI OType B 10 configuration 8 7 See also individual block descriptions Block operation 1 5 See also individual block listings Bus See also Genius I O System and Commu nications User s Manual cables 2 3 connections 2 3 prefabricated cables Fh T removable connector Bus scan 1 5 Catalog number list A 1 Circuit not recognized by CPU Circuit not working Communications bus See Bus Configuration B 1 See also individual block listing copying from another block error messages on HHM main menu on HHM overview setting up a Blok offline 5 3 terminating resistor needed for B 3 Configuration data formats See Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual Configuration Protection Configuration Worksheets See also individual block listings Current source 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks alarm thresholds 11 6 124 BSM controller 11 17 BSM present feed catalog numbers A 1 channel active compatibility Current source 6 Ou Index configurable features and defaults 11 8 configuration worksheet CPU redundanc diagnostics dimensions features feedback time 11 15 heat generation input conversion time input open wire diagnostic inputs operation output default time output feedback error output feedback testing outputs 11 4 outputs default values outputs hold last state PLC references required B1 B repo
238. k will detect faults on the circuit and take appropriate actions The Unit OK LED will blink when a fault occurs and a fault report is sent to a Hand held Monitor The fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the block If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the current Fault Reports selection for all REPORT FAULTS circuits on the block On this screen REF Y t faults that the circuit YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY report faults that occur on the circuit tgl entr nxt N do not report faults 2 To select a circuit press F1 gt 3 To change the I O type of the selected circuit press F2 tgl 4 To save the new selection press F3 entr 5 After configuring circuits press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display 6 16 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Hold Last State Each output can be independently configured to either hold its last state or to go to its powerup default state if the block loses CPU communications for at least 3 bus scans For a new block Hold Last State is disabled for each output With Hold Last State disabled the block sets the output to its powerup default if CPU communications are lost If Hold Last
239. l hold outputs at their last value while the BSM switches instead of defaulting so there is no need to change this selection If Hold Last State was set to NO for either output and total bus scan time will exceed 100mS change this selection to 10 seconds Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl OUTPUT DEF TIME 128A 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr 2 5 SECS 9 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt CPU Redundancy The block can be configured for No Controller redundancy or Hot Standby redundancy For new blocks it is set for No Controller Redundancy It must be changed only if the block should be able to receive output data from two CPUs In Hot Standby mode a block receives output data from both CPUs but uses the data from only one of them to drive its outputs The block prefers outputs sent by the bus interface module Bus Controller or PCIM with Device Number 31 If those outputs are not available the block will use outputs from the bus interface module with Device Number 30 If no outputs from a CPU are available a Genius I O block s outputs will either Hold Last State or go to their predefined Output Default state Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CPU REDUNDANCY REF 97 128A 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection HOT STBY MODE 3 Press
240. l in group Connections Assembly Circuits uF 2 f o r B I o c k l C 6 6 uF for Block IC660BBS102 and 103 Circuit LEDs Each circuit has its own LED If the circuit is configured as an input the LED indicates the presence of threshold voltage at the input terminal If the circuit is configured as an output the LED indicates the state commanded by the CPU Inputs and Outputs 5 4 An Isolated Block can be configured as an inputs only outputs only or combination block For a new block the default is inputs only Regardless the block always broadcasts one byte of data each bus scan and accepts one byte of data each bus scan If the block is configured as a combination block circuits can be any mix of inputs and or outputs The block will use 8 input references and 8 output references The actual state of each output will be returned to the CPU in the corresponding input reference location The CPU can monitor the feedback state to verify after an appropriate delay that the output switching device has operated properly and that the load has the proper voltage and current applied If the block is configured as an inputs only block all circuits must be regular inputs or tristate inputs The block will use 8 input references and NO output references If the block is configured as an outputs only block all circuits must be be outputs no feedback analysis will be performed The block will use 8 output references and NO input references
241. lays the currently selected filter time If this INPUT FILTR TIME time should be changed press F2 tgl to display the other filter REF times FILTER 10mS tgl entr nxt m To save a new selection press F3 entr 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 4 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks 4 13 l O Circuit Type Selecting Block I O type on the Program Block ID screen determined whether the block would be an all inputs all outputs or combination block The I O type of each circuit is specified on the screen shown below If you haven t selected the Block I O Type and the block should be an outputs only or combination I O block see page 3 10 for instructions before continuing If the BlockI O Type selected was Combination each circuit can now be configured as an input I output O or tristate input Ir Select Tristate Input for any input circuit that should report the Open Wire diagnostic resistance must be added at the input device If the BlockI O Type is all inputs each circuit can be either an regular input I or a tristate input Ir Select Tristate Input for any input circuit that should report the Open Wire diagnostic If the BlockI O Type is all outputs each circuit must be an output O Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the I O type of each circuit To select a circuit I O CIRCUIT CFG press F1 gt REF IpIpIpI
242. load current of 9 9 mA at 115 volts H Y e D Input Internal 5V Device S 4K Vsource Voltage Grr i o e Sensing A Circuits Processor lt in z 11 6K B e N Field Terminal f Electronics Connections Assembly Assembly Circuit LEDs Each circuit has its own LED that indicates the presence of On Off threshold voltage Input Data Format A 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block broadcasts 2 bytes of input data each bus scan A ppendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Byte Description 0 Inputs 1 8 input 1 in bit 0 1 Inputs 9 16 input 9 in bit 0 The block uses 16 input references and no output references The value 1 in a bit indicates that the input is at or above its configured threshold voltage Each bank of 8 inputs can have a dif ferent On Off threshold The factory configured default On Off thresholds are 50 of the in coming line voltage The default is suitable for most applications or it can be changed within the range of 25 to 85 of the incoming voltage Hand held M onitor Input Display The HHM displays the current states of all inputs on line 4 of the M onitor Block screen Individual circuits are displayed on the M onitor Control Reference screen which also shows a circuit s fault status GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 6 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block 6 3 Optional Diagnostics 6 4 115VAC 16
243. lock would be assigned all input references all output references or both On the screen shown below the I O type of each circuit can be specified The default Block I O Type and I O Circuit Type is Input When the Block I O Type is Input all circuits must be inputs If the BlockI O Type is Output each circuit must be an output O If the Block I O Type is Combination each circuit can be configured as an input I or an output O Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the I O type of circuits 1 to 16 To select a circuit I O CIRCUIT CFG for configuration press F1 REF OOOOOIIIIIIIIIII 2 Tochange a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection F3 entr gt tgl entr nxt pissin 3 Press F4 next to display the I O circuit type of circuits 17 32 4 Press F4 next from the second screen I O circuit type screen when you are ready to advance to the next configuration screen 9 12 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 E Report Faults to CPU Fault reports to the host can be disabled or enabled for any circuit on a block If fault reporting is enabled for a circuit the block will send a message to the host if any fault occurs on that circuit If Fault reporting is disabled the block will not send fault reports to the CPU for that circuit Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the block will detect faults on
244. loutputs to chassis ground 1500 VAC Between output groups 1500 VAC Power terminals to chassis ground 1700 VDC Power terminals to outputs 1500 VAC Comms terminals to power terminals 1700 VDC Comms terminals to outputs 1500 VAC HeatDissipation 10 1 watts maximum with 16 outputs on OutputCharacteristics Maximum Output current Maximumswitching power Maximuminrush current Output OFF leakage current Maximumswitching frequency Output turn on delay maximum Output voltage range Minimumrecommendedload 2 amps per circuit 60 Watts or 125 VA 2amps per circuit 0 1mA 20cycles minute inductiveloads SmS 5V to 250V AC or 5V to 220V DC 10mA Relay Type Fixed coil moving armature Initial ContactResistance 100milliohms maximum Typical Life MaximumCurrent for Load Type Typical Life Operating Voltage Resistive Lamp Solenoid operations 250VAC 0 5A 200 000 250VAC 0 1A 0 1A 100 000 125VAC 1 0A 0 2A 0 3A 100 000 220VDC 0 3A E 100 000 110VDC 0 6A 100 000 30VDC 2 0A a E 500 000 30VDC 0 2A 0 3A 100 000 12VDC 0 3A 0 5A 100 000 Effectof AdditionalCurrent Current in Load Type Typical Life on Operating Life Resistive Lamp Solenoid operations 250VAC 0 1A 1 500 000 125VAC 0 3A 1 000 000 30VDC 1 0A 2 000 000 12VDC 2 0A 1 000 000 i c are defined as a X10 inrush with a power factor PF of 1 00 when turned OFF they represent a PF of 1 00 Solenoids are de
245. lues differ by more than 250L4A the block reports a Feedback Error for the circuit For a new block feedback testing is enabled for each output It can be disabled or enabled individually Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 shows the current Output Feedback configuration of the outputs Line 2 shows the I O type of each circuit 1 To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press FEEDBACK 97 F1 gt IIIIOO X X X X Y Y gt tgl entr nxt N To change a selection press F2 tgl e To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Feedback Time Feedback Time is the interval between the time the block receives an output value from the CPU and the time the output channel is expected to attain the commanded value This interval is used in conjunction with Feedback Testing enabled or disabled above A suitable interval should be selected so that the output current will reach its commanded value before the comparison is made This prevents false Feedback Error diagnostics for the output A longer feedback interval should be specified for outputs that respond slowly to changes in output signallevels The Feedback Time may be in the range 0mS to 255mS For a new block Feedback Time of 0m is used for each output Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 3 shows the Feedback Time configured for the output circuit indic
246. ly or combination block Regardless the block always broadcasts two bytes of data each bus scan and accepts two bytes of data each bus scan If the block is configured as an inputs only block all circuits must be regular inputs or tristate inputs The block will use 16 input references and NO output references If the block is configured as an outputs only block all circuits must be regular outputs no feedback analysis will be performed The block will use 16 output references and NO input references If the block is configured as a combination block circuits can be any mix of inputs and or outputs The block will use 16 input references and 16 output references The actual state of each output circuit will be returned to the CPU in the corresponding input references location The CPU can monitor the feedback state to verify after an appropriate delay that the output switching device has operated properly and that the load has the proper voltage and current applied Appendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Input Data Format A16 Circuit DC I O Block broadcasts 2 bytes of input data each bus scan Byte Description 0 Inputs 1 8 input 1 in bit 0 1 Inputs 9 16 input 9 in bit 0 Output Data Format The block receives 2 bytes of output data from the bus controller each bus scan Byte Description 0 Outputs 1 8 output 1 in bit 0 1 Outputs 9
247. mal operation and do not need to be pulsed Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 of the Pulse Test screen shows whether the capability is PULSE TEST currently enabled If you want to make a change press F2 tgl REF Press F3 enter ENABLED tgl entr nxt 2 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Pulse Testing Outputs Outputs can be pulse tested from a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Pulse Test command from the application program Pulse Testing tests the continuity of each output circuit including the switch device power source wiring interposing devices fuses circuit breakers terminals and output device ForIsolated I O blocks Pulse Testing also allows the CPU to easily check for Loss Of I O Power conditions It works whether or not there is minimum current to check for a No Load condition Pulse testing does not activate mechanical devices such as motor starters relays or solenoid valves Pulse Testing should momentarily cause outputs that are OFF to turn ON and outputs that are ON to go OFE Pulse testing may cause the following diagnostics Failed Switch If the output does not change state when pulsed Short Circuit If the load on an output that was OFF exceeds 30 amps when pulsed ON No Load If the load on an output that was OFF draws less than 50mA when pulsed ON Loss of I O Power Indicates that a pair of circuits is disconnected from field power Thi
248. minal marked IN for that input Connect V to RTN For a voltage output device connect the load to the terminals marked VOUT and COM for that output If current mode 4 20m4A is used for an input circuit without an external resistor connect a jumper from the terminal marked JMP to the terminal marked RTN for that circuit If an input current device operates outside the 4 20mA range connect a resistor across the voltage inputs For example to measure 10mA to 50mA cur rent loop signals install a 100 ohm resistor Chapter 10 Voltage Current 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks If current mode is used for an output circuit use the terminals marked I and I For outputs set up in current mode the block s internal power supply can be used to drive loads up to 300 ohms per output For loads up to 2K ohms use an external power supply Connect the positive lead of the external supply to one side of the load and the negative lead of the external supply to block common on terminal 29 If the external supply is between 24V and 50V you can use terminal 25 or 30 as a tie point for the positive connection This point will be disconnected from the external supply by a reverse biased diode
249. mounted in an enclosure there must be space for free flow of air along each block s Electronics Assembly the side opposite the Terminal Assembly Do not allow wiring conduits shelves or other components including projections on the cover or door to inhibit cooling airflow around the blocks If an enclosure must be located in direct sunlight consider placing a shade over it and or painting it white to reflect heat Mounting Footprint For each block drill two screw or bolt holes for 8 32 hardware Notice that the mounting holes are not centered Position the block so that the notches in the upper and lower flanges line up with the mounting holes Attach the block using 8 32 hardware 2 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 uz ze utsz8 ug LZ UGH Tapped 136in 3 45mm 29 drill Through hole 177in 4 5mm 16 drill or larger 3 25in E 8 26cm 1 32in 0 150in 0 38cm 3 35cm va GEK 90486D 2 Making Bus Connections Make the bus connections to I O blocks using the cable type selected for the application Recommended cable types are listed in the Genius I O System User s Manual Do not mix cable types on a bus Unreliable communications could result Bus connections can be made using either a slotted screwdriver 0 25 x 0 04 or 6 35mm x 1 0mm maximum blade size or a Phillips screwdriver s
250. mpatibility compensation method 15 13 compensation value user supplied configurable features and defaults 15 8 configuration worksheet diagnostics dimensions features heat generation 16 4 high lowalarm diagnostics 15 6 input offset value 15 14 inputs 15 5 internal fault measurement accuracy 15 4 offset adjustment open wire 15 6 operation over underange diagnostics 15 6 PLC references E report faults to CPU specifications thermocouple type 15 12 units 15 11 wiring instructions Index 5 Index Index 6 32Circuit DCSink SourceI O Blocks BSM controller BSM present catalog numbers A 1 circuit I O type p 12 compatibility configurable features and defaults configuration worksheet 9 CPU redundancy diagnostics 9 5 dimensions duplex default state 9 18 features heat generation input filter time 9 11 inputs LEDs operation 9 3 outputs outputs default states outputs default time 9 17 outputs hold last state 9 14 overcurrent protection PLC references required pulse test report faults to CPU 13 short circuit 9 5 specifications surge current protection wiring instructions 9 6 Tristate Inputs B 10 Troubleshooting V Voltage selection for Isolated block Voltage Curent 4 Input 2 Output Analog alarm input mode alarm thresholds BSM present catalog numbers A 1 compatibility configurable features and defaults 10 8
251. must be rev 3 0 or later The Logicmaster Five programming software must be rel 2 01 or later 10 2 Specifications Block Type 4input 2outputcircuits CatalogNumbers 115 VAC AnalogI OBlock IC660BBA100 TerminalAssembly only IC660TSA100 ElectronicsAssemblyonly IC660EBA100 24 48VDCAnalogI OBlock IC660BBA020 TerminalAssembly only IC660TSA020 ElectronicsAssemblyonly IC660EBA020 Size height x width x depth 8 83 22 44cm x3 50 8 89cm x3 94 10 00cm Weight 4 Ibs 1 8 kg LEDs block UnitOK I O Enabled Block to Block Isolation 1500 V HeatDissipation 6 Watts Block Power nominal 115 VAC 24 48 VDC Operating range 98 132 VAC 18 56 Maximumpower 10VA 8W Frequency ripple 47 63 Hz 10 max ripple Power supply dropout time 1cycle 10mS Commonmoderejection 60 dB 0 1 KHz Commonmodevoltage 170volts maximum Absoluteaccuracy at 25C Typical 0 2 of full scale Maximum 0 5 of full scale within 50mV on the 10 volt range 25mV on the 5 volt range and 100mA on the 4 to 20 mA range Thermaldrift from 25C Typical 10 PPM per C Maximum 40 PPM per C Circuitrangeselections 0 10 VDC 10 VDC 5 VDC 0 5 VDC 4 20 mA or 1 5 VDC InputCharacteristics Inputresolution 12 bit sign Inputupdate frequency Once every 4mS Input filter ranges none 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024mS Inputdiagnostics Underrange Overrange High Alarm Low Alarm Open Wire Ou
252. n 2 Toselect a circuit press F1 gt 3 To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Output Default Value Outputs always go to their default values when the block is first powered up For a new block the output default value is 4000 If Hold Last State was NOT enabled the block will also default the output if CPU communications are lost On a non redundant system this occurs approximately 250m6 after the third bus scan passes with no CPU communications If the block is on a redundant bus downstream of a Bus Switching Module additional time is needed to accommodate switching of the BSM see Output Default Time on page 11 18 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps The screen first displays the default value of the block s first output 1 To select an output press F1 gt OUTPUT DEFAULT OUT1 97 1200 2 To change a default value press F2 chng then enter the new DEFAULT 0 aod gt chng nxt 3 To save the new default press F3 entr 11 16 4 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 BSM Present If the block is connected to a single bus or to just one trunk of a dual bus BSM Present should be set to NO Select YES of the block is located in
253. n Protection After the block is configured its Configuration Protection should be enabled to prevent unwanted changes from a Hand held Monitor and from the CPU Configuration Protection can only be set and removed by a Hand held Monitor For a new block Configuration Protection is disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT f REF 97 128A 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection DISABLED 3 Press F4 next to return to the first configuration display tgl entr nxt 12 16 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 13 Current sourceAnalog Input Blocks are used to interface a controller to devices that provide 4mA to 20mA analog signal Current source Analog Input Blocks areavailable with two types of block power supply m 115VAC 125VDCCurrent source Analog Input block IC660BBA106 m 24 48VDCCurrent source Analog Input block IC660BBA026 The two blocks are the same in all other respects Features ACurrent source Analog Input block has six 4 to 220mA current inputs Each input provides a 24 volt currentloop power supply and is isolated from all other circuits within the block The BSMcircuitry is electrically common to Input 1 but isolated from the other inputs A dedicated digital outputis provided to drive a Bus Switching Module when a Current source AnalogInput blockisinstall
254. n and report diagnostic if overload Occurs gt tgl entr nxt N output will NOT shut down or report Overload diagnostic X the circuit has been configured as an input 1 To select a circuit press F1 gt To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr 3 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 BSM Present If the block is connected to a single bus or to just one trunk of a dual bus BSM Present should be set to NO Select YES if the block is located in a cluster connected to dual busses via a Bus Switching Module Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the BSM Present configuration press F2 tgl BSM PRESENT f REF 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr STATUS YES 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt BSM Controller A BSM Controller is a block to which a Bus Switching Module is directly attached which controls the BSM s switching action Selecting a block to be a BSM Controller block has no effect on the block s I O type the block can still be configured as an inputs only block but circuit 1 cannot be physically used as an input The first circuit will not be under CPU control To change this configuration with a Hand held Monitor the bl
255. nabled the block continues to hold the output in its current state instead of setting it to the powerup default Outputs remain in their last state or default indefinitely or until one of the following OCCUIS Communications with the CPU are restored m The Hand held Monitor changes the output by forcing it m Power is removed from the block Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 displays the current Hold Last State configuration of HOLD LAST STATE circuits 1 16 On this screen REF YYYYYNYNXXXXXXXX Y hold last state tgl entr nxt N go to default state configured on the next HHM screen X the circuit has been configured as an input To select a circuit press F1 gt To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr JE e o m Press F4 next to display the Hold Last State screen for outputs 17 32 6 Press F4 next from the second Hold Last State screen when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Output Default State E An output goes to its powerup default state when the block is first powered up If Hold Last State was NOT enabled the block will also default the output if CPU communications are lost On a non redundant system this occurs approximately 250mS after the third bus scan passes with no CPU communications If the
256. nalog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 11 Current source Input Output Blocks have4 input and 2 output circuits for 4 20mA devices Two Current source Analog BlocksInput Output Blocks areavailable m 115 VAC 125 VDCCurrent sour ce Analog 4 Input 2 OutputBlock IC660BBA104 m 24 48 VDC Current sour ce Analog 4 Input 2 OutputBlock IC660BBA024 Two similar blocks described in the next chapter provide 6 outputs for devices that accept 4 to 20mA signals Two outputs on those blocks can also be used for 0V to 5V signals Features These blocks provide isolated power to all circuits no separate power is required for 4 20mA signals Allcircuits on theblock support independent selection of linear scaling values These values can be used to convert the internal values into engineering units suitable for the application A dedicated digital outputis provided to drive a Bus Switching Module when a CurrentSource Analog block is installed ina redundant bus cable system The24 48 VDC Bus Switching Module version IC660BSM021 is required for this Additionalconfigurablefeaturesinclude Inputalarmdetection Output Hold Last State or default m Selectable input conversion time up to 400mS m CPURedundancy Output feedback checking These blocks automatically perform the following diagnosticchecks Input Open Wire detection m Input high and low alarms InputOverrange and Underrange O
257. nation input output block inputs only or outputs only blocks Regardless the block always broadcasts one byte of data each bus scan and accepts one byte of data each bus scan If the block is configured as a combination block circuits can be any mix of inputs and or outputs In this configuration the block will use 8 input references and 8 output references The actual state of each output circuit will be returned to the CPU in the corresponding input reference location The CPU can monitor the feedback state to verify after an appropriate delay that the output switching device has operated properly and that the load has the proper voltage and current applied If the block is configured as an inputs only block all circuits must be regular inputs or tristate inputs The block will use 8 input references and NO output references If the block is configured as an outputs only block all circuits must be outputs no feedback analysis will be performed The block will use 8 output references and NO input references Appendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Chapter 4 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks 4 3 4 4 Input Data Format A 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Block broadcasts 1 byte of input data each bus scan a s 01 Inputs 1 8 input 1 in bit 0 Output Data Format HE OMEN Outputs 1 8 output 1 in bit 0 The block receives 1 byte of output data from the bus controller each bus scan
258. nd line rejection capabilities For a new block 400mS is the default This conversion time which provides the maximum resolution and noise rejection is suitable for most applications Change it only if faster update times are required The following table shows the available conversion times and the resolution and noise rejection for each Conversion Resolution Rejected Time Frequencies mS uA bits Hertz 17 12 11 60 20 10 11 50 400 33 12 60 40 12 50 400 67 13 60 80 2 5 13 50 400 100 2 14 50 60 400 200 1 15 50 60 400 400 0 5 16 50 60 400 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 INPUT CONV TIME REF 97 128 A 400 mS 2 tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 13 Current source Analog 6 Input Blocks The screen displays the selected conversion time If this is not appropriate press F2 tgl to change it To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display 13 11 Alarm Thresholds Each input circuit can have two unique alarms one for a low value and one for a high value The high value should be greater than the low value If an input reaches one of the limits the block sends the actual value and a LOW ALARM or HIGH ALARM message The message identifies the circuit in alarm Only one message is sent upon reaching the threshold Alarms do not stop the process or change the value of the input Alarm Threshol
259. new selection DISABLED 3 Press F4 next to return to the first configuration display tgl entr nxt 9 18 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter Voltage Current Analog Input Output Blocks 10 Voltage Curent 4 Input 2 Output Analog Input Output Blocks have four independent input circuits and two independent output circuits Two block versions are available m 115 VAC Analog I O Block IC660BBA100 m 24 48 VDC Analog I O Block IC660BBA020 They are identical except for the power supply Features Each circuit on a Voltage Curent Analog I O Block can accept or provide signals in one of five analog ranges 0 to 10 volts DC 10 volts DC to 10 volts DC 5 volts DC to 5 volts DC 0 to 5 volts DC or 4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 volts DC External resistance can be used to interface these blocks to current loop devices with other signal ranges The block converts the input and output signal levels to from digital count values and translates them into engineering units values that relate to the application The block s internal power supply drives current mode output loads up to 300 ohms each For loads up to 2K ohms an external 24 or 48 VDC power supply can be used For current loop applications Current source Analog blocks may be more suitable See chapters 11 through 13 Individual inputs can be set up to operate in Alarm Input Mode In this mode the input s analog valu
260. nius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 32 Circuit DC I O Blocks Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N Block Number 0 31 Block Type Input Output Combination Reference Address through Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Pulse Test Enabled Disabled Input Filter Time 1 100 mS Redundancy Features Redundancy Mode None Standby Duplex GMR Duplex Default on off BSM Present Y N BSM Controller Y N Outputs Default 2 5 10 sec Circuit Features Ckt Reference I O Type Report Faults output Hold Last output Default Address I O yes no State yes no State ON OFF ONOoaRWN GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 9 32 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 9 9 L9 Pulse Test Pulse Testing verifies the ability of a block s outputs to change state A new block is configured to enable Pulse Testing Pulse Testing should remain enabled if the block has loads that hold one state for long periods of time unless amy load s are sensitive to pulses or interruptions It should be disabled if the block s loads will normally change state as the program executes These will report faults during normal operation and
261. nput channel 2 bits 8 15 4 Input channel 3 bits 0 7 5 Input channel 3 bits 8 15 6 Input channel 4 bits 0 7 7 Input channel 4 bits 8 15 8 Input channel 5 bits 0 7 9 Input channel 5 bits 8 15 10 Input channel 6 bits 0 7 11 Input channel 6 bits 8 15 Hand held Monitor Input Display Inputs are reported as whole integers For example if the current value of an input was 25 36 it could be reported as REF 97 120 I D a or I1 253 enths of units or I2 186 2536 hundredths of units gt Input values are displayed on the Monitor Block screen as shown at left Individual inputs are also displayed in the Monitor Control Reference screens Diagnostics The block s advanced diagnostics provide the messages listed below Fault messages can be cleared from the Hand held Monitor or the CPU Input Open Wire Input current is below 2mA Input High Alarm Input above high alarm level Input Low Alarm Input below low alarm level Input Overrange Signal exceeds 25mA Input Underrange Current is negative or OmA 13 4 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 GEK 90486D 2 Field Wiring Terminals 5 through 32 are used for input power Bus Switching Module control and field wiring devices These terminals accept AWG 22 to AWG 14 wires Do not overtorque the terminal screws The ground GND terminal 5 is for block safety It is connected to th
262. nsors electronic high speed counters instrumentation fiber optic sensors and similar electronic devices cannot be monitored for Open Wire conditions Such devices should be set up as standard not tristate inputs GE offers compatible input devices including a 5 1K ohm monitoring resistor with its line of General Purpose Control sensor devices No Load Diagnostic The optional No Load diagnostic can be enabled or disabled for individual outputs For a new block outputs are configured to report No Load conditions In this configuration energizing the output activates a no load current level If the load does not continuously draw 50 mA from the output circuit the block sends a NO LOAD message Because this diagnostic monitors both current and voltage a No Load condition may cause an HHM monitoring an operating block to display 0 for the circuit although there is voltage at the output and the circuit LED is on This diagnostic should be disabled for circuits on which very small loads small relays transformers or indicating lamps will draw less than 50 mA Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Overload Diagnostic Like No Load detection this diagnostic is optional for individual outputs In addition to the protection provided by the block s built in Short Circuit detection Overload Shutdown provides further protection for output loads field wiring and switching devices If a load excee
263. nt If the block is not online to the process the signal level associated with each engineering units value must also be measured external to the block Entering Scaling Values If you are NOT measuring the process while scaling the circuit have the two pairs of scaling values ready If you ARE measuring the process to scale the circuit set the process to one of the two conditions being measured The next configuration screen after the Channel Active screen is this status screen Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps Line 1 shows which circuit is selected 1 If you want to scale another circuit press F1 gt OUT 1 97 1201 STS ENG uA 2 continue at step 3 30636 3957 3 Line3on the status screen shows an engineering units value gt scale nxt and the equivalent A signal level for the selected circuit The engineering units value on the left is calculated from on the current scaling If the scaling is wrong the engineering units value is too Make a note of the uA value shown on this screen you will need this information to complete the next screen 4 Press F2 scale to scale the circuit OUT1 ENG uA Fe l LOW 850 100 5 Line2 shows the circuit s low pair of engineering units and pA HI 30970 4000 values All values on this screen are configured values not gt chng entr nxt measured values Pressing F1 gt moves the cursor between lines 12 10 6 Enter the engineering units value s Thi
264. nt by the bus interface module Bus Controller or PCIM with Device Number 31 If communications from that controller are not available the block will accept communications from Device Number 30 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CPU REDUNDANCY REF 97 128A 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection HOT STBY MODE 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Configuration Protection After the block is configured its Configuration Protection should be enabled to prevent unwanted changes from a Hand held Monitor and from the CPU Configuration Protection can only be set and removed by a Hand held Monitor For a new block Configuration Protection is disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps DISABLED tgl entr nxt 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT 128A 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection 3 Press F4 next to return to the first configuration display 13 14 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter RTD 6 Input Blocks 14 RTDInputblocks monitor temperature inputs from ResistiveTemperature Detectors RTDs Two RTDblocks 244490 areavailable Qs m 115VAC 125
265. nt digital count values from 4095 to 4095 depending upon the range of the circuit These count values must differ by at least 2 2 Pick two different engineering units values from 32767 to 32767 These values must also differ by at least 2 3 Checkthe values by drawing a graph with engineering units as the horizontal axis and counts as the vertical axis Locate both pairs of values on the graph and draw a connecting line between them The line must cross the engineering units axis between 32767 and 432767 That is zero 0 counts must correspond to a number of engineering units in this range The slope of the resulting line should be between 1 200 and 200 for a positive slope or between 1 200 and 200 for a negative slope Values outside this range will be accepted by the block provided other requirements are met but may not yield satisfactory accuracy during internal calculations 4 The values selected should provide the greatest range of engineering units values without exceeding 32767 Entering Scaling Values If you are NOT measuring the process while scaling the circuit have the two pairs of scaling values ready If you ARE measuring the process to scale the circuit set the process to one of the two conditions being measured Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The next configuration screen after the Range Select screen is IN1 97 1201 this status screen Line 1 shows which circuit is selected for
266. nted and its bottom and back are not exposed for heat transfer 66 16764em 242835 gt 18 30 18 45 72cm gem 45 72cm BACK 44 o 121 92cm N aa BOTTOM Total available surface area is 3708 square inches 23923 cm2 For 35C ambient temperature the table on the next page shows that a surface area of 3780 square inches 24387cm will dissipate 300 Watts For the slightly smaller size of the example enclosure you could estimate heat dissipation of approximately 295 Watts Chapter 16 Sizing Enclosures 16 5 Heat Transfer Capabilities of Standard NEMA Enclosures This table shows the smallest non vented NEMA type enclosures to use at various levels of heat generation at ambient temperatures of 25C 35C and 45C with the internal temperature of the enclosure not exceeding 55C The table lists both wall mount and floor mount type enclosures The size of the enclosure back is given by the first two dimensions H x W Floor mount enclosures are indicated by asterisks AMBIENTTEMPERATURESURROUNDINGENCLOSURE Watts Generated 25C 77F 35C 95F 45C 113F Internally Surface Enclosure Surface Enclosure Surface Enclosure Area Dimensions Area Dimensions Area Dimensions Hx Wx D Hx Wx D Hx Wx D 150w
267. o the next configuration display E 13 8 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Circuit Scaling Allcircuits on the block can be scaled independently To scale a circuit two sets of values are entered two engineering units values and their associated signallevels Based on these two pairs of values the block will be able to calculate engineering units for all other input or output levels The block will use the configured scaling values to convert the input signal levels 0 to 24000 uA into engineering units values Each engineering units value is an integer to 82767 The converted number is still a numerical value and will appear as such on the Hand held Monitor or at the CPU with its programming device The applicable units of measure should be recorded separately on a meter or display Scaling can also be used to compensate for field device inaccuracies On a new block the scaling is set to 14A per engineering unit If this is appropriate it will not need to be changed The most accurate scaling comes from actual measurements The process must be set to two distinctly different conditions so two engineering units measurements can be taken If the block is online to the process it will automatically provide the signal level for each engineering units measurement If the block is not online to the process the signal level associated with each engineering units value must also be meas
268. ock must first be configured for BSM PRESENT The BSM CONTROLLER menu will not appear if BSM PRESENT is set to NO Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM CONTROLLER REF 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr STATUS NO 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks 5 21 Output Default Time When a Bus Switching Module is used the Output Default Time must be long enough to allow the BSM to switch without causing outputs to default Therefore when BSM Present is selected above the block automatically changes its Output Default Time from 3 bus scans to 2 5 seconds If Hold Last State was selected outputs will remain in their last state while the BSM switches instead of defaulting so there is no need to change this selection If Hold Last State was set to NO for any output on a block and total bus scan time will exceed 100mS change this selection to 10 seconds Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl OUTPUT DEF TIME 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr 2 5 SECS 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt CPU Redundancy The block can be configured for No Controller Redundancy Hot Standby or Duplex redundancy For new blocks it is set for
269. ock prefers outputs sent by the bus controller with Device Number 31 If those outputs are not available the block uses outputs from the bus controller with Device Number 30 If no outputs from a CPU are available outputs either Hold Last State or default as configured In Duplex redundancy mode a block compares outputs received from two CPUs and sets any outputs for which there is disagreement to their Duplex Default state Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CPU REDUNDANCY REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection NO CTRL REDUND 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 4 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks 4 19 Duplex Default State In Duplex Redundancy mode if the block receives different output states for given points from the two CPUs the block breaks the tie by outputting the Duplex Default State to those points For new blocks OFF is selected for all outputs Change it if outputs should be ON Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the Duplex Default state press F2 tgl DUPLEX DEFAULT REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection OFF 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Note If the block loses communications with BOTH CPUS individual outputs go to their configured Hold Last State or Output Default State
270. of m tenths of a degree Celsius m tenths of a degree Fahrenheit hundredths of millivolts Temperature values are reported to the CPU as tenths of units For example 300 2 degrees Celsius is reported to the CPU as 3002 This provides greater resolution than simply reporting integer values The Hand held Monitor accurately displays the temperature value to one decimal place The same 300 2 degrees Celsius appears on the HHM as 300 2C Millivolt values are reported to the CPU as hundredths of millivolts For example 300 25mV is reported to the CPU as 30025 The Hand held Monitor accurately displays the millivolt value to two decimal places The same 300 25mV appears on the Hand held Monitor as 300 25 If counts are selected values are reported as they are received from the hardware with no auto calibration performed Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 shows the currently selected units dips 2 Toch he uni F2 tgl T h lecti REFS 97 120A loc ey t E press F2 tgl To save the new selection CELSIUS press F3 entr tgl entr nxt 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 15 Thermocouple 6 Input Blocks 15 11 Thermocouple Type Each channel can receive inputs from a type J K T E B R S or N thermocouple If one of these thermocouple types is configured the block will convert input values to engineering units using an internal linearization table for that thermocouple type
271. of Heat Generation for Genius I O Blocks IC660BBA023andBBA103 AdditionalNumber AdditionalNumber Watts of Watts for each In of Watts foreach BLOCKTYPE per put Circuit Full OutputCircuit at Block Current at 100 100 Duty Cycle Duty Cycle 115 VAC 8 Ckt Grouped I O Block 6 4 7W at 2 amps 1 1 IC660BBD101 115 VAC 125VDCIsolatedI Oblocks 8 4 7W at2amps 1 1 IC660BBS100 101 102 and 103 115 VAC 16 Ckt AC Input Block 8 n a 1 25 IC660BBD110 Relay Output Blocks 4 75 0 33W n a IC660BBR100and BBR101 24 48VDC16CktSource Sink 48 4W at 2 amps 0 1W at 24V IC660BBD020 and BBD021 0 4W at 48V 24VDC 16 CktSource Sink 4 8 4W at2amps 0 3W IC660BBD022 and BBD023 32CktDC Source Sink Blocks 2 0 5Wat1 2amp 0 28W IC660BBD024 and BBD025 AnalogInput OutputBlocks 6 n a n a IC660BBA020andBBA100 Current source Analog I O Blocks 12 n a n a IC660BBA024andBBA104 Current source Analog Output Blocks 12 n a n a IC660BBA025andBBA105 Current source Analog Input Blocks n a n a IC660BBA026andBBA106 RTD Input Blocks IC660BBA101 and 7 n a n a BBAO21 ThermocoupleInput Blocks 7 n a n a Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 GEK 90486D 2 Heat Dissipation of NEMA Type Enclosures The table on the next page shows the heat dissipation surface area and dimensions standard NEMA type enclosures Calculating Available Surface Area
272. on is provided against accidental E Es L SES 8 BSM reversed input polarity Mud When a Bus Switching Module is installed C evo Qu XI a connect the BSM control wires which are not O12 xJ H polarized to terminals 7 and 8 T 13 71 S 14 71 F Remote Q 1 TO2 iri Cold Junction Wiring for Thermocouples Ow Toz T SENSE ane 17 XJV 7 Thermocouple wires should be connected to the RES ood 18 xiv six channels observing the proper polarity For O1 x g American color coding connect the red wire to 2 L gt ne 4 E the terminal p Emm 2 2 1c3 L Qam e Typical connections for both types of remote as CN ie P a e cold junction sensing are shown in the following mu Q 25 xv 4 illustration Cold Junction 26 xuv T SENSE ee 27 x o s LL es 28 XJI 3 Qu o eC 29 705 3 i NERE ee 30 TC5 m 72 e 31 TC6 T6 E O 0 32 ces TOR NOTE Heavy lines em represent copper wires GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 15 Thermocouple 6 Input Blocks 15 7 BlockConfiguration The configurable features of a Thermocouple Block are listed below For most the factory setting is suitable for many applications and will not need to be changed Feature Circuit or Factory Selections Block Setting Device Number Block null 0 to 31 a number must be selected Reference Address Block none Depends on host CPU type Baud Rate Block 15
273. onfiguration 6 eee eee eee 3 4 Assigning a Block s Required Features 060 c cece eee ee eee 3 7 Configuring Other I O Block Features 666 c cece eee eee 3 12 Finishing Up geten aiie tese ea Be e t es aedi ces 3 14 Chapter 4 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks 4 1 Features acies sch phates hits Auer p aee oe aed PAE Lee SHALL RS 4 1 Compatibility i see ona wan hte teas thie Bare ub hace De wee 4 1 Specifications iere aah a Karte UERRE ME MER PA tad SaaS 4 2 Block Operation 4 er SI RE uds 4 3 Diagnostics 75 do eon RC e ea e ep n RI dus 4 5 Field WITE 5 een E o RADI du M dus 4 8 Block Configuration srei a ieie a E e 4 10 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks eese 5 1 Heatures 55i eae clined a det aasih eats ee ieheekog oie iat Poor cista a oh iind 5 1 Specifications ree eee Eo Red ANDERE EH HURTS CR Ree EET det 5 2 Compatibility eee n EE RUD eee handed IR UR bee eee 5 3 Block Operation ia 20 05 e245 a p eet e E e ek ARE A ee Relea ee 5 4 Diagnostics mei ei esee Op e I E o P no A Ro eaten e in kas 5 6 Field Wiring iis aie eens Re RR Te re del pU RR LU RA 5 10 Block Configuration sssssssesssee e 5 12 GEK 90486D 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 ix Chapter 6 115 Contents VAC 16 Circuit Input Block 2 0 0 0 cece cece eee ee eee Feat tes fei i see wee p WMV ene no oem
274. onfiguration is the process of selecting the features that will be used by a Genius I O block Configuration includes 1 5 Assigning a Device Number to the block This step which requires a Hand held Monitor must be done before any additional configuration can take place For some CPU types it is necessary to assign a Reference Address for the block s I O This also must be done with a Hand held Monitor Making sure the block s configured baud rate matches that of other devices on the bus Selecting other features that are appropriate for the application Block configuration is simple since all blocks come supplied with a set of default selections for each feature Therefore configuration is only a matter of changing those features that are appropriate for the application Among the features of Genius I O blocks that can be configured are fault reporting redundancy and the assignment of inputs and outputs on most discrete blocks This configuration is usually done with a Hand held Monitor but it can be done from the CPU Protecting the block s selected features so they will not be accidentally changed Many of a block s configurable features can be changed at any time even while the system is in operation Blocks can be configured before or after installation on a properly terminated serial bus If a new factory shipped block is to be added to an existing bus running at a baud rate other than 153 6 Kbaud standard th
275. or a new block 400mS is the default This conversion time which provides the maximum resolution and noise rejection is suitable for most applications Change it only if faster update times are required The following table shows the available conversion times and the resolution and noise rejection for each Conversion Resolution Rejected Frequencies Time mS uA bits Hertz 17 12 11 60 20 10 11 50 400 33 6 12 60 40 5 12 50 400 67 3 13 60 80 2 5 13 50 400 100 14 50 60 400 200 15 50 60 400 400 0 5 16 50 60 400 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps INPUT CONV TIME REF 97 128 A 400 mS tgl entr nxt 1 The screen displays the selected conversion time If this is not appropriate press F2 tgl to change it To save the new selection press F3 entr 2 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 11 Current source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Blocks 11 13 Alarm Thresholds Each input circuit can have two unique alarms one for a low value and one for a high value The high value should be greater than the low value If an input reaches one of the limits the block sends the actual value and a LOW ALARM or HIGH ALARM message The message identifies the circuit in alarm Only one message is sent upon reaching the threshold Alarms do not stop the process or change the value of the input Alarm Thresholds are scaled valu
276. or a configurable period of time the block checks the current level of the output If itis less than approximately 1 5mA the block reports a Feedback Error The block continues sending new values from the CPU to the output Feedback fault reporting should be disabled if a channel is configured for a voltage application Nuisance diagnostics may be reported if the Output Feedback Time selected for the circuit is too brief If this happens increase the feedback time or disable output feedback testing GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 12 Current source Analog 6 Output Blocks 12 5 Field Wiring Terminals 5 through 32 are used for input power Connecting a Bus Switching Module to Bus Switching Module control and field wiring a CSOBlock devices These terminals accept AWG 22 to AWG 14 wires Do not overtorque the terminal screws If an optional Bus Switching Module is installed The ground GND terminal 5 is for block safety connect the BSM control wires to terminals 9 It is connected to the block chassis and to and 10 The polarity from the block is as marked terminals 13 16 19 22 27 and 32 which are the BSM is insensitive to polarity marked GND Each channel has one ground nals terminal for shield termination if desired BSM O LS 3 Power Source Wiring E 3 Connect an ap
277. or location gt chg nxt press F2 chng then enter the new value 3 To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 15 Thermocouple 6 Input Blocks 15 15 BSM Controller A BSM Controller is a block to which a Bus Switching Module is directly attached which controls the BSM s switching action For a new block the default is NO Change it only if the block will be used as a BSM Controller To change this configuration with a Hand held Monitor the block must first be configured for BSM PRESENT The BSM CONTROLLER menu will not appear if BSM PRESENT is set to NO Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM CONTROLLER l REF 97 120A 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr STATUS NO 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Configuration Protection After the block is configured its Configuration Protection should be enabled to prevent unwanted changes from a Hand held Monitor and from the CPU Configuration Protection can only be set and removed by a Hand held Monitor For a new block Configuration Protection is disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT REF 97 120A 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection DISABLED 3 Press F4 nex
278. or that circuit Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the block detects faults on the circuit and takes appropriate action The Unit OK LED blinks when a fault occurs and a fault report is sent to a Hand held Monitor The fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the block The application program can query the block for faults whether or not diagnostics reporting is enabled using individual Read Diagnostic messages HHM Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen shows the current Fault Reports configuration of all REPORT FAULTS circuits on the block REF TC YYYYYYYY 2 To select a circuit press F1 gt tgl entr nxt 3 To change the Report Faults configuration of the selected circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Shorted Wire Detection The Shorted Wire Detection feature causes the block to issue a Short Circuit message if the voltage level on an input reaches 10 short low or 90 short high of the incoming line voltage Shorted Wire Detection can be independently enabled for each of the block s 16 inputs For a new block it is not enabled for any input To detect shorted wire conditions a series resistor must be located near the input device as explained on page 6 4 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen shows whether Short Detection is enabled Y or
279. or the block is tapped off the input output device voltages wired to the terminals Noseparate block power supply is needed Configurablefeaturesinclude Output Pulse Testcapability m Selectable Input Filter Time from 10mS to 100mS Output powerup defaults m Output Hold Last State or default m CPU Redundancy type m BusSwitching Module control Each circuit has electronic fusing that shuts down the circuit in 5p if output current exceeds 30 amps at turnon or 20 amps after 2 cycles Thecircuitis easily restored by command from a Hand held Monitor or the CPU Additionaldiagnosticsinclude m OvertemperatureFailedSwitch m Open Wire for tristate inputs m Overload Detection and Shutdown m No load Detection Faultreporting can be enabled or disabled circuit by circuit This block is suitable for installations where a Class 1 Division 2 rating is required for Factory Mutual Compatibility Thisblock is fully compatible with Hand held Monitor model IC660HHM501 It may be used with IC660HHM500 However HHM501 is required to change baud rate configuration or to configure the block for redundancy The blocks may be used with any GE Fanucbus controller PCIM or QBIM module GEK 90486D 2 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Blocks
280. ould be located in an area which is clean and free of airborne contaminants There should be adequate cooling airflow In many applications Genius I O blocks are installed in NEMA enclosures Chapter 15 gives guidelines for determining enclosure sizes Environmental Specifications Genius I O blocks meet the following specifications for vibration noise and ambient temperature Vibration Genius I O blocks are compact and sturdy they perform well in conditions where vibration is a factor All Genius I O block designs are vibration tested according to Mil Std 810C and IEC 68 2 6 to meet the following specifications 5 to 10 Hz 200 in displacement peak to peak 10 to 200 Hzat1g Shock 15G Noise Genius I O blocks are resistant to noise levels found in most industrial applications when installed according to accepted industry practices This includes proper separation of wiring by voltage and power levels as explained in the Genius I O System User s Manual Blocks are tested to the following noise specifications Radiated FCC part 15 section J class A Computing Devices Received NEMAICS 2 230 ANSI IEEE C37 90 Relay and relay systems associated with Electrical Power Apparatus Temperature I O blocks operate reliably in temperatures up to 60C 140F Temperatures are measured adjacent to the block at the bottom of the Electronics Assembly Between 35C and 65C 95 149F each 10C reduction in the ambient temperature increas
281. overtemperature fault GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 8 7 Field Wiring Allfield wiring to this block are standard screw clamp type terminals which can be operated with a flat or phillips head screwdriver Each terminal accepts one AWG 12 or two AWG 14 wires The minimum recommended wire size is AWG 22 The terminals can accommodate spade or ring terminals up to 0 27 inch 6 85 mm in width with a minimum opening for a 6 screw and up to 0 20 inch 5 1 mm depth from the screw center to the back barrier Connect a DC power source to the DC terminal 5 and the return to the DC terminal 22 Depending on the layout and current loads positive and negative connections can be bussed and made by individual wires back to the block or power source Connectionsfor a DC Sink Block Any circuit can be an input or output Connect one terminal of the device to the block terminals 6 21 Connect outputs to DC and inputs to DC DC Sink Block Power Disconnects Since block power is the same as circuit power itis important to wire block power disconnects so that block power and input power will be removed at the same time DC SINK BLOCK i DC LOAD WR m YES O NO If circuit power is not removed at the same time as block power the block may power up when multiple inputs are activated even though one leg of power has been removed from the block Genius I O
282. pment GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 7 1 8 Beyond these benefits the flexibility power and intelligence built into the Genius I O system can make production and equipment design engineering easier Genius I O systems will monitor control and diagnose the next generation of devices in tomorrow s factories m High level analog signals on can be mixed on one block 10 volts DC 5 volts DC 0 10 volts DC 0 5 volts DC 1 5 volts DC or 4 20 mA m Linear conversions can be established for analog blocks converting analog values to engineering units m High level and low level alarms on analog inputs will automatically warn of undesired analog levels m Over range and under range diagnostics automatically report analog values that are out of range m The Hand held Monitor can force I O on and off and perform wiring diagnostics with or without the CPU connected A system can be wired and debugged in stages without a program ever having been written m Diagnostics will detect I O block additions and deletions at remote locations m Selectable Input Filter Times permit customizing input response to ambient electrical environment Longer filter times can be used to reject electrical noise in harsh environments m Redundancy features can be used to provide protection from cable breaks interface module failure or CPU failure Redundancy features also permit the use of multiple CPUs for distributed control or data monitoring
283. propriate power source to terminals C a 6 and 7 For AC block power connect the source to nE the H terminal and neutral to the N terminal For DC block power connect the source to the DC Q 1 terminal and the return to the DC terminal dl Olg a l 5 GND Wiring for I O Devices Power m d ds 7 Hor DC Typical wiring for various configurations is shown p d Wiring for Voltage Outputs If the load requires 0 Em acm to 5 volts power connect the load across the VOUT EP aa 5 and RTN terminals circuits 5 and 6 only Attach a S13 GND jumper across the RTN and JMP terminals yo Tes EO 7 2 If the load requires a different voltage range M P Oise end connect it across the VOUT and RTN terminals Do 0 850 Ohm mm S 17 tour 79 not jumper the RTN and JMP terminals Install an soan CJ NC ics RTN S appropriate resistor across the OUT and JMP 0 5V hi P B Ms A terminals For example the maximum voltage Voltage Qal am 3 obtainable if a 500 ohm resistor is used is Application 2 eam 0 10mA 4 S 23 VOUT Vmax 20mA 5002 10V coad lt n 24 IOUT e 0 20V MAX PS 25 RIN ja Wiring for Current Outputs If the load requires Pour ES UN URS current in the 4 to 20mA range connect it between a CN h e on GETS the OUT and RTN terminals for circuits 1 cis e M S ew 2 through 6 p 9 30 RTN E Sst MP j w Q32 GND User Specified Resistor 1K Q Maximum 12 6 Genius I O Dis
284. r For a new block Configuration Protection is disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps DISABLED tgl entr nxt 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT 120A 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection Press F4 next to return to the first configuration display 14 16 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 15 ThermocoupleInput Blocks are primarily used to monitor temperatureinputs from standard thermocouples They can also be used to measure low level voltage input signals Two blocksareavailable m 115 VAC 125 VDCThermocoupleBlock IC660BBA103 m 24 48 VDC ThermocoupleBlock IC660BBA023 They are the same except for the power supply Features A Thermocouple block has six input circuits in three isolated groups 10V common mode voltage maximum allowed between 2 points ina group Each group has two thermocouple input circuits and two remote cold junction compensation inputs Group to group isolation is 300 volts Each input can interface to type J K T E B R S and N 14 AWG Nicrosil vs Nisil thermocouples The block provides cold junction compensation for all thermocoupleinput measurements Each channel can be configured to use an internal sensor an external sensor or a user defined value for cold junction compensation An external signal from a remote junction can be either a voltage XJV or a current
285. rcuit press F1 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display User supplied Compensation Value This value is entered only if user supplied compensation was selected for a channel and the units are C or E The range for the compensation value is 327 67mV The compensation value is a mV value not an engineering units value During operation the block will automatically add this value to the measured input voltage BEFORE calibrating and converting voltage to tenths of degrees Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 This screen appears once for each input configured as U on the USER COMP VALUE Compensation Method screen The first of these is indicated on IN3 97 1201 line 2 If a compensation value has already been entered for the 0 00mv input indicated on line 2 that value appears on line 3 To enter gt chng nxt a new compensation value for the input press F2 chng 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr 3 If U has been selected as the compensation method for more than one input press F1 gt to select the next input Enter additional compensation values as needed 4 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 15 Thermocouple 6 Input Blocks 15 13 Input Offset Value For each channel an offset value can be specified to correct for observed measurement inaccuracy The range for this offset value is 100 00C or 100 00F
286. rcuit is disabled it will be necessary to clear each Failed Switch fault detected by the block If the application requires such a configuration block version IC660BB5101 no Failed Switch diagnostic should be used Open Wire Diagnostic The block automatically performs this diagnostic on any circuit configured as a tristate input It will detect an electrical not mechanical malfunction In addition to being configured as a tristate input the circuit must have a 5 1K ohm 1 2 Watt or larger non inductive resistor installed across the actual dry contacts of the input device such as across the field device terminals 241547 Normal Thresholds H Tri state Thresnolds O H B B ON H 4V ON OFF H 8V S 60 60 N 40 40 a OFF OPEN WIRE e N N oN With the switch closed ON state the circuit senses the low source impedance With the switch open OFF state the circuit senses the added resistance If a wire is broken cut or removed impedance becomes very high The block will transmit 0 as the state of the input and send an OPEN WIRE message Devices such as photo sensors electronic high speed counters instrumentation fiber optic sensors and similar electronic devices cannot be monitored for Open Wire conditions Such devices should be set up as standard not tristate inputs GE offers compatible input devices including a 5 1K ohm monitoring resistor with its line of General Pu
287. rded on a copy of the Configuration Worksheet printed on the next page GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 12 Current source Analog 6 Output Blocks 12 7 12 6 Current source Analog Output Blocks Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N Block Number 0 31 Reference Address through Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Redundancy Features Redundancy Mode None Standby Outputs Default 2 5 10 sec BSM Present Y N BSM Controller Y N Circuit Features Outputs 1 2 3 4 5 References From To Report Faults Y N Channel Active Y N Scaling Points Low Pt eng units Low Pt uA High Pt eng units High Pt uA Hold Last State Y N Default Values eng units Output Feedback Enabled Y N Output Feedback Time 0 to 255mS Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Report Faults to CPU Fault reports to the host can be disabled or enabled for any circuit If fault reporting is enabled the block sends a message to the host if any fault occurs on that circuit If Fault reporting is disabled the block does not send fault reports to the CPU Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the block detects faults on the circuit and takes appropriate action If a fault occurs the
288. reading that matches a known measurement point At 100C changing the RTD Resistance value by 0 1 ohm changes the temperature measurement by 0 37C At 850C changing the RTD Resistance value by 0 1 ohm changes the temperature measurement by 1 34C 14 12 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Calculating RTD Resistance If itis necessary to calculate RTD Resistance follow these steps 1 Select high and low resistance values for the RTD They should represent the span over which the RTD is expected to operate Appropriate values should be provided in the manufacturer s documentation If not measure two resistance values RTD Resistance W Measure lower RTD resistance In this example resistance 220 is 200 0Wat 270C Measure upper RTD resistance In this example resistance A is 220 0Wat 320C 270 320 Temp C 2 Calculate the slope of a straight line between the two chosen points Change in Resistance 2200 2000 7 Change in Temperature 820C 270C 3 Calculate the RTD Resistance at OC Slope 0 40 C RTD Resistance 0 Lower Resistance Slope x Lower Temperature 200 00 0 4 Q C x 270 C 92 00 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 14 RTD 6 Input Blocks 14 13 Alpha This entry specifies the Alpha value of an RTD in micro ohms ohm degree C The default Alpha value depends on which type of Linearization is configured for that circuit
289. remains either on or off for the length of the Filter Time the block recognizes its state For example 242504 OFF gt ON gt STATE bi 20mS gt SIGNAL Sampled Inputs Sampled Inputs Sampled Inputs ON for 5mS ON for 30mS OFF for 3mS not recognized recognized by block not recognized IF FILTER TIME 20mS An input filter helps reject spurious noise spikes and multiple inputs generated by the bounce of mechanical devices In controlled noise free environments signals generated by clean solid state electronics may be unnecessarily slowed by a filter delaying system response In such an environment no additional filter time is needed In noisy environments select a longer filter time to prevent noise from possibly causing erratic or unsafe system operations The filter time can be 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 or 100mS Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the currently selected filter time If this INPUT FILTR TIME time should be changed press F2 tgl to display the other filter REF times FILTER 10mS 2 To save anew selection press F3 entr tgl entr nxt 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 9 32 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 9 11 L9 I O Circuit Type Anearlier configuration step selected the Block I O type on the Program Block ID screen That step determined whether the b
290. reports to the host can be disabled or enabled for any circuit If fault reporting is enabled the block sends a message to the host if any fault occurs on that circuit Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the block will detect faults on the circuit and take appropriate actions The block s Unit OK LED will blink when a fault occurs and a fault report will be sent to a Hand held Monitor The fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the block If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line3 shows the current Report Faults configuration of each REPORT FAULT 97 circuit circuits are shown on line 2 for reference Lu oI Io I I sce oe YYYYYY 2 To move the cursor and select a circuit for configuration press gt tgl entr nxt PEE 3 To change a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Channel Active If a channel is not wired or if a channel is wired but should not report diagnostics that channel should be configured as inactive The block processes input data from the channel but does not perform fault detection on it The block s Unit OK LED does not indicate faults for inactive
291. return to the DC terminal Wiring for I O Devices Typical wiring for various configurations is shown at right Self powered or externally powered transmitters are wired differently from those powered by the block External Resistors for Grounded Output Loads If both of the block s output loads are grounded and the loads are widely separated by distance an external resistor should be installed in each load s return line to the block This will prevent possible damage to the block caused by the significant voltage differences that may occur between the two ground points 10 ohm resistors are suggested 243730 BSM O TAR a 8 C m E Le FE __ Fg a Q 5 GND Power 9 6 Hor DC 7 Nor DC Ge NC 99 BSM N 10 BSM 0 850 Ohm 4 O out Load ES 9 12 RIN JJ 13 GND Q14 OUT 72 NX 915 RTN S 2 Wire Circuit Q16 GND Sh OW I EXO ransmitter 2 S18 IN gt t Q19 COM Jj 3 Wire Circuit n 2 GND PWR i 21 EXC Transmitter OUT MM S 22 IN COM S 233 COM 4 Wire Circuit hg c G 4 GND DG 1 2 EXC 7 Transmitter Fd OE IN T I SRM SS 27 Com DE 28 GND d 4 Wire Circuit
292. rheating due to the increased power dissipation in the block at these high currents Exceeding these limits may cause an overtemperature fault GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks 5 9 F 5 10 ield Wiring Allfield wiring connections to these blocks are standard screw clamp type terminals which can be operated with a flat or phillips head screwdriver Each terminal accepts one AWG 12 or two AWG 14 wires The minimum recommended wire size is AWG 22 The terminals can accommodate spade or ring terminals up to 0 27 inch 6 85 mm in width with a minimum opening for a 6 screw and up to 0 20 inch 5 1 mm depth from the screw center to the back barrier Power Connections Up to five separate power sources can be connected to the Terminal Assembly Circuit power and block power do not have to be the same type Block power may be DC while circuit power is AC or the reverse Isolation is rated to withstand 250 volts AC or DC continuous between any group and ground or between any two groups For block power connect a 115 volt AC or 125 VDC source to the top H terminal 5 Connect neutral to the N terminal 6 All H terminals are internally bussed as are all N terminals Circuit Power Each circuit pair can have its own power supply All circuits on an Isolated block must use either AC or DC power If circuit power is AC both circuits of a pair must be wired to the same AC phase However different
293. round or between any two groups Transient rating is 2000V peak for 10 sec Control power for the block is tapped off the input output device voltages wired to the terminals The block has terminals for a separate power source for the internal electronics The block power supply can be independently either AC or DC The block need not be powered in the same manner as the circuits Features GRIS 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks 244482 E S J Ao quo GENIUS E 115V 50 60 Hz RS 125 VDC Isolated In Out z s GE Fanuc S z sss sod I H N H mo uw z LUE Li H EN 3 8 EH ZN t ZH IN C 2g 20 od 20 Pays Pueg pe Mee n 2g 2g 2g 2g 2A Pt Max 15A Max Total B Configurablefeatures of these blocks include AC DcCcircuitvoltage Output Pulse Testcapability Selectable Input Filter Time from 10mS to 100mS Output powerup defaults Output Hold LastState or default CPU Redundancytype BusSwitching Module control GEK 90686D 2 Electronic fusing is built into each circuit used as an output The circuit is shut down 5uS after a short occurs It can be easily restarted from a Hand held Monitor or from the CPU The blocks perform these additional diagnostic checks m Overtemperature Open Wire
294. rpose Control sensor devices Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks 5 7 No Load Diagnostic This optional diagnostic can be enabled or disabled for individual outputs For a new block outputs are configured to report No Load conditions In this configuration energizing the output activates a no load current level If the load does not continuously draw 50mA from the output circuit the block sends a NO LOAD message Because this diagnostic monitors both current and voltage a No Load condition may cause an HHM monitoring an operating block to display 0 for the circuit although there is voltage at the output and the circuit LED is on This diagnostic should be disabled for circuits on which very small loads small relays transformers or indicating lamps will draw less than 50mA Overload Shutdown Like No load reporting this diagnostic is also optional for individual outputs on the block In addition to the protection provided by the block s built in Short Circuit detection Overload Shutdown provides further protection for output loads field wiring and switching devices AC Output Overload For an AC output overload occurs if a load exceeds 2 8 amps 2 0 amps RMS continuously for 100mS The block will turn the output off and send an OVERLOAD message if Overload Shutdown is enabled a40646 45 7 TYPICAL 3A SHORT DESTRUCTIVE MAXIMUM 45 CIRCUIT p FUSE MINIMUM 35 FAULT LEVEL PEAK
295. rrectly This could result in faulty block operation Replacing a Block or Terminal Assembly Do not add or remove a Genius I O block or Terminal Assembly while the system is operating unless the bus has been attached using a bus connector see page 2 5 or the bus wires have been soldered together Adding or removing an entire Genius I O block or a Terminal Assembly without taking these precautions may disrupt communications This may cause erratic operation or lead to system shutdown 2 12 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 If a removable connector has been used or the signal wires are soldered together the block s Terminal Assembly can be replaced without powering down the bus If possible do not remove the Terminal Assembly until a replacement is available Then replace the Terminal Assembly or block by following these steps carefully 1 If the block is still receiving power remove power from the block Take care to ensure continued operation of any other devices wired to the same power supply Hazardous voltages may be present at the block s field wiring terminals while the block is receiving power Death or injury may result from contact with field wiring terminals 2 Ifa bus connector has been used remove the bus connector from the Terminal Assembly Do not remove the bus wiring from the connector The connector will maintain continuity of data transfer on the bus
296. rs or wiring after powering up the block Hazardous voltages exist and death or injury may result 4 Apply power to the block Continue with the configuration instructions that follow GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 3 Configuration 3 3 Starting Configuration Note If you are configuring a block that is on an operating bus the HHM must be the ONLY Hand held Monitor plugged into a block on the bus 1 Begin with the Hand held Monitor turned off Attach the HHM to the block A MEA dem 242307 D V OJOJOlOlOloOlo olo ololololo OJlOIOIOIOOlO O NO 2 Turn the Hand held Monitor on After the HHM completes its powerup sequence the Home menu appears The Hand held Monitor s Change Block Configuration option must be enabled to complete the instructions in this section For a new block the HHM s Change Block ID and Change Block Baud options must also be enabled 3 4 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Displaying the Configuration Main Menu To begin block configuration select F3 Configuration The configuration Main Menu appears Configuration Main Menu F1 PROG BLOCK ID F2 CONFIG BLOCK F3 COPY CONFIG FA F1 F2 F3 PROG
297. rt faults to CPU 1 resistors for grounded ide scalling circuits specifications under overange diagnostics wiring instructions Current source 6 Input Te Blocks alarm thresholds 13 1 BSM controller 13 13 BSM present uu catalog numbers A 1 compatibility configurable features and defaults configuration worksheet CPU redundanc 13 14 diagnostics dimensions 16 2 features ERES heat generation 16 4 input conversion time 13 11 inputs operation PLC references E B 1 report faults to CPU 1 scaling circuits 13 specifications wiring instructions ns 35 put Analog Blocks 12 1 BSM controller BSM present catalog numbers A 1 channel active 12 9 compatibility configurable features and defaults su i Index 1 Index Index 2 configuration worksheet 12 8 CPU redundance 12 15 diagnostics 12 5 dimensions features feedback time field wiring 12 6 heat generation operation output default time output feedback error output feedback testing outputs 12 3 outputs default values outputs hold last state 12 13 over underenge diagnostics PLC references required report faults to CPU scaling circuits specifications D Device Number B 7 B 8 See also Genius I O System and Commu nications User s Manual Diagnostics 1 6 See also individual block listings E Electronics Assembly in
298. s Voltagemeasurement Range Resolution Accuracy at 25C Bandwidth of input amplifier filter Temperaturecoefficient 25 0mV to 150mV Less than 4 uV Less than 10uV error typ 20uV max 8 Hz 2uV C typical Internal ColdJunction Measurement Range Offset at 25C Linearity Resolution Temperaturecoefficient 0 to 60C 2C typ User adjustable to zero at any temperature 0 15C Less than 0 01C 0 05 per C External Cold Junction Measurement Range Scalefactors Resolution Accuracy 25 0C to 4150 0 C 1 0C per millivolt 1 0K per microampere Lessthan 0 01 C 0 1C Input update time all channels 2 0 sec typ 3 0 sec max Open wire detection response less than 5 0 seconds Diagnostics Open Wire Overrange Underrange High Alarm Low Alarm Internal Fault Environmental Operating Temperature OC to 60C 32F to 140F Storage Temperature 40C to 100 C 40F to 212F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration 5 10 Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200 Hz at 1G 15 2 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Block Operation A Thermocouple Input Block has three isolated pairs of inputs Transformers isolate power and optical couplers provide signal isolation For each pair of inputs 1 After filtering each signal input is sequentially switched into a common amplifier whose output is applied to a volt
299. s per block RTDlinearization Resistancemeasurementrange 0 5 C typical 1 0 maximum 5C typical 10C maximum Once every 400 ms 800 ms or 1600 ms 400 ms 800 ms 1600 ms Platinum DIN 43760 Nickel DIN 43760 Copper Linear 0 to 50000 Diagnostics Inputshorted Internal fault Wiring error Open wire Overrange Underrange High Alarm Low Alarm Environmental Operatingtemperature OC to 60C 32F to 140F Storagetemperature 40C to 100C 40F to 212F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration 5 10 Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200 Hz at 1G Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Block Operation For each pair of inputs a multiplexer switches the A D converter between the RTD inputs and internal reference resistors that are used for self calibration The following diagram shows one pair of inputs 242226 ISOL RECTIFIER POWER ECL O INPUT DC M REGULATOR POWER REGULATOR TRANSFORMER i4 O POWER I EX m AID Y MUX CONVERTER OPTO RTD couper 4 e O RTN gt amp 29 svrc OPTO _ PROCESSOR coupter l REF Pal CURRENT q Wo SOURCE 63 vl SIG QUAD __O OPTO COUPLER RTD r lt ix lt O SERIAL et 0 lt
300. s controller The bus controller stores this data until it receives the bus token Then it directs output data to each of the blocks on the bus and commands to the appropriate devices Even blocks that have no outputs receive a null message from the bus controller while it has the token This permits the blocks to indicate that they are on line with the CPU and to detect loss of communications should that occur Bus Outputs Controller e token If a block detects a fault the following things happen 1 Theblock s Unit OK LED blinks to show that a fault exists 2 Unless the fault reporting feature has been disabled for the circuit where the fault occurred the block automatically sends a fault message to the bus controller and or monitoring CPU on the next available bus scan This fault information is always available to the Hand held Monitor which continually polls the block for updates Inputs and Fault Message Bus from Block 3 Controller 1 2 3 4 e e token E fault 3 Forcertain types of faults the block takes corrective action in order to prevent possible hazardous operation or damage to the block For example for some output faults the block automatically turns the output off Faults may be cleared from the Hand held Monitor or the CPU If the condition that caused the fault has not been corrected
301. s diagnostic is only reported to the CPU following a Pulse Test although it is available to the Hand held Monitor at all times 5 14 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Input Filter Time The block continuously samples an input for the length of the configured filter time period If the input remains either on or off for the length of the Filter Time the block recognizes its state For example 242504 OFF ON gt STATE rt 20mS SIGNAL Sampled Inputs Sampled Inputs Sampled Inputs ON for 5mS ON for 30mS OFF for 3mS not recognized recognized by block not recognized IF FILTER TIME 20mS The input filter helps reject spurious noise spikes and multiple inputs generated by the bounce of mechanical devices An input filter time of 10mS to 100mS can be selected for the block The default filter time is 10mS no filter In controlled noise free environments signals generated by clean solid state electronics may be unnecessarily slowed by a filter delaying system response In such an environment no additional filter time is needed In noisy environments use a longer filter time to prevent noise from possibly causing erratic or unsafe system operations For a block with tristate inputs the minimum recommended Input Filter Time is 50mS Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the currently selected filter time If th
302. s must be an integer For greater resolution increase the configured values by a Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 convenient multiple such as 10 or 100 That is to measure tenths of degrees you would configure low and high engineering units values of 10x the actual measured temperature Or to measure hundredths of feet per second you would configure engineering units values of 100x the measured velocity 7 After each entry press F3 entr 8 Enter the associated uA value s If you are measuring the process online enter the value read from the HHM s status screen If you are measuring the process with the block offline enter the signal level obtained with an external measuring device 9 Tosave the new entries for a circuit press F3 entr again 10 Press F4 next to return to the status screen 11 If you are using measured values set the process to a different condition Repeat the necessary steps above 12 Press F4 nxt to return to the status screen From the status screen select F2 scale to select another circuit for scaling 13 When you are finished scaling circuits press F4 nxt to configure additional block features GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 12 Current source Analog 6 Output Blocks 12 11 Output Feedback Testing After the Feedback Time see below period has elapsed the block compares feedback from each output to its output value received from the CPU
303. scharge time 2 Amechanical contact is used in series with a driven output coil Install additional suppression such as a series resistor capacitor snubber to counteract electrical noise that occurs when the coil is switched by the external contact instead of the block Resistor capacitor suppressors are preferred for low current high inductance loads that generate a high rate of change in voltage dv dt High power loads beyond the capacity of RCs use voltage clamping devices such as MOVs which are usually available from the manufacturer of the device Resistor capacitor suppressors are also preferred to MOVs or transorbs because they reduce EMI in addition to absorbing load energy In general the capacitor for an RC snubber should be the same value in microfarads as the coil current in amperes with the voltage rating at least twice the peak supply voltage The resistor is usually equal to the DC resistance of the coil With DC coils the capacitor is usually replaced with a flyback diode oriented with the anode to the negative terminal of the coil The resistor helps maintain a fast dropout of the device it can be eliminated if this is not of concern Most control and contactor manufacturers make suppressor accessories that can be conveniently mounted on their devices The following types are available from GE General Purpose Control Bloomington IL 110 180 VAC CR4XS1B 380 480 VAC CR4XS1C 24 48 VAC CR4ZS1J Diode 12 25
304. separate power is required for 4 20mA signals Each output provides power and control of a 4 to 20m4A currentloop This power is isolated from the rest of the block The outputs and BSM circuitry are electrically common Output accuracy is 0 15 at 25C Output resolution is 64A mm QD E IOUT RTN GND IOUT RTN GND IOUT RTN GND IOUT RTN GND vou1 IOUT RTN JMP GND vout IOUT RTN JMP GND zio quo Emp A dedicated digital output is provided to drive a Bus Switching Module when a Current Source Analog block is installed in a redundant bus cable system Sino Additionalconfigurablefeaturesinclude Output Hold Last State or default m Circuit scaling to engineering units values qang AEAT TAT IT TID IT A ETE EH I A EET TI VOV QV OV VO QJ OOS J VVV GVOV VSVOVgegg bino gindno samo inane emame emamo p ndno 50mA Pt Max Output feedback checking and feedback time m CPURedundancy Faultreporting can be enabled or disabled circuit by circuit These blocks automatically perform the followingdiagnosticchecks y j Output Overrange and Underrange m Output Feedback less than 1 5mA For a Series Six PLC the CPU must be rev 105 or later For a Series Six Plus PLC rev 110 or later is required The programming software must be Co m p ati bi ity Logicmaster 6 rel 4 02 or later For a Series Five PLC the CPU must be rev 3 0 or
305. signal level that exceeds 24mA The block clamps the output to the selected range limit to protect external hardware Output Feedback Error This diagnostic is used to detect wiring errors or other hardware faults on output circuits After waiting for a configurable period of time the block compares each output s current to its last commanded output value If the difference is greater than 25014 the block reports a Feedback Error The block continues sending new values from the CPU to the output Nuisance diagnostics may be reported if the Output Feedback Time selected for the circuit is too brief If this happens increase the feedback time or disable output feedback testing Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 GEK 90486D 2 Field Wiring Terminals 5 through 32 are used for input power Bus Switching Module control and field wiring devices These terminals accept AWG 22 to AWG 14 wires Do not overtorque the terminal screws The ground GND terminal 5 is for block safety It is connected to the block chassis and to terminals 13 16 20 24 28 and 32 which are marked GND Each channel has one ground terminal for shield termination if desired Power Source Wiring Connect an appropriate power source to terminals 6 and 7 For AC block power connect the source to the H terminal and neutral to the N terminal For DC block power connect the source to the DC terminal and the
306. ssor Opto Data control Dto A Isol i E n i lili i 24VDC RTN P S Case mO GND Ground 7777 Two additional A to D channels are used to check the two output channels after a programmable settling time The block will indicate a fault if the feedback from these channels does not match the commanded value to within 2504A Output Data Format Each bus scan the CPU sends a Current source Analog I O block 4 bytes of output data Each analog output consists of 2 bytes of engineering units data Byte Description 0 Output channel 1 bits 0 7 1 Output channel 1 bits 8 15 2 Output channel 2 bits 0 7 3 Output channel 2 bits 8 15 The block automatically translates this engineering units value into the analog output signal used by the output device Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Hand held Monitor I O Display Inputs and outputs are always reported and received as whole integers For example if the current value of a temperature input was 116 37E it could be reported as 116 degrees or 1163 tenths of degrees or 11637 hundredths of degrees Here the example input configured as hundredths of degrees is input 1 on the Monitor Block screen REF 97 1201 I1 11637 I2 10838 gt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 11 Current source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Blocks 11 5 Diagnostics 11 6 Current source AnalogI O Blocks perform
307. stalling 2 12 mechanical ke ing 2 11 removing Error messages during configuration B 6 F Failed Switch diagnostic Seeindividual block listings Faults clearing 1 6 false I O faults occur at random several occur at same time 18 4 Features and benefits of Genius I O G GeniusI O Blocks catalog numbers configuration procedure See also individual block listings dimensions grounding heat generation installation instructions See also individual block listings locations for mounting footprint 2 2 parts of reference usage removing 2 12 space between troubleshooting types of 1 3 Grounding I O blocks H Hand held Monitor configuring Reference Address Bs menus See also Hand held Monitor datasheet Heat dissipation 16 3 Heat dissipation in enclosures 16 5 I O circuits not working I Opointredundancy Input thresholds Seeindividual block list ings Inputs See also individual block listings not correct CPU is Series Six PLC not received by CPU selecting block I O type B 10 tristate Installation general instructions See also individual block listings mounting footprint Installing additional suppression b 7 GEK 90486D 2 GEK 90486D 2 L LEDs UNIT OK and I O Enabled blink at startup UNIT OK blinks 1 6 C lies blinks indicating circuit fault 18 3 UNIT OK off at startup 182 Loads small interfacing to AC blocks Loca
308. stic 242533 SHORT HI H i Rs ON AA _ 50 ON OFF THRESHOLD I ipm OFF N SHORT LO N With the switch closed the circuit senses the resistor With the switch open the circuit sees a high impedance If the input is shorted to the high or low side of the line the circuit sees a low impedance Short low and high limits are 1096 and 9096 respectively Rs must be compatible with the thresholds For the default thresholds and a dry contact input use a 3 9K ohm resistor for Rs Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s M anual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 s Using O pen Wire and Shorted Wire Diagnostics Together Open Wire and Shorted Wire diagnostics can be selected for the same circuit The circuit must include both a series resistor Rs and a parallel resistor Rp to detect Open Short conditions from a dry contact sensor For the default thresholds use a 3 9K ohm resistor for Rs and a 22K ohm resistor for R p a42338 90 SHORTHI H Rs 50 ON OFF ON AVA THRESHOLD Rp OFF IN 20 OPEN OFF THRESHOLD OPEN g 1090 SHORTLO N If sensors with non zero voltage On state drop or non zero Off state leakage current are used the On Off and Open Off thresholds can be changed This flexibility provides diagnostics capability with a wide range of sensors Some solid state sensors may not require additional external resistance to be used Consult the
309. such on the Hand held Monitor or at the CPU with its programming device The applicable units of measure should be recorded separately on a meter or display When scaling a circuit it is important to select units that will produce adequate resolution in the final integer value Engineering units scaling values can be increased by a convenient multiple such as 10 or 100 as long as the resulting engineering units values calculated by the block will not exceed the limit of 32 767 On a new block circuit scaling is set to 14A per engineering unit If this is appropriate it will not need to be changed Or each input can be independently scaled The scaling values selected should provide the maximum range for the application s engineering units Scaling can also be used to compensate for field device inaccuracies Entering Scaling Values The most accurate scaling comes from actual measurements The process must be set to two distinctly different conditions so two engineering units measurements can be taken If the block is online to the process it automatically provides the signal level for each engineering units measurement If the block is not online to the process the signal level associated with each engineering units value must also be measured external to the block If the process cannot be measured you can estimate scaling values Estimated values will not be as accurate as measured values If you are NOT measuring the process
310. t chg 1 The screen displays the low and high alarm thresholds for the 97 first RTD input To select the next circuit press F1 gt to move the cursor from LOW to HI then press F1 gt again 0 1 2 To change the threshold shown at the cursor location press F2 nxt tel GEK 90486D 2 3 To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display Chapter 14 RTD 6 Input Blocks 14 15 Input Filter Time The Filter Time determines how frequently the block will sample new values for each input Filter time may be 400mS 14 bit resolution 800mS 15 bit resolution or 1600mS 16 bit resolution Longer filter times integrate input values over time to reject noise and improve resolution The default filter time is 1600mS which is suitable for most applications Change it only if faster sampling is needed Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps The screen displays the selected filter time l Ifthis is not appropriate press F2 tgl to change it To save the INPUT FILTR TIME new selection press F3 entr REF 97 120A 400mg 2 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Configuration Protection After the block is configured its Configuration Protection should be enabled to prevent unwanted changes from a Hand held Monitor and from the CPU Configuration Protection can only be set and removed by a Hand held Monito
311. t to return to the first configuration display tgl entr nxt 15 16 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 16 Sizing Enclosures This chapter explains how to decide what size enclosure to use based upon the sizes of the blocks it will contain and upon the amount of heat they will generate during operation Space Needed for Blocks GEK 90486D 2 When mounting I O blocks in an enclosure space must be provided around each block for wiring and airflow Allow 3 inches to 6 inches about 8 cm to 15 cm of empty space at the top of an enclosure Also allow at least 1 5 inches 3 8 cm between the sides of adjacent blocks and 3 inches 7 6 cm above and below blocks As a rough guide each block will require a space approximately 12 inches 30 cm high 5 inches 13 cm wide and 6 inches 15 2 cm deep If blocks will be installed vertically one above the other minimum 3 inches 7 6 cm allow space for blocks to be staggered This permits hot air generated by lower blocks to pass between upper blocks Place blocks that generate more heat toward the top The following illustration shows how six blocks could be mounted in an enclosure 24 inches 61 cm high and 20 inches 50 5 cm wide There must be space for free flow of air along each
312. t be changed only if the block should be able to receive output data from two CPUs In Hot Standby mode a block receives output data from both CPUs but uses the data from only one of them to drive its outputs The block prefers outputs sent by the bus interface module Bus Controller or PCIM with Device Number 31 If those outputs are not available the block will use outputs from the bus interface module with Device Number 30 If no outputs from a CPU are available a Genius I O block s outputs will either Hold Last State or go to their predefined Output Default state Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CPU REDUNDANCY REF 97 128A 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection HOT STBY MODE 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Configuration Protection After the block is configured its Configuration Protection should be enabled to prevent unwanted changes from a Hand held Monitor and from the CPU Configuration Protection can only be set and removed by a Hand held Monitor For a new block Configuration Protection is disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps DISABLED tgl entr nxt 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT 128A 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection 3 Press F4 next to return to the first configuration display 10 22 Genius I O Discrete and A
313. t loads from switching transient pulses and lengthen the contact life of the relays Use a diode connected in parallel with a DC inductive load or an R C network across the contacts SHIELD IN shipped from factory Em NOTE 842489 k Make no connections to NC terminals s Voltage per Isolated Group AC 5 to 250 VAC 1 SERIAL 1 or 2 SERIAL 2 DC 5 to 220 VDC 115 VAC set up when SHIELD OUT H O H HJ wf ES aH J J2 N ME ON 115 VAC 230 VAC 1 Block Power Options COM NC H LOAD O Pi 115 VAC N Sade A LOAD O 4 Example 115 VAC Output Connections l SGOSSOOSOOOOSOSGOSSOSSSOOSOSoSSSG N m pE QO NC COM i1 Falls 1 COM 24 VDO LOAD 9 13 ar is LOAD O 4 16 Example 24 VDC Output Connections 7 5 Using a Relay Block as a BSM Controller Both types of Relay Block IC660BBR100 and BBR101 can be used to control a Bus Switching Module There are two different BSM versions available It is important to match the BSM to the type of voltage that will power the block s outputs If this voltage will be 24 48 VDC BSM version IC660BSM021 is required If the voltage will be 115 VAC or 125 VDC IC660BSM120 is needed instead Connect the BSM to the block as shown below Block and Points Powered by 115 VAC If
314. ter the block turns the output off within microseconds The block will try to restart the load if several attempts are unsuccessful the output circuit is forced off and the block sends a SHORT CIRCUIT message To restore normal operation to output the cause of the current surge must be removed then the diagnostic must be cleared from the HHM or the CPU Failed Switch Diagnostic The block automatically monitors all circuits for several types of faults which may be reported as Failed Switch diagnostics For an output Failed Switch is reported if the circuit s switch state is not the same as its commanded state The block sends a FAILED SWITCH message identifying the failed circuit The logic state of the circuit is set to OFE When an output fault occurs the actual condition of the output switch is not known If the output switch has failed shorted or closed current flow is not interrupted when the block forces the output state OFF Action external to the block must be taken to remedy the problem The FAILED SWITCH message can alert personnel or cause program logic to be activated possibly shutting off power to the block I O section or process Note False Failed Switch diagnostics may be reported if an external device like a manual switch is wired in parallel with an output Even if Fault Reporting for the circuit is disabled it will be necessary to clear each Failed Switch fault detected by the block If the application requires suc
315. ter a high alarm is reported the temperature may drop back to an acceptable level The block continues to supply the actual temperature data However to re enable high alarm detection it is necessary to clear the existing High Alarm fault report This diagnostic indicates an input circuit measurement below the minimum expected for RTD type It may indicate a fault in the wiring or in the RTD Instead of reporting the actual input value the block uses the appropriate Underrange value see below An internal fault occurs if one or more of the internal auto calibration readings for a pair of channels is out of tolerance When this fault occurs the block reports a value of zero for each channel of the faulty pair The block s Electronics Assembly should be replaced A wiring error fault occurs if connections between the RTD and the block s Terminal Assembly are incorrect The incorrect connections may cause faulty input data to be reported Field wiring should be changed to match the wiring diagram indicated on the block s faceplate The block reports an Open Wire diagnostic if there is less current than expected for the input type on that circuit An Open Wire diagnostic may also mean that the input circuit excitation current is not present The RTD may be missing or faulty or the RTD is not connected to the block The block sends an Overrange message if the Celsius or Fahrenheit input value exceeds expected maximum positive value limits are
316. the application program Use the HHM to step through the block configuration screens the HHM does not have to be connected directly to the block The final screen that appears is the Configuration Protection screen 1 Press F2 Toggle to select DISABLED 2 Press F3 Enter to save the selection 3 Press F4 Next to go to the first block configuration display or AMENU to return to the Configuration menu or HOME to return to the Home menu Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Setting Up a Block for Off line Configuration It may be most convenient to configure new I O blocks offline at a central location Each block will need to be connected to an appropriate source of power and to earth ground To prepare a block for off line configuration 1 Connect a 75 ohm resistor across the Serial 1 and Serial 2 terminals or use the 75 ohm terminator plug IC660BLM508 Two of these plugs are provided with each Bus Controller 2 Attach a grounding strap to the ground screw on the side of the block Be sure that the strap is connected to earth ground If the block is not properly grounded hazardous voltages may exist Death or injury may result 3 Wire the block to the power source S UG 242468 T 5Bom Terminator Plug De To Appropriate AC or DC Power DO NOT TOUCH the connecto
317. the block is connected to a single bus or to just one trunk of a dual bus BSM Present should be set to NO the default Change it to YES if the block is located in a cluster connected to dual busses via a Bus Switching Module Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the BSM Present configuration press F2 tgl BSM PRESENT REF STATUS 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr NO 9 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt BSM Controller A BSM Controller is a block to which a Bus Switching Module is directly attached which controls the BSM s switching action The default setting for this feature is NO Change it to YES if the block will be a BSM Controller To change this configuration with a Hand held Monitor the block must first be configured for BSM PRESENT The BSM CONTROLLER menu will not appear if BSM PRESENT is set to NO Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the configuration press F2 tgl BSM CONTROLLER REF STATUS 2 To save the new selection press F3 entr NO 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt 7 10 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Output Default Time When a Bus Switching Module is used the Output Default Time must be long enough to allow the BSM to switch without causing outputs to def
318. the block sends another fault message after the fault is cleared If the block has shut down a circuit in response to a fault condition and the condition has been corrected the block restores that circuit to full operation as soon as the fault is cleared Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Features and Benefits of Genius I O The potential benefits to be derived from using Genius I O products include m Reduced software engineering m Faster startup m Installation cost savings m Reduction in costly downtime Genius I O provides these cost savings through Configuration Flexibility Many discrete Genius I O blocks have programmable I O circuits allowing any mix of inputs and outputs That means a single 8 circuit block would be field configurable to any of 256 distinct combinations of inputs and outputs Intelligence With a Genius I O system you can program many conventionally hard wired features of I O systems With GeniusI O filter time constants default values and other characteristics can be field configured and customized for the attached devices Analog blocks have built in engineering unit scaling The cost and productivity benefits are reduction in initial custom engineering and improved use of equipment Reduced installation costs for wiring terminal blocks conduit and junction boxes Because Genius I O blocks are mounted at the point of control the distribution panels
319. the circuit and take appropriate actions The Unit OK LED will blink when a fault occurs and a fault report is sent to a Hand held Monitor The fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the block If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the current Fault Reports selections for the first 16 REPORT FAULTS circuits On this screen oe Y t fault YYYYYYYNNYNNYYNN TEPOre LAUNIS tgl entr nxt N do not report faults 2 Toselect a circuit press F1 gt 3 To change a selection press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr 4 Press F4 next to display the Report Faults screen for circuits 17 32 5 From the second Report Faults screen press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 9 32 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 9 13 L9 Hold Last State Each output can be independently configured to either hold its last state or to go to its powerup default state if the block loses CPU communications for at least 3 bus scans For a new block Hold Last State is disabled for each output With Hold Last State disabled the block sets the output to its powerup default if CPU communications are lost If Hold Last State is e
320. the diagnostics described below If a fault occurs the block will report it to the Hand held Monitor and take appropriate corrective action Individual circuits can be configured not to send a diagnostic message to the CPU if a fault occurs If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using a Read Diagnostic datagram the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Input Open Wire Diagnostic The block monitors input current levels If input current is below 2mA the block sends an Open Wire message Alarm Thresholds Anindividual low alarm and high alarm threshold can be configured for each input If an input reaches one of its configured limits the block sends a High Alarm or Low Alarm message Since the circuit s current value is also available it is possible to determine how much beyond the limit the input is Only one diagnostic message is sent upon reaching the limit Input Underrange and Overrange Diagnostics The block sends an UNDERRANGE message if current is negative or OmA It sends an OVERRANGE message if the input signal exceeds 25mA Output Underrange and Overrange Diagnostics The block sends an UNDERRANGE message if conversion of the engineering units output it receives from the CPU results in a commanded output less than 0mA It sends an OVERRANGE message if conversion of the engineering units output it receives from the CPU results in an output
321. the extra features are not copied 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped Block IC660CBD100 115 VAC Low leakage 8 Circuit Grouped Block IC660BBD101 115VAC 125VDCIsolatedI OBlock IC660CBS100 115VAC 125VDC IsolatedI OBlock IC660BBS100 or BBS102 115VAC 125VDC IsolatedI OBlock w oFailed Switch IC660BBS101 or BBS103 24 48 VDC 16 Circuit Source I O Block IC660CBD020 24 48 VDC 16 Circuit Source I O Block IC660BBD020 24 48 VDC 16 Circuit Sink I O Block IC660CBD021 24 48 VDC 16 Circuit Sink I O Block IC660BBD021 24 VDC 16 Circuit Source I O Block IC660BBD022 24 VDC 16 Circuit Sink I O Block IC660BBD023 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block IC660BBD110 16 Circuit Relay Block Normally Closed IC660BBR100 16 Circuit Relay Block Normally Open IC660BBR101 12 24 VDC 32 Circuit Source I O Block IC660BBD024 5 12 24VDC32 Circuit Sink I O Block IC660BBD025 24 48 VDC 4 Input 2 Output Analog Block IC660CBA020 24 48 VDC 4 Input 2 Output Analog Block IC660BBA020 115 VAC 4 Input 2 Output Analog Block IC660CBA100 115 VAC 4 Input 2 Output Analog Block IC660BBA100 115VAC 125VDCCurrent source Analog Block IC660BBA104 24 48VDCCurrent source Analog Block IC660BBA024 115VAC 125VDCCurrent source Output Block IC660BBA105 24 48VDCCurrent source Output Block IC660BBA025 115VAC 125VDCCurrent source Input Block IC660BBA106 24 48VDCCurrent source Input Block IC660BBA026 24 48VDCRTD Input Block
322. the new selection OFF 3 Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display tgl entr nxt Note If the block loses communications with BOTH CPUS individual outputs go to their configured Hold Last State or Output Default State Configuration Protection After the block is configured its Configuration Protection should be enabled to prevent unwanted changes from a Hand held Monitor and from the CPU Configuration Protection can only be set and removed by a Hand held Monitor For a new block Configuration Protection is disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection DISABLED 3 Press F4 next to return to the first configuration display tgl entr nxt GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 5 115 VAC 125 VDC Isolated I O Blocks 5 23 Chapter 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block 6 The 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block i D a44483 IC660BBD110 has sixteen discrete input circuits Ie in two banks of eight circuits each Typical inputs are contact closures from switches pushbuttons E 3 or limit switches The block can be used with ES k GENIUS both 2 wire and 3 wire proximity switch inputs PS flos 11 60160 Hz ECC M em nput Control power for the block comes from the mice 2 fs GE Fanuc pow
323. ths of degrees Celsius tenths of degrees Fahrenheit millivolts counts Circuit Features References From To Report Faults Y N Channel Active Y N Thermocouple Type J K T E B R S N L Compensation Method I XJV XJI U Compensation Value 327 67mV Input Offset Value 100 0 Alarm Thresholds Low eng units High eng units GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 15 Thermocouple 6 Input Blocks 15 9 Report Faults to CPU Fault reports to the host can be disabled or enabled for any circuit on a block If fault reporting is enabled for a circuit the block will send a message to the host if any fault occurs on that circuit If Fault reporting is disabled the block will not send fault reports to the CPU for that circuit Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the block will detect faults on the circuit and take appropriate actions The Unit OK LED will blink when a fault occurs and a fault report is sent to a Hand held Monitor The fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the block If the CPU requests diagnostic information from the block using Read Diagnostics datagrams the block returns current diagnostics for all circuits including any with CPU fault reporting disabled Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 Line 3 shows the current Report Faults configuration of each REPORT FAULT 97 circuit circuits are shown on line 2 for re
324. tion increases as the conversion time is lengthened Input resolution is 1uA for 200mS conversion time Input Data Format Each bus scan a Current source Analog I O Block broadcasts 8 bytes of input data Each input consists of 2 bytes of scaled engineering units data Appendix B shows reference usage for a Series 90 Series Six or Series Five PLC Byte Description 0 Input channel 1 bits 0 7 1 Input channel 1 bits 8 15 2 Input channel 2 bits 0 7 3 Input channel 2 bits 8 15 4 Input channel 3 bits 0 7 5 Input channel 3 bits 8 15 6 Input channel 4 bits 0 7 7 Input channel 4 bits 8 15 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 11 Current source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Blocks 11 3 Output Circuits The two independent output circuits are electrically common to each other and the Bus Switching Module outputs but isolated from all other circuits on the block Power for the outputs current loops is provided by the block Output channels use a dual 12 bit digital to analog converter and can independently control currents from OmA to 24mA Output accuracy is 0 15 at 25 C Output resolution is 64A 243729 3 15VDC AAA BSM 15VD i Se oO BSM BSM Switch p i PA urren 1 Sensor i OUT Feedback Current Amp Controller 16 Bit Opto P rocessor counts ia V to F l D A Feedback 12 Bit Proce
325. tions for Genius I O Blocks Mechanical contacts installing in series with coil N NEMA enclosures 16 5 NEMA enclosures heat transfer 16 6 No Load diagnostic See individual block listings Noise general block specifications installing additional suppression Non incendive wiring O 115 VAC 16 Circuit Input Block catalog numbers compatibility configurable features and defaults 6 11 configuration worksheet 6 12 diagnostics dimensions 16 2 features heat generation input filter time inputs 6 3 open wire detection 6 4 operation PLC references required B 1 power connections 6 9 report faults to CPU 6 15 shorted wire detection Index specifications 6 2 thresholds 6 14 thresholds and resistor values 6 6 wiring instructions 6 115 VAC 8 Circuit Grouped I O Block block power connection 4 9 BSM controller BSM present 4 catalog numbers compatibility configurable features and defaults 4 10 configuration worksheet CPU redundancy diagnostics dimensions duplex default state failed switch diagnostic features heat generation I O circuit type input filter time 4 input thresholds inputs A4 LEDs no load diagnostic 4 6 open wire diagnostic 4 6 operation 4 3 outputs 4 4 outputs default states outputs default time outputs hold last state 4 outputs report no load condition 4 16 overload diagnostic overload shutdown 4 overt
326. tput reference For each circuit configured as an output the block will automatically return the actual state of the output in the corresponding input reference For example if circuit 1 is configured as an output then input reference 1 will show the state of output 1 The application program can compare the feedback information with the output data it has sent to the block after an appropriate delay to verify that the output switching device has operated properly and that the load has the proper voltage and current applied 3 10 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Baud Rate Genius I O blocks can use four different baud rates 153 6 Kbaud standard 153 6 Kbaud extended 76 8 Kbaud or 38 4 Kbaud The default is 153 6 K baud standard Lower baud rates may be needed for longer cable lengths However this increases bus scan time 153 6 Kbaud extended provides better noise immunity and allows longer cable lengths than 153 6 Kbaud standard there is a slight increase in scan time Each block s baud rate must be the same as that used by all other devices on the bus or the bus will not operate If baud rate is changed for one device it must be changed for all of them If there are any phase A Genius I O products on the bus see the Genius I O System User s Manual for a list of phase A devices the baud rate for all devices on the bus must be 153 6 Kbaud standard HHM Display
327. tputCharacteristics Outputresolution 12 bit sign Output update frequency Once every 4mS Outputdiagnostics Underrange Overrange Outputload Voltage mode 2000Q or greater Current mode 0 to 300 2 Environmental Operatingtemperature 0 to 60C 32 to 140F Storagetemperature 40 to 100C 40 to 212F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration 5 10 Hz 0 2 5 08mm displacement 10 200 Hz at 1G Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Block Operation The first four circuits on a Voltage Curent Analog I O block are inputs One 12 bit analog to digital A D converter is time shared between the input circuits The block converts each input signal voltage or current to a digital count value It then scales the count value to an integer that represents the engineering units for that input Analog to 240660 Digital Converter Shield ini ut ME A J NP QO JMP Processor AID AMP MUX Filter RTN Ld d R I ER te O COM NOTE ND Common ground and case ground are EE Power Case fee os shared between two output channels Supply Ground Ground Circuits 5 and 6 are outputs A 12 bit digital to analog D A converter serves the output circuits The block scales the engineering units output received from the CPU to a digital count value It then converts the count value to an output signal voltage or current
328. ts REPORT NO LOAD REF Y the output will report No Load conditions YYYNNXXXE N the output will not report No Load conditions gt tgl entr nxt X the circuit has been configured as an input 2 Toselect a circuit press F1 gt 3 Tochange the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl 4 To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Overload Shutdown The Overload Shutdown feature protects output loads field wiring and switching devices from excessive current If a load exceeds 2 8 amps 2 0 amps RMS continuously for 100mS and Overload Shutdown is enabled the block turns the output off and sends an OVERLOAD message Under certain conditions see page 4 7 Overload Shutdown detection and reporting can be disabled for output loads that require more than 2 amps RMS Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 OVRLOAD SHUTDWN REF YYYYNXXKX gt tgl entr nxt 2 3 4 5 Line 3 shows the Overload Shutdown configuration of all circuits Y output will shut down and report diagnostic if overload occurs N output will NOT shut down or report Overload diagnostic X the circuit has been configured as an input To select a circuit press F1 gt To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save
329. ts in a value of 2V at the output the block sends an UNDERRANCGE diagnostic If an underrange or overrange condition occurs the block clamps the output to the selected range limit to protect external hardware Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 GEK 90486D 2 Field Wiring Field devices are wired to terminals 5 32 which accept AWG 22 through AWG 14 wires Do not overtorque the terminal screws Power Source Wiring For block power connect the power source to terminals 6 and 7 Fora 24 48 VDC block connect the source to the DC terminal and the return to the DC terminal For a 115 VAC block connect the source to the H terminal and neutral to N For the 115 VAC block IC660BBA100 only if Class 1 Division 2 conditions must be met for Factory Mutual install a 250 volt 1 8 amp slow blow fuse in series with the Hot AC power connector 250V 1 8 Amp Slow Blow Fuse 844474 rod 7 i d Wiring for I O Devices The ground GND terminal 5 is for block safety It is connected internally to the block chassis and to terminals 12 20 and 28 which are marked GND Each pair of signals has one ground terminal and one common terminal for shield termination if desired The three common terminals are connected together internally to the source For a voltage input device connect the device in series between V and the ter
330. uration should be protected Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the current selection press F2 tgl CONFIG PROTECT REF 2 Press F3 entr to save the new selection DISABLED 3 Press F4 next to return to the first configuration display tgl entr nxt 6 22 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 32 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 9 Two 32 circuit DC blocks are available 244486 m 32 Circuit 12 24 VDC Source block QM IC660BBD024 which provides current to field output devices M J A0 UO GENIUS m 32 Circuit 5 12 24 VDC Sink block Aer IC660BBD025 which receives current from Z RE sik mou field output devices 2 2 GE Fanuc Both blocks operate at a nominal 12 to 24 volts DC The Sink version is also 5 volt TTL compatible Features E 32 Circuit DC I O Blocks interface to a wide range of input devices including both 2 wire and 3 wire electronic proximity switches Outputs may be low power control and indicating devices such as relays contactors and lamps These blocks have 32 identical discrete I O circuits each easily configured to be an input or an output Output circuits can be directly connected to input circuits without the use of other components or inversion of logic states This flexibility provides maximum design and application efficiency 2
331. ured external to the block Entering Scaling Values If you are NOT measuring the process while scaling the circuit have the two pairs of scaling values ready If you ARE measuring the process to scale the circuit set the process to one of the two conditions being measured GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 13 Current source Analog 6 Input Blocks 13 9 Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps IN 1 97 1201 STS ENG uA 30636 3957 gt scale nxt IN 1 ENG uA LOW 850 100 HI 30970 4000 gt chng entr nxt 13 10 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 1 10 11 12 13 Line 1 shows which circuit is selected If you want to scale another circuit press F1 gt If you are NOT measuring the process with the block online go B to step 4 If you are measuring the process with the block online continue at step 3 Line 3 on the status screen shows an engineering units value and the equivalent A signal level for the selected circuit The engineering units value on the left is calculated from on the current scaling If the scaling is wrong the engineering units value is too Make a note of the uA value shown on this screen you will need this information to complete the next screen Press F2 scale to scale the circuit Line 2 shows the circuit s low pair of engineering units and uA values All values on this screen are configured values not measured values Press
332. us I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Overload Shutdown Overload Shutdown protects output loads field wiring and switching devices If a load exceeds 2 8 amps DC for 100mS and Overload Shutdown is enabled the block turns the output off and sends an OVERLOAD message Under certain conditions see page 8 7 Overload Shutdown detection and reporting can be disabled for output loads that require more than 2 amps RMS Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 The screen displays the Overload Shutdown configuration of all OVRLOAD SHUTDWN circuits On this screen REF YYYNNNNNXXXXXXXX Y overload will shut down output gt tgl entr nxt N output will remain on X the circuit has been configured as an input To select a circuit press F1 To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr Qx 3x ioe an Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 8 16 Circuit DC Input Output Blocks 8 19 BSM Present If the block is connected to a single bus or to just one trunk of a dual bus BSM Present should be set to NO Select YES if the block is located in a cluster connected to dual busses via a Bus Switching Module Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps 1 To change the BSM Present configuration press F2 tgl BSM PRESENT REF STATUS 2 To
333. ut FeedbackEnabled Circuit yes yes no Output Feedbacktime Circuit 0mS OmS to 255ms Features marked with an asterisk in the table are configured from the Program Block ID screen of the Hand held Monitor as explained in chapter 3 The rest of the features can be configured either using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Write Configuration datagram to the block from the host Before configuration begins the block s features should be decided on and recorded on a copy of the Configuration Worksheet printed on the next page 11 8 Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 Current source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Blocks Configuration Worksheet Block Location Block Features Configuration Protected Y N Block Number 0 31 Reference Address through Baud Rate 153 6 Kb Std 153 6 Kb Ext 76 8 Kb 38 4 Kb Input Conversion Time 16mS to 400mS Redundancy Features Redundancy Mode None Standby Outputs Default 2 5 10 sec BSM Present Y N BSM Controller Y N Circuit Features Input Circuits Output Circuits 1 2 3 4 5 6 References From To Report Faults Y N Channel Active Y N Scaling Points Low Pt eng units Low Pt uA High Pt eng units High Pt uA Alarm Thresholds Low eng units High eng units Outputs Hold Last St
334. ut mode of all circuits On this screen N normal input mode analog value is reported Y Alarm Input mode only alarm status is reported X the circuit is an output To select a circuit press F1 To change the selection for a circuit press F2 tgl To save the new selection press F3 entr Press F4 next to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 10 Voltage Current 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks 10 17 Alarm Thresholds Example 1 Example 2 Each input circuit can have two unique Alarm Thresholds one for a low engineering units value and one for a high value Maximum values are 32 767 The high threshold should be greater than the low threshold Threshold limits are based on circuit scaling If scaling is changed review and readjust the Alarm Thresholds if necessary Alarm Thresholds may be used for either normal mode or alarm mode inputs see above In normal mode if an input reaches one of the thresholds the block sends the actual value and a LOW ALARM or HIGH ALARM message The message identifies the circuit inalarm Only one message is sent upon reaching the limit Alarms do not stop the process or change the value of the input Alarm Thresholds can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal Typically they are set at levels beyond which the input should not operate or levels beyond which alternate processing is required They can also be set beyond the dynamic range o
335. ut or load device If observation fails to reveal the problem the application program can be used to monitor for circuits that repeatedly change state just before faults are reported Look for inadequate level separation of wiring and poor suppression In particular look for wiring that carries current between an unsuppressed contact and load which is mixed with Genius wiring This can cause problems even with high inductance low current loads that generate high dV dT While these are most commonly found on higher voltage 120 or 480 volt supplies other high energy loads are also suspect Look at higher energy loads and at coil voltages of contactors driven by interposing contacts Switch the load using the contacts to check for noise on the contacts Any devices that produce voltage spikes reaching 400 volts or more in less than 1 microsecond 400 volts per microsecond may cause problems The load should be suppressed The type and amount of suppression needed to reduce dV dT can be significantly lower than would be needed to suppress arcing Generally lowering the dV dT to less than 20 volts per microsecond is sufficient The values determined by the 1mfd per amp rule result in 1 volt per microsecond Lower values can be tried experimentally If a Genius block is running on a floating power source common mode switching to the supply voltage and not recovering to zero generally indicates a grounded load
336. utput Overrange and Underrange m Output Feedback Error GEK 90486D 2 Current source Analog Input Output Blocks a44488 i iL GU 9 dequo GENIUS Current Source Analog In Out 1 L pays eues AO un 115V 50 60 Hz or 125VDC 25A Max GE Fanuc On Blao pageug zrg out Zz o z 6 m p ndno pno zino z mdo zu gindu z u gandui IN Pu anduy ATID AT AT A TT TT OT TT ETE ET VY OV VPN PON ON SCOD PV VO VV QV VK PVG Qggg z Iul pandu 50mA Pt Max 9 z Compatibility These blocks are compatible with all Genius bus controllers PCIM and QBIM modules Hand held Monitor IC660HHM501E version 3 7 or lateris required forconfiguration For a Series Six PLC the CPU must be rev 105 or later ForaSeries Six Plus PLC rev 110 or later is required The programming software mustbe Logicmaster 6 rel 4 02 or later For aSeries Five PLC the CPU must be rev 3 0 or later The Logicmaster5 programming software must be rel 2 01 or later A Bus Switching Module must be the 24 48 VDC version IC660BSM021 only 11 1 Specifications Block Type Fourinput 2outputcircuits CatalogNumbers 115VAC 125VDCCurrentSource Analogblock IC660BBA104 Terminal AssemblyOnly IC660TBA104 Electronics Assembly Only IC660EBA104
337. utput circuit is forced off and the block sends a SHORT CIRCUIT message To restore normal operation the cause of the current surge must be removed then the diagnostic must be cleared from the HHM or the CPU Genius I O Discrete and Analog Blocks User s Manual September 1993 GEK 90486D 2 GEK 90486D 2 Failed Switch Diagnostic BOTH Isolated block versions will report Failed Switch diagnostics for internal faults independent of the output state on both input and output configured circuits Examples include loss of communications with the block s internal microprocessor and some internal power supply faults Block version IC660BBS100 will also report this diagnostic if an output s switch state is not the same as its commanded state The block sends a Failed Switch message identifying the failed circuit The logic state of the circuit is set to OFE When an output fault occurs the actual condition of the output switch is not known If the output switch has failed shorted or closed current flow is not interrupted when the block forces the output state OFF Action external to the block must be taken to remedy the problem The FAILED SWITCH message can alert personnel or cause program logic to be activated possibly shutting off power to the block I O section or process Note False Failed Switch diagnostics may be reported if an external device like a manual switch is wired in parallel with an output Even if fault reporting for the ci
338. while scaling the circuit have the two pairs of scaling values ready If you ARE measuring the process to scale the circuit set the process to one of the two conditions being measured Hand held Monitor Configuration Steps IN1 97 STS ENG 32767 gt scale 1 The next configuration screen after the Channel Active screen is 1201 this status screen Line 1 shows which circuit is selected If you A D want to scale a different circuit press F1 gt 4095 2 Ifyouare NOT measuring the process with the block online go nxt to step 4 GEK 90486D 2 If you are measuring the process with the block online continue at step 3 Chapter 11 Current source Analog 4 Input 2 Output Blocks 11 11 IN 1 ENG A D LOW 850 100 HI 30970 4000 gt chng entr sts 11 12 10 11 12 Line 3 on the status screen shows an engineering units value and the equivalent A signal level for the selected circuit The engineering units value on the left is a calculated value If the scaling is wrong the engineering units value is too The A value on the right is a measured value Make a note of the pA value you will need it to complete the next screen Press F2 scale to scale the circuit Line 2 shows the circuit s lower pair of engineering units and yA values All values on this screen are configured values not measured values Pressing F1 gt moves the cursor Enter the engineering units value s This
339. ws the range presently selected for the circuit identified on line 2 1 To select another circuit for configuration press F1 gt RANGE SELECT i 3 fede near T IN 1 97 120 I 2 To change the range selection for the circuit press F2 tgl To RANGE 10V 410V save the new selection press F3 entr tgl entr nxt 3 Press F4 next when you are ready to advance to the next configuration display GEK 90486D 2 Chapter 10 Voltage Current 4 Input 2 Output Analog Blocks 10 11 Circuit Scaling 10 12 Each circuit can be configured for a different type or increment of engineering units values The default configuration for each circuit is to operate in the range of 10VDC and to report engineering units of millivolts If those selections are appropriate the default configuration can be used If units of millivolts are not appropriate or a circuit has been reconfigured to another voltage curent range it should be rescaled All that is needed to scale a circuit is two pairs of associated digital count values and engineering units values These can be taken from the following table or from actual process measurements or they can be estimates of expected values Scaling Values for 1mV or 1uA Engineering Units If a circuit should use 1mV or 14A engineering units configure its scaling by entering values from the table below It is not necessary to re enter the default values RANGE

Genius I/O Discrete and Analog Blocks User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents